Remote Automation Solutions Bristol TeleFlow EGM 3530-10B Owner's Manual

Instruction Manual

CI-3530-10B

May, 2006

TeleFlow

™

TeleFlow Model 3530-10B

Electronic Gas Measurement Computer

www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!

Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.

These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.

Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol for further information.

EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING

The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc. If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol .

RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING

When returning any equipment to Bristol for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol and save Bristol harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.

ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April 16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).

The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE

This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read supplemental document S14006 at the back of this manual for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.

Bristol Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Telephone (860) 945-2200

C.

D.

F.

A.

A.

B.

E.

B.

WARRANTY

Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.

Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety

(90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.

Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol, are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.

All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without

Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.

THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES AS TO

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), AND NO

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES,

OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN

IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND

THE DESCRIPTION OF THE FACE HEREOF.

No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.

REMEDIES

Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if

Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Water-town office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstalllation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.

Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation, from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.

How to return material for Repair or Exchange

Before a product can be returned to Bristol for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA (Return

Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.

You can easily obtain a RA number by:

A. FAX

Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A Bristol Repair

Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

B. E-MAIL

Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Web site (www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]

. A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.

C. Mail

Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to

Bristol Inc.

Repair

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

D. Phone

Calling the Bristol Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A Bristol Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.

A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.

Bristol Inc. Repair Authorization Form

(off-line completion)

(Providing this information will permit Bristol Inc. to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)

Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_

Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.

•

Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy

•

Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form

•

Return to Customer

Line No.____________

Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:

•

There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (

√

in “returned”

B,C, or D of part III below)

Part I Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns

Address No.

Bill to :

Purchase Order:

Phone:

(office use only) Address No.

Ship to:

Fax:

(office use only)

Contact Name: ____________________________________

E-Mail:

Model No./Part No. Description

Range/Calibration S/N

Reason for return : Failure Upgrade Verify Operation Other

1.

Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,

Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)

(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)

2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________

3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?

Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available

A.

If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to Bristol’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?

B.

If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:

C.

If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product: repaired returned replaced scrapped? returned replaced scrapped?

D.

If Bristol is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: returned replaced *see below?

* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: ______________________________ phone_____________________

If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone_____________________

Special Requests: ____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Ship prepaid to: Bristol Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875 Form GBU 13.01 Rev. B 04/11/06

Bristol

Training

GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL

INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM

• Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line

• Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.

• Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.

• Know your system.

As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Inc. offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol products and realize the full potential of your system.

For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at

(860) 945-2343. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-

6200.

A Few Words About Bristol Inc.

For over 100 years, Bristol has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey

SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.

On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Inc. instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.

Getting Additional Information

In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:

Help Files / Release Notes

Many Bristol Inc. software products incorporate help screens. In addition, the software typically includes a ‘read me’ release notes file detailing new features in the product, as well as other information which was available too late for inclusion in the manual.

Contacting Bristol Inc. Directly

Bristol Inc.'s world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,

Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.

Our main phone numbers are:

(860) 945-2200

(860) 945-2213 (FAX)

Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.

Telephone Support - Technical Questions

During regular business hours, Bristol Inc.'s Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.

For technical questions about TeleFlow products call (860) 945-8604.

For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2394 or (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]

For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, OpenBSI Utilities , UOI and all other software except for Control Wave and OpenEnterprise products, call (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.

You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]

The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/

For assistance in interfacing Bristol hardware to radios, contact Bristol’s Communication

Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-9464 .

You can e-mail the Communication Technology Group at: [email protected]

Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.

Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover of this manual) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.

Please call the main Bristol Inc. number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.

Visit our Site on the World Wide Web

For general information about Bristol Inc. and its products, please visit our site on the

World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com

Training Courses

Bristol’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2343 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.

Contents

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

Page

1.2.3

1.2.4

Internal Mounting Brackets..................................................................................... 1-3

Display/Switch Panel Assembly ............................................................................. 1-3

1.2.6

1.2.7

Local Communications Port.................................................................................... 1-3

Battery & power Options......................................................................................... 1-3

1.2.8 Board........................................................................................................... 1-4

1.2.9 Solar Panel Options................................................................................................ 1-5

1.2.11 Field Wiring Options ............................................................................................... 1-5

1.2.12 Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) Option ........................................... 1-5

1.2.13 Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board Option ........................................ 1-5

1.2.14 Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option ........................................ 1-6

1.3.2 Processing................................................................................................... 1-7

1.3.3.2

1.3.3.3

1.3.3.4

1.3.4.1

1.3.4.2

1.3.4.3

1.3.4.4

Extension Calculation and Analog Averaging ........................................................ 1-7

Flow Rate Calculations........................................................................................... 1-7

Volume and Energy Integration .............................................................................. 1-7

Downstream Pressure Tap..................................................................................... 1-8

Daily Historical Data Log ........................................................................................ 1-8

Periodic Historical Data Log ................................................................................... 1-8

Historical Trending Log........................................................................................... 1-9

Alarm and Event Storage ....................................................................................... 1-9

1.3.6.1 BSAP Message Support....................................................................................... 1-10

1.3.7.1 Flow Rate Control - DDC (jog control) using PID ................................................. 1-11

1.3.7.2 Pulse Output for External Totalizer or Sampler .................................................... 1-11

1A.1

1A.2

1A.4

Section 1A - APPLICATION SOFTWARE

CATEGORIES OF APPLICATION SOFTWARE..................................................1A-1

ACCOL TOOLS SOFTWARE ..............................................................................1A-2

OPEN BSI UTILITIES SOFTWARE .....................................................................1A-4

1A.5.2 Local Area Network (LAN)....................................................................................1A-7

1A.5.3 Wide Area Network (WAN)...................................................................................1A-9

3530-10B Contents / 0-1

Contents

Page

Section 2 - INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS ............................................................ 2-1

MOUNTING THE TeleFlow™ ............................................................................... 2-1

2.1

2.2

Opening Instrument Front Cover..................................................................... 2-4

JP3 Battery Backup Enable.................................................................................... 2-5

2.3.3 TeleFlow Grounding and Signal Shielding ............................................................. 2-8

2.3.4 Connections ................................................................................................ 2-8

2.4 WIRING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS.................................................................... 2-11

2.4.4

2.4.5.1

Auxiliary Analog Input........................................................................................... 2-13

RS-232 Network and Local Communications Ports ............................................. 2-14

2.4.5.3 Port......................................................................................................... 2-15

2.4.5.4

2.5

2.5.1

Modem On Network Port ...................................................................................... 2-15

MOUNTING THE OPTIONAL SOLAR PANEL .................................................... 2-17

Swivel (Directional Facing) ................................................................................... 2-17

2.6.1

2.7

2.7.1

2.7.2

2.8

Application Software Reference Documents ........................................................ 2-20

INSTALLING A TeleFlow IN A HAZARDOUS AREA ........................................... 2-20

Installing a Nonincendive TeleFlow ...................................................................... 2-20

Installing an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow................................................................ 2-20

INSTALLATION OF A COMMUNICTATION OPTION ......................................... 2-21

Section 3 - SERVICE

3.2

3.3

3.3.1

3.3.2

3.3.3

3.3.4

3.3.5

3.3.6

3.3.7

3.3.8

ACCESSING PARTS FOR TESTING OR REPLACEMENT ................................. 3-1

COMPONENT REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................... 3-2

Intrinsically Safe Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure .................................. 3-2

Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Modem Option)........................... 3-5

Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Radio Option) ............................. 3-8

CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement

(without Radio/Modem Option)............................................................................. 3-10

CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement

(with Radio/Modem Option).................................................................................. 3-11

Removal/Replacement of the On Board Fuse F1................................................. 3-13

Removal/Replacement of the On Board Battery .................................................. 3-13

Removal/Replacement of the Display/Switch Panel Assembly............................ 3-14

0-2 / Contents 3530-10B

Contents

Page

Section 3 - SERVICE (Continued)

3.3.9 Removal/Replacement of the Modem or Radio Options ...................................... 3-15

3.3.10 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion TIB Option ........................................... 3-16

3.3.11 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Rs-232 Intf. Bd. Option........................ 3-16

3.3.12 Removal/Replacement of the Exp. RS-485 and/or AO Bd. Option ...................... 3-16

3.4.1 Battery & Fuse F1 Checks (Processor not running or no power) ....................... 3-16

3.4.3

3.4.5

3.4.6

LCD Display Checks............................................................................................. 3-17

TMS Menu System .............................................................................................. 3-18

Field Wiring/Signal Checks .................................................................................. 3-18

Section 4 - SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 MODEL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................... 4-1

4.4 CPU, MEMORY & PROGRAM INTERFACE ......................................................... 4-3

Supplements

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations.......................... Appendix A

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.......................... Appendix B

Communications Protocol Support .........................................................................Appendix C

Radio Installation Guide for MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios .........Appendix D

TeleFlow™ FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver Option .......Appendix E

Using the TeleFlow™ Menu System ..................................................................... Appendix F

Expansion Comm. Port RS-232 Board for Models 3530-XXX .........................PIP-EXP232TF

Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board for Models 3530-XXX ........PIP-EXP485/AO

Expansion Transmitter Interface Board for Models 3530-XXX......................... PIP-EXPTIBTF

Site Considerations For Equipment Installation, Grounding & Wiring ......................... S1400A

Care and Handling of PC Boards and ESD-Sensitive Components ............................S14006

TeleFlow™ Material Safety Data Sheets ............................................................... Appendix Z

REFERENCED or ASSOCIATED Bristol DOCUMENTS

Bristol 9600 bps - PSTN Modem P/N 396039-02-2 Instruction Manual ...................... CI-9600

Bristol 9600 bps - PSTN Modem P/N 400000-01-6 Instruction Manual .................. CI-9600TF

Isolated RS-485 Interface Board ...................................................................... PIP-ISORS485

UOI Configuration Manual ..............................................................................................D5074

UOI Operator Manual .....................................................................................................D5075

3530-10B Contents / 0-3

Contents

Page

REFERENCED or ASSOCIATED Bristol DOCUMENTS (Continued)

TeleFlow Standard ACCOL Load ...................................................................................D4087

TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8 Installation Instructions ...........PIP-3530-MGKI

TechView User’s Guide ..................................................................................................D5131

REFERENCED OEM MANUALS

MDS 4710A – Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide –

MDS Doc. 05-3305A01, Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 4710A

MDS 4710B – Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,

Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 4710B

MDS 9810 – Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 9810/24810 900 MHz/2.4GHz Spread Spectrum Transceivers Installation and Operation Guide –

MDS Doc. 05-3301A01, Rev. B, April 2000 (PDF = 3301B-x810.pdf) for model MDS 9810

MDS 9710A Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver – MDS Doc. 05-3305A01,

Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (Installation & Operation) (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 9710A

MDS 9710B Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,

Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 9710B

FreeWave Radio Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver Model FGRM-501X005

Contact the FreeWave Tech Support group @ 303-444-3862 or at www.freewave.com to request the latest copy of the user manual.

0-4 / Contents 3530-10B

Section 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TeleFlow J Electronic Gas Measurement (EGM) Computer measures differential pressure, static pressure and temperature for a single run and computes flow for both volume and energy. In addition to operation in an unprotected outdoor environment, the TeleFlow J EGM Computer has been designed to provide the following key features:

$ Low cost

$ Very low power consumption

$ Integral transducer with "smart" performance

$ Calculates AGA3 (API 14.3)/NX-19 (1985), AGA3 (API 14.3)/AGA8 (1992) and AGA5

$ Two independent serial ports

$ Two line alphanumeric display

$ Two discrete outputs with control capability & Two discrete inputs

$ RTD input

$ Auxiliary analog input

$ Designed for Class I, Div. 2 Groups C & D Haz. Locations usage (Appendix A)

$ Designed for Class I, Div. 1 Groups C & D Haz. Locations usage (See Appendix B)

1.2

PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION

TeleFlow J EGMs are comprised of the following major components:

$ Enclosure

$ Multivariable Transducer

$ Internal mounting brackets

$ Circuit (CPU) Board

$ Display/Switch Panel Assembly

$ Serial communications port

$ Battery option

$ Field wiring options

Additionally, TeleFlow J EGMs have been designed to support the following options:

$ RTD probe option

$ Solar panel option

$ Expansion Transmitter Interface Board option

$ Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board option

$ Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board option

1.2.1 Enclosure

The enclosure is custom molded in Lexan 503 plastic. Its external dimensions (excluding the multivariable transducer) are approximately 10.3" high by 10.3" wide by 7.4" deep. The multivariable transducer adds 2.9" to the height. The enclosure consists of two pieces, the body and the Instrument Front Cover. A continuous gasket seals the unit when the Instrument Front

Cover is closed. A hinge on the right side (facing the front of the unit) is formed by molded channels on the Instrument Front Cover and body which capture a stainless steel pin. When closed, the Instrument Front Cover is secured by three captive quarter turn fasteners along the

TeleFlow™ Introduction / 1-1

left side. A hole is also provided on the left side to allow the use of a padlock to secure the

Instrument Front Cover.

1.2.2 Multivariable Transducer

The multivariable transducer (pressure assembly), either connects directly to a process manifold or the gas is carried to the transducer by tubing. In the body of the transducer, metal diaphragms are exposed to the gas. Solid-state strain gauge sensors in the neck of the transducer measure the pressure applied to the diaphragms and produce proportional electrical signals.

1-2 / Introduction

Figure 1-1 - TeleFlow J

TeleFlow™

The neck of the multivariable transducer extends into the bottom of the enclosure, with the body of the transducer outside the enclosure. The transducer cable plugs directly into the TeleFlow circuit board.

1.2.3 Internal Mounting Brackets

Aluminum brackets attach to the interior of the enclosure body to support the circuit board, battery, and communications options. Another bracket attaches to the inside of the Instrument

Front Cover to support the LCD Display and the Switch Panel.

An aluminum plate mounts on top of the circuit board. The plate provides physical and electrical protection for the circuit board as well as printed labels with terminal identification.

1.2.4 Display/Switch Panel Assembly

The Display/Switch Panel Assembly mounts to the inside of the Instrument Front Cover where it is visible through a window. This Assembly consists of the LCD Display Subassembly and the

Membrane Switch Assembly. A Gasket provides a seal between the LCD Display Subassembly and the Instrument Front Cover. Both the LCD Display Subassembly and the Membrane Switch

Panel connect to the CPU Board through dedicated ribbon cables. The Membrane Switch is used to activate the 2 X 16 Character LCD Display.

1.2.5 RTD Probe

An RTD temperature probe mounts directly to the gas pipeline using a thermowell, external to the TeleFlow enclosure. RTD wires are protected by a metal sheath which is connected to a liquid tight conduit fitting on the bottom of the enclosure. The RTD wires connect to the field wiring terminals on the CPU Board.

1.2.6 Local Communications Port

A circular plastic connector on the bottom of the enclosure body provides connection for a local communications device, typically an IBM compatible PC (personal computer). A custom cable connects the PC serial port to the TeleFlow. Internally, the circular connector is wired to field wiring terminals on the main circuit board.

1.2.7 Battery & Power Options

Either disposable or rechargeable batteries can be mounted inside the TeleFlow enclosure. The battery (or batteries) mount to the left of the CPU board and are secured by one or two aluminum brackets (depending on the configuration). The following power systems are offered

(also see Section 1.2.9):

$ Single 6V Lead-acid Battery

(with 1W, 6V Solar Power System)

$ Single 6V Lead-acid Battery

(with 5W, 6V Solar Power System)

$ 12V Lead-acid Battery

(with 5W, 12V Solar Power System)

$ 12V Alkaline Battery System

(Non-Rechargeable)

$ Single 6V Lithium Pack

$ Dual 6V Lithium Pack

$ Intrinsically Safe 6V Lead-acid Battery

(with 1W, 6V Solar Power System)

$ Intrinsically Safe 6V Lead-acid Battery

(with 5W, 6V Solar Power System)

$ 12V Lead-acid Battery

(with 5W, 12V SP System & with Radio)

$ 12V Alkaline Battery System

(Rechargeable)

$ Intrinsically Safe Single 6V Lithium Pack

Note: Intrinsically Safe Battery Systems are Only Available From BBI - see Appendix B.

TeleFlow™ Introduction / 1-3

Each battery option connects to a PWR input (refer to Figure 1-2) using a pair of wires. The dual configurations connect to both the PWR 1 and PWR 2 inputs.

1.2.8 Circuit Board

The TeleFlow circuit board mounts on the right side of the enclosure, attached to standoffs on the mounting bracket by three screws and two posts. The board is approximately 7.3" tall, 4.8" wide, and 0.7" deep. Both surface mount and through-hole components are located on the component side of the board, and small surface mount components are located on the solder side.

1-4 \ Introduction

Figure 1-2 TeleFlow J CPU Board

TeleFlow™

Pluggable terminal connectors line the front edge of the board, along with two LED indicators and a potentiometer for display contrast adjustment. Connectors and configuration positions are located on the top of the board as shown in Figure 1-2.

1.2.9 Solar Panel Option

A solar panel is used with the rechargeable battery option. Three different solar panels are available; i.e., a 1 Watt (1W) and two 5 Watt (5W) versions. The 5W panel is available in 6V or

12V configurations while the 1W panel provides 6 volts. The 1 Watt solar panel mounts on a bracket which offers adjustable swivel and tilt angles, while the 5 Watt version's bracket mounts to a 2" pipe at a fixed 50 E ±2 E . The 5W panel can be swiveled but its tilt angle is fixed 55 E . The brackets can be attached to the TeleFlow enclosure or mounted remotely. The solar panel wires enter the TeleFlow through a liquid tight conduit fitting on the bottom of the enclosure.

Internally the solar panel wires connect to a rechargeable battery.

1.2.10 Communications Option

A modem or a radio (with integral modem) can be mounted inside the TeleFlow enclosure. The modem or radio option typically connects to the auxiliary power output and network serial port field wiring terminals on the main circuit board.

1.2.11 Field Wiring Options

The TeleFlow supports connection to external devices through its field wiring terminals on the

CPU board.

$ RTD wiring

$ Digital inputs

$ Digital outputs

$ Pulse input

$ Analog input

$ External communications

1.2.12 Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) Option

Expansion Transmitter Interface Boards (ETIBs) allow up to two (2) Bristol Babcock, Series

3508C Transmitters to communicate with an ACCOL loaded host TeleFlow or TeleFlow Plus

Electronic Gas Measurement Computer (EGMC) (3530-10B/20B), a TeleRTU, TeleRTU Plus or

TeleRTU Module (3530-15B/25B/35B), a TeleRecorder (3530-45B) or a TelFlow Corrector (3530-

50B). The TeleFlow polls and stores data from each transmitter and communicates with the network.

The ETIB Board is interfaced to a TeleFlow/TeleRTU CPU Board via the CPU Board’s Expansion

Connector. Power from and communication with the host CPU Board is supplied through the

Expansion Connector. ETIB Boards contain one jumper (JP1) for configuration purposes.

1.2.13 Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board Option

The Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232) provides a single RS-232 asynchronous serial communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s "local" and "network" RS-232 ports, any model 3530-

XXX unit equipped with an EXPCOM232 Board can establish RS-232 communications with an external device. An EXPCOM232 Board plugs into the Expansion Connector of the TeleFlow or

TeleRTU CPU Board and is stood-off by three 15/32" long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXPCOM232 Board.

TeleFlow™ Introduction / 1-5

Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXPCOM232 Board. TXD, RXD,

RTS, CTS, DTR, CD and GND (RS-232) signals are available at TB1 of the EXPCOM232 Board.

CD (Carraier Detect) (supplied by a DCE attempting to communicate with a model 3530-XXX), will awaken the 3530-XXX CPU Board. If no activity is required, the EXPCOM232 Board’s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-232 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX.

1.2.14 Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option

The Expansion RS-485 Comm. Port with Analog Output Board (EXP485/AO) provides a single RS-485 communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident

(host) CPU’s "local" and "network" RS-232 ports, any model 3530-XXX unit equipped with a fully populated EXP485/AO Board can establish RS-485 asynchronous communications with other 3530-

XXX devices and/or can interface to an Analog Output circuit. The EXP485/AO Board plugs into the

Expansion Connector of the TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board, is stood-off by three 15/32" long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and

3530-XXX communication to the EXP485/AO Board.

Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXP485/AO Board. Interface signals are available at TB1 of the EXP485/AO. The SLEEP+ & SLEEP- signals (supplied by the Master

35300-XXX) will awaken the remote 3530-XXX CPU Boards. If no activity is required, the EXP485/AO

Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-485 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX.

1.3 FUNCTIONS

The primary function of the TeleFlow is to measure the flow of natural gas in accordance with

API (American Petroleum Institute) and AGA (American Gas Association) standards. The following items implement and supplement the primary function:

$ Data acquisition

$ Signal processing

$ Flow calculations

$ Data archives

$ Audit trail archives

$ Local display

$ Communications

$ Control outputs

$ Status inputs

$ Self test and diagnostics

1.3.1 Data Acquisition

The process inputs used by the TeleFlow are static pressure, differential pressure, and temperature. Static and differential pressure are measured by the Multivariable Transducer, and flowing temperature is measured by the RTD probe. Additional signals are monitored for self-test and to compensate for the effects of temperature and individual differences between sensors and circuit board components from unit to unit.

Regardless of the operating mode or the calculation interval, the TeleFlow acquires samples as follows: a. Differential pressure four times per second at ~1/4 second intervals b. Static pressure two times per second at ~1/2 second intervals c. Flowing temperature once per second d. All self-test and compensation values at intervals of 4 seconds or less

1-6 \ Introduction TeleFlow™

1.3.2 Signal Processing

Each second, the process variable values (differential pressure, static pressure, and flowing temperature) acquired during that second are processed. The values are filtered and then compensated using characterization data stored in the EEPROM. The results of the filtering and compensation are used to produce floating point values. One floating point value for each process variable is stored every second.

1.3.3 Flow Calculations

The TeleFlow periodically performs a complete flow calculation using the stored floating point values. The user may select a calculation interval of 1, 2, 5, 15, or 60 seconds. Maximum power conservation is achieved by using the longest calculation interval. Each calculation includes instantaneous rate according to API 14.3, compressibility according to AGA 8 Detail or Gross method, and updates of all volumes, totals, and archive averages. The user can select AGA3/NX-

19 (1985) or AGA3/AGA8.

1.3.3.1 Flow Time

The compensated differential pressure value stored for each second is compared to a low flow cutoff value. If the differential pressure is less than the low flow cutoff value, flow is considered to be zero for that second. Flow time for a calculation cycle is defined to be the number of seconds for which the differential pressure exceeded the cutoff value.

1.3.3.2 Extension Calculation and Analog Averaging

For each second of flow time, a flow extension is calculated. The extension is the square root of the absolute upstream static pressure times the differential pressure. The flow time average of these extensions is used in the flow rate calculation.

Flow time averages of static and differential pressure and temperature are computed for each calculation cycle. When there is no flow for an entire calculation cycle, arithmetic averages of static pressure and temperature are reported. This allows monitoring of static pressure and temperature during shut-in periods.

1.3.3.3 Flow Rate Calculations

The average values for static and differential pressure, temperature, and flow extension for a calculation cycle are used as inputs to the flow equations to compute an instantaneous rate.

If the new (default) equations are selected, API 14.3 (1992) and AGA 8 calculations are used.

Compressibility is calculated according to AGA Report No. 8, 1992 (with 1993 errata). Both the

DETAIL method and the two GROSS methods of characterization described in AGA 8 are supported. If the user selects the old flow equations, the instantaneous rate of flow is calculated using the equations AGA3 1995 and NX-19.

Energy Calculation

The TeleFlow offers the option of using a fixed volumetric heating value or calculating the energy content of the gas according to AGA Report No. 5.

Volume and Energy Integration

Volume and energy are each integrated and accumulated at the end of every calculation cycle.

The volume for a cycle is the calculated rate multiplied by the flow time for that cycle. The energy in the TeleFlow J is calculated by multiplying the volume at BASE conditions by the heating value.

TeleFlow™ Introduction / 1-7

1.3.3.4 Downstream Pressure Tap

The multivariable transducer typically measures static pressure from an integral tap on the upstream, high pressure leg of the differential pressure connection. Static pressure can be measured at the downstream pressure tap, with the measurement taken from the low pressure side to the high pressure side. In this installation, the differential signal from the transducer is negative. If the user selects the downstream tap location during TeleFlow configuration, the

TeleFlow firmware changes the sign of the differential pressure to provide a positive DP value.

1.3.4 Archives

The TeleFlow stores two distinct types of archive data. The first type is Audit Trail data, which is a recording of the various events and alarms that have an impact on the calculated and reported rates and volumes. The second type is historical data, which includes records of rates and volumes and other signals over time. When an archive log becomes full, new entries replace the oldest entries in the log.

Where feasible, both forms of archive data conform to the requirements of the API Chapter 21

(the Committee on Gas Measurement's EFM document). Specifically, the averages of the process variables stored in the data archive are for flowing periods, appropriate to their usage in the equations, and any parameter changed by an operator either remotely or locally causes an entry in the audit log.

The TeleFlow supports the "breaking" of a log period when an operator entered parameter is changed. When this occurs, the log period in process is closed out, a log is made, and a new log is begun. This feature is disabled by default and may be enabled by the operator. Note: to prevent several very short logs from being created due to a series of successive configuration changes, the TeleFlow will not create a log which contains less than 60 seconds (flowing or otherwise) of data. Therefore if a user enters 15 configuration changes over a 2 minute period, the log will only be broken twice.

1.3.4.1 Daily Historical Data Log

The daily data log holds one record for every contract day. The contract hour may be changed by the user. The daily log holds 64 entries; this ensures that the previous calendar month of daily data is always resident in TeleFlow memory.

The user can define which items are stored in the daily data log. All signals in the Master Signal

Directory are available for logging. When the data log definition is changed, all previously stored archive data is erased. The items stored by default are:

$ Flowing Differential Pressure

$ Flowing Static Pressure

$ Flowing Temperature

$ Flow Time

$ Integrated Flow Extension for the contract day

$ Accumulated Volume for the contract day

$ Accumulated Energy for the contract day

$ Average Value of the Auxiliary Analog Input (Flow Time Average)

Each log entry also contains the date and time.

1.3.4.2 Periodic Historical Data Log

The periodic data log holds one record for every log interval. The log interval may be 15 minutes or 1 hour. The default interval is 1 hour. Changing this interval does not affect data already stored.

1-8 \ Introduction TeleFlow™

The items stored by default are:

$ Flowing Differential Pressure

$ Flowing Static Pressure

$ Flowing Temperature

$ Flow Time

$ Integrated Flow Extension for the interval

$ Accumulated Volume for the interval

$ Accumulated Energy for the interval

$ Average Value of the Auxiliary Analog Input (Flow Time Average)

Each log entry also contains the date and time.

The periodic log holds as many entries as available memory permits up to a maximum log size of 61000 bytes. The size of a single record is 8 bytes + (4 * number of floating point values). In the default configuration, the TeleFlow stores 63 days of hourly logs. When the periodic log is full, new entries replace the oldest entries in the log.

1.3.4.3 Historical Trending Log

In addition to the periodic and daily historical archives, the TeleFlow keeps an 8 day trending log. This log contains instantaneous snapshots of certain data at 15 minute intervals for the most recent 8 days. This interval approximates the data points on a standard 8 day paper chart.

The Historic Trending Log may only be accessed using a PC.

The default contents of the Historic Trending Log are:

$ Differential Pressure

$ Static Pressure

$ Temperature

Each log entry also contains the date and time.

1.3.4.4 Alarm and Event Storage

The TeleFlow keeps an Audit Trail Buffer capable of storing the most recent 200 Alarms and the most recent 200 Events. Internally, these buffers are maintained separately to prevent recurring alarms from overwriting configuration audit data. Externally, they are reported to the user as a single entity. Both operate in a circular fashion with new entries overwriting the oldest entry when the buffer is full.

The following circumstances cause an entry to be made in the Audit Trail Buffer:

$ Any operator change to a TeleFlow configuration variable

$ Any change in the state of a TeleFlow alarm signal

$ A system restart

$ Certain other system events

1.3.5 LCD Display

In normal operation, the display stays off after the unit is configured and placed in service. The operator may activate the display at any time by pressing the front panel button. When activated, the display scrolls through a list of current values. The list defaults to an appropriate set of values.

When the button is pressed, the TeleFlow J wakes up from sleep mode and enters calculation mode. While cycling through the display list, the calculation interval switches to 1 second. After

TeleFlow™ Introduction / 1-9

cycling through the list twice, the calculation interval is restored to the programmed interval and the unit returns to normal operation.

1.3.6 Communications

The TeleFlow J provides two serial ports for serial communications, designated the network port (9600 bps - Default) and the local port (19200 bps - default). Both ports operate independently at rates up to 19.2 Kbps. Communications with the TeleFlow J has no effect on calculation times. The network port is a standard BSAP slave port with alarm support intended for remote communication via a BSAP network. The network port also supports EBSAP addressing conventions. The local port is a BSAP pseudo-slave port for direct connect communication with various BBI programs running on a laptop PC. It should be noted that on the local port with a direct connect, the TeleFlow address.

J will answer to any local BSAP node

The TeleFlow J is a terminal slave node in the BSAP network. As such it is not capable of initiating a BSAP message intended for another node. The TeleFlow J is always an immediate response node.

1.3.6.1 BSAP Message Support

The TeleFlow J supports a subset of BSAP messages. Specifically, the following messages are supported:

TS/NRT message

Alarm Acknowledge

Alarm Initialization

Peer to Peer

Transmitter Calibration

RDB functions

RDB Extensions

3308 RDB functions alarm reporting in short, long, and extended format. If a poll is received on the network port, and the TeleFlow has no

NRT, it will respond with a request for a Node Routing

Table.

Normal handling.

Normal handling.

Normal handling.

Supports send and poll mode.

All messages directed to message exchange 50H are handled exactly as if the TeleFlow were a 3508. The baud rate and local address supported depend on the communication mode.

Supports read signal by name and address, read packed logical, read by list, read selected signal data (name match only), write by name and address, and write by list.

Supports Audit Trail functions, security code functions,

EBSAP Group functions, and Archive data functions. All subfunctions of these are supported.

Supports date and time requests, local BSAP address requests, and the system reset request.

1.3.7 Discrete I/O

The TeleFlow J provides two discrete inputs and two outputs. The inputs can be configured to cause alarm log entries (discrete input alarming is disabled by default as factory shipped). The outputs provide control capabilities. The user has the choice of volume based pulse output or flow control. If the user inadvertently enables both control algorithms, the TeleFlow J internally disables the volume based output control.

1-10 \ Introduction TeleFlow™

1.3.7.1 Flow Rate Control - DDC (jog control) using PID

When the user configures the TeleFlow J to perform flow rate control, the two digital output signals are wired to the Open and Close inputs of a controller. The TeleFlow J uses a

Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID) algorithm to cause the measured rate of flow to match a user entered setpoint. When the flow rate is below the setpoint, the Open output is pulsed.

When the flow rate is above the setpoint, the Close output is pulsed. The PID equation calculates the duration of the Open or Close pulse. The minimum pulse duration is 0.1 seconds. The user changeable parameters are:

$ Flow Setpoint in MSCFH

$ Deadband in % of setpoint

$ Proportional Gain

$ Integral Time in repeats/minute

$ Derivative Time in seconds

$ Valve Travel Time (full close to full open)

$ Process Control Limiting

$ Pressure Override Limits

The flow control algorithm runs once each calculation cycle. When the flow rate is not within the deadband, the TeleFlow J automatically switches to a 1 second calculation interval. After the setpoint is reached, it reverts to the programmed calculation interval. This feature allows the unit to be configured for optimum power conservation without sacrificing flow control performance.

The TeleFlow J implements a process limit sensing algorithm; the object of which is to sense when the process has quit responding to control outputs. When this situation is detected, PID control is suspended to avoid damaging field equipment. One of the following two conditions must be met in order for the TeleFlow J to believe that the process is responding:

1. The flow rate must be changing by at least 0.5% of the user entered maximum flow rate each second.

2. The magnitude of the error must be reduced by 10% each second.

If neither of these conditions is met, the TeleFlow J concludes that the process is no longer responding, and will only send a cumulative total of eight (8) seconds of pulses to the control valve before suspending control. In order for control to begin again, the flow rate must cross to the other side of the setpoint (a sign change in the error), or the PID control may be disabled and re-enabled.

This process limiting feature, which is enabled by default, may be disabled by the user. If the user disables this feature, the TeleFlow J will continue pulsing the control element indefinitely even if the setpoint can't be reached.

1.3.7.2 Pulse Output for External Totalizer or Sampler

When the TeleFlow J is configured to provide a pulse output based on volume, the operator provides a control volume and a pulse duration. After each calculation cycle, an internal volume accumulator is compared to the control volume. If the accumulator exceeds the control volume then a pulse is output and the accumulator is reduced by the volume represented by the pulse.

The pulse output may be used to drive an external totalizer, odorizer, gas sampler, or similar device.

1.3.7.3 Nominations

The nomination function allows a user to establish a time period over which an accumulation count of volume or energy that is delivered during the period is monitored and compared to a

TeleFlow™ Introduction / 1-11

configured 'nomination' value. When the nomination value is reached, the system will perform an action (such as opening or closing a valve). prior to nomination being reached, the volume/energy will be compared to a configured alarm level and an alarm will be generated when the volume/energy reaches or exceeds the defined (specified) level.

1.3.8 Self Test

The TeleFlow J periodically runs a series of diagnostics to verify the operational status of various system components. The tests include EPROM checksum, transducer parameters, main and backup battery voltages, software sanity checks, and other indications of system health.

An appropriate alarm is generated if any test fails.

1.4 ENVIRONMENT

The TeleFlow J operates in an unprotected outdoor environment.

TOPIC

Operating Temperature Range

Operating Humidity Range

Transient Susceptibility

Vibration Effect

ESD Susceptibility

EMI Susceptibility

Hazardous Locations

Intrinsically Safe Design

SPECIFICATION

-40 E to +60 E C (-40 E to +140 E F)

0 E to 40 E C (+32 E to 104 E F) (with akaline battery)

15% to 90% RH Noncondensing

Field connected circuits meet the requirements of

ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1980 (formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.

Less than ±0.1% FS for (15 to 150)Hz at 2g and 150-

2000Hz at 1g on any axis per SAMA PMC.31.1.

Meets ESD withstand capability up to 10KV (No

Damage).

Meets SAMA PMC 33.1-1978 from 20MHz to 500 MHz.

Effect on pressure and temperature reading is less than ±0.25% FS.

Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups C &

D hazardous locations (in certain configurations - see

Section 4.1 for model numbers)(see Appendix A).

Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1,

Groups C & D hazardous locations (in certain configuration - see Section 4.1 for model numbers)(see

Appendix B).

Table 1-1 Environmental Specifications

1-12 \ Introduction TeleFlow™

Section 1A

APPLICATION SOFTWARE

3530-15B

3530-20B

3530-20B

3530-20B

3530-25B

3530-25B

3530-35B

3530-35B

3530-45B

3530-45B

3530-50B

3530-50B

3530-50B

3530-55B

3530-55B

1A.1 CATEGORIES OF APPLICATION SOFTWARE

All TeleFlow GFC (Gas Flow Computer), TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units have the option of running a user generated ACCOL load. In addition, Fixed ‘ C ’ application loads are available for the TeleFlow GFC and the TeleFlow Corrector, a standard

BBI ACCOL load (or a variation) is available for the TeleFlow GFC, the TeleCorrector and

TeleRecorders. Additionally, ACCOL based TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder users have the option of using UOI or TMS to view menus, and UOI configuration tools to modify menus. Units that have a Low Power I/O Expansion Board installed have the option of utilizing the 2-Run ACCOL load.

With respect to the program load, TeleRTU units that don’t contain a Low Power I/O

Expansion Board (3530-15B/25B/35B) do not have a standard BBI ACCOL load installed; the user must create and download their own ACCOL load.

Table 1A-1 provides a list of the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and

TeleRecorder program loads.

Table 1A-1

TeleFlow (3530-10B/20B), TeleFlow Corrector (3530-50B),

TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B/35B) & TeleRecorder (3530-45B/55B) Program Loads

Model #

3530-10B

3530-10B

3530-10B

Program Load

Fixed ‘ C ’ Program

Standard BBI ACCOL Load

User-created ACCOL load

User-created ACCOL load

Fixed ‘ C ’ Program

User-created ACCOL load

Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load

User-created ACCOL load

Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load

User-created ACCOL load

Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load

TeleRecorder ACCOL load

User-created ACCOL load

Fixed ‘ C ’ Program

TeleCorrector ACCOL load

User-created ACCOL load

TeleRecorder ACCOL load

User-created ACCOL load

Operator Interface/Configuration

TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)

TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.

- ACCOL Workbench is used to create the load.

- Open BSI Utilities is used to download and communicate.

- User created/modified menus via UOI.

See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.

TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)

See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.

TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.

See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.

TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.

See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.

TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.

UOI Menu System Interface.

See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.

TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)

TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.

See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.

UOI Menu System Interface.

See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.

TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-1

There are basically three categories of application software used with the TeleFlow GFC,

TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder series:

1) ACCOL Tools and related software which are used to program your TeleFlow GFC,

TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU (Remote Terminal Unit) or TeleRecorder for its intended application (pump control, pipeline monitoring, etc.). In general, the System Engineer or ACCOL programmer uses this type of software.

2) Supervisory Software which is used to allow operator interaction with the controller via graphical displays, trending, and printed reports. In general, this type of software is used by the Process Operator, or Technician.

3) Open BSI Utilities Software which facilitates communication between the TeleFlow

GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and/or TeleRecorder and certain types of Supervisory software. In general, the System Engineer configures this software.

Each of these application software categories will be discussed briefly in this section. Additional information on these subjects is found in documents referenced within the text.

1A.2 ACCOL TOOLS SOFTWARE

ACCOL stands for A dvanced C ommunications and C ontrolO riented L anguage, and is

Bristol Babcock's proprietary language for programming Network 3000-series controllers, such as the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, the TeleRTU and the TeleRecorder. The

ACCOL compilers and related software are collectively referred to as the ACCOL Tools.

Each of these tools will be discussed later in this section.

The ACCOL language includes a large set of pre-programmed software modules and control statements which can perform various mathematical, logical, process control, or communication functions.

For example, the PID3TERM module allows proportional, integral, and derivative control over a process input value; the AGA3ITER module computes natural gas volume flow rates, and the DIFFERENTIATOR module calculates the rate of change of an input. There are over 100 different modules and control statements to choose from. For more detailed information on particular modules or statements, see the ACCOL II Reference Manual

(document # D4044).

These modules and control statements are organized by the ACCOL programmer into individual tasks . Each task is specified to execute at a specific rate, and with a specific priority, relative to other tasks. One or more tasks are then combined by the ACCOL programmer into an ACCOL program. This program must be tailored for the particular use of this controller, for example, measuring and controlling natural gas flows, monitoring pressure of a pump, etc.

Depending upon which ACCOL Tools you are using, your ACCOL program is initially created either as ASCII text in an ACCOL source file (.ACC file) or as binary data in an

ACCOL object file (.ACO file). Facilities exist for quickly translating between these two formats.

1A2 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX

When editing of the ACCOL program has been completed, it must be compiled and linked to generate an ACCOL load file . The ACCOL load file contains the original programming instructions in a machine-readable format that can be executed by the TeleFlow GFC,

TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder. In order to get the load file into the controller, the file is downloaded into the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or

TeleRecorder, which then executes the programming instructions in the load file.

The Windows Ô -based ACCOL Workbench software allows you to create, modify, compile, link, and document an ACCOL source file, all using a single integrated tool. Workbench allows direct editing of an ACCOL source file, without the need for a separate ASCII text editor, and allows the user to call up a pre-defined template of any ACCOL module or statement. The user can then edit the template to conform to the requirements of the intended application. See the ACCOL Workbench User Manual (document # D4051) for more information.

(NOTE: All workbench on-line communication and downloading is facilitated via Open

BSI Utilities software, discussed later in this chapter).

Figure 1A-1 - Files Created by Windows-based ACCOL Workbench

1A.3 SUPERVISORY SOFTWARE

Supervisory software allows operator interaction with the Bristol Babcock controllers via graphical displays, trends, and reports of historical data. Generally, the supervisory

TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-3

software requires a customized communication driver in order to communicate with the

Bristol devices. In some cases this is provided via Open BSI Utilities.

Among the types of supervisory software currently supported are:

1) OpenEnterprise software is Bristol Babcock's own supervisory system. OpenEnterprise utilizes a Windows Ô NT server and one or more PC client workstations. Communication with the controller network is supported via Open BSI. OpenEnterprise provides large real time and historical data bases, which may be displayed, logged, or exported.

2) UOI or TMS are DOS-based programs, which allow an operator to view text-based menus. Operators can view process data, modify TeleFlow parameters, and collect log information, see the UOI Configuration Manual (document # D5074) and the UOI

Operators Manual (document # D5075). For information on using TMS and TeleFlow menus, see Appendix F of documents CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-20B, or CI-3530-50B.

3) Iconics Inc. Genesis software is a popular PC-based supervisory package that is suitable for systems with smaller numbers of ACCOL signals. Genesis, and the Bristol driver may be purchased from Bristol Babcock (see "Local Area Network" on page 7).

4) Intellution ® FIX ® software is a powerful PC-based graphical user interface package, suitable for high-end systems. Open BSI Utilities software is required for communications.

1A.4 OPEN BSI UTILITIES SOFTWARE

The Open Bristol System Interface (Open BSI) is a layer of communications software which provides access to a network of Bristol Babcock remote process controllers. Above this communications layer are a group of applications (programs) which are collectively known as the Open BSI Utilities . These utilities interact with the communications layer to:

$ Download ACCOL load files to 33xx controllers and/or TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow

Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units in the network

$ Collect and display data from the 3xxx controllers and/or TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow

Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units

$ Monitor and control Open BSI communications

Third-party supervisory software, such as Intellution ® FIX ® , can also use Open BSI communications, and data files generated by Open BSI utilities, to access the Bristol network in order to display and report information from field instrumentation about a running process. An operator then uses this information to monitor and/or interact with the process.

The standard set of Open BSI utilities is accessed from within a Windows program group on the PC; the major utilities are described, briefly, below. Full details on each utility are included in the Open BSI Utilities Manual (D5081).

1A4 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX

Figure 1A-2 - Open BSI Interface Diagram

NetView allows the user to define communication network characteristics, define details about individual Controllers, Correctors, RTUs and Recorders, and to change these characteristics on-line. It also allows monitoring of communication statistics from the workstation end of the communication line.

Downloader transfers a linked ACCOL load file (*.ACL) to a remote 3xxx unit.

DataView collects and displays several types of process data from a 3xxx-series controller, including signal values, data array values, signal lists, archive data, and audit trail information. In addition, it allows the user to search for signals based on various criteria.

Remote Communication Statistics Tool allows additional monitoring of Open BSI communication information. Details on buffers, communication ports, and custom protocols are accessible via this tool. Some of the information collected via this tool is primarily of interest to Bristol Babcock support personnel.

SigWrite reads ASCII files containing ACCOL signal values, and writes those values to corresponding signals or signal lists in a 3xxx controller. SigWrite scans for such files at a user-definable interval.

In addition to the standard set of Open BSI Utilities, just described, there are other utilities, available from Bristol Babcock as add-ons to the standard utilities, which provide

TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-5

capabilities for scheduled data collection, and file export. These utilities include the Open

BSI Scheduler, the Open BSI DDE Server, and the Open BSI Data Collector. See the Open

BSI Scheduler Manual (document # D5082) and the Open BSI Collection & Export Utilities

Manual (document # D5083) for details.

For more information on these packages, consult the manuals accompanying them, or contact Bristol Babcock's application support group for assistance.

1A.5 SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder can operate as an independent, stand-alone unit, or as a node in a local or wide area network. These applications are described in sections 1A.5.1 through 1A.5.3.

Note: The TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder cannot serve as a serial Communications Front End (CFE) or Data Concentrator (DC).

1A.5.1 Stand-Alone Unit

Figure 1A-3 shows a TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder used as a stand-alone unit in a non-network application. This arrangement is ideal for small local systems requiring a limited number of monitoring and control points. The PC for this application runs Bristol Babcock's ACCOL Workbench Software and Open BSI Utilities.

Data stored in the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder can be observed or edited via the PC.

Once on line, the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder executes the

ACCOL load and performs its configured tasks. Although the PC is attached to the Model

3530-XXX in Figure 1A-3, it can be disconnected and removed once the 3530-XX-X unit has been loaded and made operational.

Figure 1A-3 - Basic Stand-Alone Application

1A6 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX

1A.5.2 Local Area Network (LAN)

LANs typically support the communications requirements of computers and equipment in one or more buildings at a site or plant complex. A local area network requires a PC with extended graphics capability. This PC will typically run a supervisory software package to display process parameters, real time or historical process data, and graphic displays, etc.

An example of a local area network is shown in Figure 1A-4. This network can communicate directly through RS-485 cable connections for short distances (1000 feet max. from master to most distant slave) or over longer distances when interconnected on RS-232 ports. For much greater distances (miles) network communications require the use of phone line modems, fiber modems or broadband/carrier band modems (on coaxial cable).

Figure 1A-4 shows a network that contains a PC as the network master and a DPC 3330 at the first level of the network hierarchy. The data concentrator, which functions as a communications traffic director, communicates upward with the PC through a slave (S) port and downward with the second level through a master (M) port. This pattern repeats through each descending level. The second level contains two controllers; one communicates with three other controllers at the third level, while the other communicates with two at the third level. Each master (configured) port has the capability of supporting up to 127 slaves.

The network communication port of each TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or

TeleRecorder requires either TMS or ACCOL configuration to change the 9600 bps default rate. The network port operates at rates up to 19.2 Kbps. Additionally, in a BSAP network, the network communication port must be defined in the ACCOL load using Workbench

Software. The network port is a standard BSAP slave port with alarm support intended for remote communication via a BSAP network.

All TeleFlow GFCs, TeleFlow Correctors, TeleRTUs and TeleRecorders act as terminal slave nodes in the BSAP network. As such, they are not capable of initiating a BSAP message intended for another node. These units are always immediate response nodes.

The PC, which runs the supervisory software, oversees the activities of the local area network. It displays process parameters, real-time data, and historical process information in both tabular and graphic formats. Journaling and system configuration utilities can also be employed as required.

The Bristol Babcock NETWORK 3000 system supports a maximum of six levels starting with the master device at level 1. Slave nodes at each descending level communicate upward through its preceding master node. Each master node stores data from its slaves until polled.

A local area network can also include printers and/or display terminals. Figure 1A-4 shows a printer connected directly to a PC port; however, a controller port could have been configured as a logger and used in the same manner.

TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-7

1A8 / Application Software

Figure 1A-4 - Local Area Network

TeleFlow 3530-XXX

1A.5.3 Wide Area Network (WAN)

WANs typically support the communications requirements of computers and equipment at numerous geographical locations and may encompass many local and remote sites. A

Network 3000 system can also be constructed as a wide area network encompassing many local area networks. This application places a dedicated “Area Operator” computer at the top of the hierarchy as shown in Figure 1A-5. The central system includes the interface, monitoring and data recording equipment necessary to operate all the subservient networks. The central system employs Open BSI software to provide the on-line network interface.

Figure 1A-5 - An Example of a Wide Area Network

The Area Operator computer running Open BSI software provides the operator with realtime communications with remotes. Depending on the associated Man Machine Interface

(MMI) software package (such as OpenEnterprise, Genesis, Winterm, moXi, FIX, etc.), various features such as real-time management, historical data, alarm logging, event journaling, color graphics, CRT trending, report logging, process modeling, supervisory control, and high-level language support may be employed. The Area Operator PC of Figure

1A-5 communicates with the local area networks and discrete remote BBI RTUs, Flow

Computers and a Smart Transmitter through a DPC 3330. Depending on the configuration

TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-9

of the DPC 3330, four or more asynchronous channels for use with phone line or modem applications, as well as a single, redundant channel for data highway applications may be utilized.

1A10 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX

Section 2

Installation

2.1 INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS

A TeleFlow J EGM Computer is furnished in a housing designed to meet the NEMA Type 3 specifications and to operate in a Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D environment with a nonincendive rating (see Appendix A) or a Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D intrinsically safe environ-ment (see Appendix B).

2.2 MOUNTING THE TeleFlow

J

Check all clearances when choosing an installation site. Make sure that the EGM's front door

(hinged on right side) can be opened for wiring and service. Make certain that the LCD display and sensor switch is visible and accessible to the on-site operator. There should also be clearance for the optional Solar Panel (if required). The basic unit measures 10.3" in height and width by 7.4" in depth. The multivariable transducer adds 2.9" to the height of the unit.

The TeleFlow is to be positioned vertically with the multivariable transducer at its base and

may be mounted as follows:

$ Directly to a site installed process manifold (via four bolts through the base of the BBI

Multivariable Transducer) (see Figure 2-1).

$ To a 2 inch pipe (clamped to the rear of the unit via four bolts). A molded vertical groove

(notch) in the rear of the unit provides for nesting the 2" pipe. A clamp secures the 2" pipe to the rear of the unit via four bolts. A 2" Pipe Mounting Bracket (for manifold) must be used . The pipe is to be cemented into the ground deep enough to conform to local building codes associated with frost considerations (see figure 2-2).

$ Directly to a site installed process manifold/valve assembly with use of an Auxiliary

Sup-port Manifold/Bracket with integral 2 inch support pipe (which in turn is clamped to the rear of the unit) (see figure 2-3).

The following additional considerations are to be observed when planning an installation:

$ When the optional radio is installed, the TeleFlow must be mounted (clamped) to either a stand alone 2" pipe or an Auxiliary Support Manifold/Bracket (with integral 2" pipe).

The battery used with the radio option adds significant weight to the TeleFlow making it too heavy to be manifold mounted without additional support.

$ The use of an optional solar panel imposes the following additional mounting considerations:

The TeleFlow (with rear mounted 1 watt solar panel) can be mounted to a weight supporting process manifold if vibration limits aren't to be exceeded (see Vibration Limits).

If these limits are exceeded, this solar panel must be mounted to a 2" pipe.

TeleFlow J Installation / 2-1

5 watt solar panels are provided with a 2" Pipe Mounting Bracket.

Temperature Limits

The TeleFlow is designed to operate over a -40 to 140 o F (-40 to +60 o C) temperature range.

Operation beyond this temperature range could cause output errors and erratic performance.

Prolonged operation under extreme conditions could also result in failure of the unit.

2-2 / Installation

Figure 2-1 - Direct Manifold Mounted TeleFlow J

TeleFlow Ô

Figure 2-2 - TeleFlow Manifold Mounted with Auxiliary 2" Pipe Support

TeleFlow J Installation / 2-3

Figure 2-3 - TeleFlow Mounted to Auxiliary Support Manifold/Bracket

Vibration Limits

Check the mounting pipe for mechanical vibration. Make sure that the TeleFlow is not exposed to a level of vibration that exceeds those given in the specifications. The TeleFlow limits are 2g for 15-150 Hz & 1g for 150-2000 Hz.

Opening The Instrument Front Cover

The Instrument Front Cover must be opened to access the electrical wiring terminals on the

TeleFlow J CPU Board. The Instrument Front Cover is hinged on the right side and secured on the left side by three quarter-turn fasteners. Additionally, aligned holes in the Instrument Front

Cover and body have been provided to accommodate a padlock or other securing device.

2-4 / Installation TeleFlow J

Figure 2-4 - TeleFlow J CPU Board

CPU Board Configuration

The TeleFlow J CPU Board contains three (3) sets of Configuration Jumpers which provide configuration selection as follows:

JP3 Battery Backup Enable

When JP3 is open, the battery is disabled. When JP3 is installed, the battery maintains the contents of the RAM and the Real Time Clock while power is less than 3.6 VDC. When main power is connected and is greater than 3.6VDC, no current will be drawn from the backup battery regardless of the state of JP3.

TeleFlow J Installation / 25

JP4 Security (Manufacturing Tests Only)

Jumper JP4 is used to prevent the occurrence of ACCOL downloads or Firmware FLASH loads.

JP5 Manual Reset

For normal operation, JP5 is left open. When the Shunt Jumper associated with JP5 is installed, the TeleFlow J is held in a reset condition, with all processing halted. When JP5 is removed, normal operation will resume.

2.3 WIRING NOTES

The field wiring terminals on the TeleFlow J CPU Board are accessed by opening the Instrument

Front Cover. The CPU Board is mounted vertically on the right side of the TeleFlow J such that the wiring connectors on the board's card edge are facing the front of the unit. A metal shield provides the terminal designations. Note: Exercise care when installing a conduit fitting or filed wiring to prevent damaging the CPU Board, the Multivariable Transducer’s Flex Cable and/or other system components.

2.3.1 Wire Routing

Wiring will enter the TeleFlow J through holes in the bottom of the case. Up to seven holes may be provided in the bottom of the case (in addition to the center hole which accommodates the multivariable transducer). The purpose of each of these holes (see figure 2-5) is provided as follows:

(1) Bottom Rear/Left (Facing the front of the unit)

A 1/2" hole (conduit opening) is provided to accommodate the power input wires from the optional Solar Panel. When the optional Solar Panel is present, a liquid tight fitting will be installed; when the Solar Panel is not installed, this hole is plugged.

(2) Bottom Rear/Center (Facing the front of the unit)

A .406" hole accommodates the Battery Ventilation Assembly.

(3) Bottom Rear/Right (Facing the front of the unit)

A 3/4" hole is provided for all DI/O, the Auxiliary Analog Input and Pulse Input Wiring (2 DIs,

2 DOs, 1 Pulse Input & Auxiliary Analog Input = a total of 13 wires). This hole accommodates a 3/4" Liquid Tight Nonmetallic Conduit Fitting and is plugged when the unit is factory shipped..

(4) Bottom Right/Center (Facing the front of the unit)

A .5" hole is provided for mounting the factory wired and sealed RTD Cable Assembly.

(5) Bottom Right/Front (Facing the front of the unit)

A .437" hole accommodates the local port jack.

(6) Bottom Left/Front (Facing the front of the unit)

A .203" hole accommodates the mounting of the Ground Lug and optional Polyphaser (if present).

2-6 / Installation TeleFlow J

TeleFlow J

Figure 2-5 - TeleFlow (Bottom) Wiring Holes

(viewed with top cut away and with 2" Pipe Mount)

Installation / 27

(7) Bottom Left (Facing the front of the unit) (For Radio Option)

A .580" hole accommodates the antenna cable (without Polyphaser) or a .625" hole is provided for the Polyphaser (with .203" Mounting Bracket hole).

2.3.2 Terminal Connections

This device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and securing the screw. The wire should be inserted fully to prevent short circuits. Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the con-nections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the CPU Board and harness.

2.3.3 TeleFlow Grounding and Signal Shielding

TeleFlows are provided with a Ground Lug that is situated on the bottom of the enclosure. Only units equipped with a modem MUST have the Ground Lug connected to a known good earth ground using wire no larger than #4 AWG in size. A Cabinet Ground Cable situated inside the enclosure provides the interconnection between the modem’s protective surge circuitry and the unit’s Ground Lug. Some early TeleFlows were shipped without a Ground Lug. TeleFlows that don’t have a Ground Lug and are either equipped with a modem, or are to be upgraded with a modem, can be field modified and upgraded via TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8 (see

PIP-3530MGKI).

The use of twisted-pair, shielded and insulated cable for I/O signal wiring will minimize signal errors caused by electromagnetic interference (EMI), radio frequency interference (RFI) and transients (see Supplement S1400A).

2.3.4 Power Connections

The unit is provided with four power connections, i.e., J10 (Solar), J8 (Primary), J7 (Secon-dary)

& J6 (Auxiliary Power). Connectors are removable from the CPU Board's edge to accom-modate wiring when the unit is installed. Connectors J6, J7, J8 & J10 function as follows:

$ J10 Solar Panel Power Plug

Solar Panel power utilizes a 2 connector right angle plug which can be unplugged from the top of the PCB. This connector accommodates the input from the Solar Panel as follows:

J10 Pin #

1

2

J10 Pin Name

SPWR

GND

Connection

Pos. (+)

Neg. (-)

Table 2-1 Solar Panel Power Plug J10

$ J8 Primary Power Plug

Primary power utilizes a 2 connector right angle plug which can be unplugged from the edge of the PCB. This connector accommodates the input from the battery as follows:

2-8 / Installation TeleFlow™

J8 Pin #

1

2

J8 Pin Name

PWR1

GND

Connection

Battery (+)

Battery (-)

Table 2-2 Primary Power Plug J8

$ J7 Secondary Power Plug

Secondary power utilizes a 2 connector right angle plug which can be unplugged from the card edge (below J8). This connector is used in dual battery systems or to install a temporary battery while the original battery is being replaced.

J7 Pin

#

1

2

J7 Pin

Name

PWR2

GND

Connection to

Temp. Battery

Battery (+)

Battery (-)

Table 2-3 Secondary Power Plug J7

$ J6 Auxiliary Power Output Connector

The auxiliary power output connector can be used to supply power to a communications device such as the Radio or Modem Option. Compression-type terminals (at the PCB's edge) accommodate the wires. This connector acts as an output supply which originates at the

Primary Power Source. This output is not fused, so a fuse should be installed elsewhere in the circuitry. This fuse should not exceed a 2 Amp rating. Connection to a load is accommodated as follows:

J6 Pin

#

1

2

J6 Pin

Name

AUX PWR

GND

Connection to

Load Device

+5 to +16 (VDC)

Ground/Return

Table 2-4 Auxiliary Power Output Connector

Modems are powered by the Auxiliary Power Output(Connector J6). Units shipped from the factory, with a modem installed, have Auxiliary Power Output set ON in the standard load shipped with the product.

If you want the modem powered continuously, and

C you have since re-downloaded your standard load, -or-

C you are running an ACCOL load other than the standard load shipped from the factory,

-or-

C you are installing a modem for a unit which originally shipped without a modem,

TeleFlow™ Installation / 2-9

then you MUST set the Auxiliary Power Output to ON. This can be accomplished, for standard loads, using the TeleFlow Menu System (TMS), by setting the Auxiliary Power Output Default to ON via the Radio Communications Setup Menu (See Section F.8.5). If you are NOT using one of the standard loads, you must use the SYS_3530 Module in your ACCOL Load to set the

Auxiliary Power Default ON/OFF signal to ON. (This signal is Entry 1 in Parameter List 4 of the

SYS_3530 Module, see ‘SYS_3530’ section in the ACCOL II Reference Manual , document#

D4044).Section F.8.5).

2.3.5 RTD Wiring

A 3-wire RTD is provided with the TeleFlow and is factory wired to J14 Pins 3, 4 & 5. This RTD input accommodates a 100-ohm platinum bulb using the DIN 43760 curve. The TeleFlow accommodates the common 3-wire configuration. In this configuration, the Return lead con-nects to RTD- and the two junction return leads connect to RTD+ and RTD EXC.

Connection between the RTD and CPU Board is factory-wired as follows:

J14 Pin Signal

3

4

5

RTD-

RTD+

RTD EXC

Function

Return

Sense

Excitation

Table 2-5 RTD Connections to connector J14

Never ground the RTD Cable Shield at both ends or allow it to come in contact with metal conduit as multiple ground paths could result and cause RTD input errors.

Figure 2-6 3-Wire RTD Temperature Input

To install the RTD Probe, screw the Fitting Body into the thermowell with a 7/8" open-end wrench.

While applying pressure against the Sheath to force the Tip of the RTD Probe into the bottom of the thermowell (so that the Probe Tip is in contact with the thermowell), tighten the Nut (9/16" open-end wrench) against the 7/8" Fitting Body (see Figure 2-7).

2-10 / Installation TeleFlow™

Figure 2-7 RTD Probe Installation/Removal Diagram

2.4

WIRING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS

In addition to the RTD and Multivariable Transducer connections, the TeleFlow EGM provides

I/O termination for two (2) Discrete Inputs, two (2) Discrete Outputs, an Auxiliary Analog Input and a 0-16V Pulse Input. The connections for each type are described as follows:

2.4.1 Discrete Inputs

Two independent discrete input channels are available. These inputs accept inputs from transistor, mechanical relays, TTL, CMOS and other devices which provide from 0 to 16 VDC.

These inputs are not isolated; therefore, field input devices which are not isolated must be referenced to the TeleFlow J Ground. Figure 2-8B provides an illustration of a field relay isolated intrinsically safe discrete input.

J5 Pin Signal

1

2

3

4

DIN0

GND

DIN1

GND

Function

Discrete Input 0

Ground

Discrete Input 1

Ground

Table 2-6 Discrete Input Connections to J5

TeleFlow™

Figure 2-8 Discrete Input Wired to TeleFlow

Installation / 2-11

2.4.2 Discrete Outputs

Two independent firmware controlled open drain discrete outputs are provided for control or signalling functions. Each output is wired to the source terminal of an N Channel MOSFET capable of switching up to 16 volts at up to 100mA. When closed, the FET shorts the output to ground with resistance of .5 ohms or less. These outputs are protected by 16V Transorbs.

Caution must be exercised to ensure that the load current does not affect operation of the

TeleFlow J or related devices since these outputs are not isolated.

J5 Pin

2

3

5

6

Signal

GND

DOUT0

Function

Ground

Discrete Output 0

GND Ground

DOUT1 Discrete Output 1

Table 2-7 Discrete Output Connections to J5

Figure 2-9 Discrete Output Wired to TeleFlow J

2.4.3 Pulse Input

The TeleFlow J can accept pulse inputs from TTL or CMOS outputs, transistors, mechanical relays or other signalling devices. The maximum pulse frequency input is 5KHz with low impedance sources and 200Hz with high impedance sources such as Open Collector Drive (see

Figure 2-10 below).

J14 Pin

1

2

Signal

GND

PULSE

Function

Ground

Pulse Input

Table 2-8 Pulse Input Connections to J14

2-12 / Installation TeleFlow™

Figure 2-10 Pulse Input Wired to TeleFlow

2.4.4 Auxiliary Analog Input

The 0 to 16 V Auxiliary Analog Input can be supplied source power from the TeleFlow via J14

Pin 7 (Excitation) through a 100 ohm resistor. The Input J14 pin 8 presents a 150K ohm load to ground. The source must have a low enough impedance to make the load insignificant, or the load current must be taken into account when interpreting measurements. The resolution of the analog input can be no lower than .5mV.

J14 Pin

6

7

8

Signal

GND

EXC

AI

Function

Ground

Excitation

Analog Input

Table 2-9 Analog Input Connections to J14

TeleFlow™

Figure 2-11 Auxiliary Analog Input Wired to TeleFlow

Installation / 2-13

2.4.5 Communication Ports

2.4.5.1 RS-232 Network and Local Communications Ports

The TeleFlow provides both a network (or remote) port and customer port. Both ports provide for serial asynchronous communications compatible with RS-232 levels. These ports operate independently at baud rates up to 19.2Kbps.

2.4.5.2 Local Port

Wire

Color

Black

White

Red

Green

Brown

VII

Plug Pin #

6

2

7

1*

4*

D Conn.

Pin #

5

2

3

N/A

N/A

CPU Bd.

J5 Pin #

7

8

9

10

7

Signal

Name

GND

LRXD

LTXD

N/A

N/A

* T he green and brown wires are shorted together in the VII Plug/D Conn. Wiring Harness and do not connect to the D-Type Connector. Pins 7 & 8 of the D-Type Connector are shorted together.

Table 2-10 Local Port/PC Interconnect Cable Wiring

10 = Wakeup

9

10

J5

7

8

7 = GND

White = RXD

Red = TXD

Brown

Green

User View of Local

Port Connector

Black

Local Port

Connected to J5

TeleFlow

White

Red

Black

Brown

Green

COMPUTER

RXD

TXD

GND

GND

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

Figure 2-12 PC connected to TeleFlow J Local Port

2-14 / Installation TeleFlow™

2.4.5.3 Network Port

The network port functions as a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) device. The network port employs the standard RS-232 Interface Signals for data transfer and handshaking. Whenever the Carrier Detect Signal (RDCD) is active (RS-232 Mark or High Level), the TeleFlow J exits sleep mode and stays in communication mode as long as the signal is active. The standard RS-

232 signals are provided on the Network Port as follows:

J13 Pin

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

J13 Name

GND

RDCD

RDTR

RCTS

RRTS

RRXD

RTXD

Function

Ground

Data Carrier Detect Input

Data Term. Ready Output

Clear To Send Input

Request To Send output

Receive Data Input

Transmit Data Output

Table 2-11 Network Port Connections to J13

2.4.5.4 Modem On Network Port (see CI-9600 or CI-9600TF Instruction Manual)

TeleFlow™

Figure 2-13A - Original 9600 BPS - PSTN Modem (see Manual CI-9600)

Installation / 2-15

TeleFlow

Conn. & Sig. Name

J5-17 (RTXD)

J13-7 (RTXD)

J5-16 (RRXD)

J13-6 (RRXD)

J5-13 (RDTR)

J13-3 (RDTR)

J5-15 (RRTS)

J13-5 (RRTS)

J5-14 (RCTS)

J13-4 (RCTS)

J5-12 (RDCD)

J13-2 (RDCD)

J5-11 (GND)

J13-1 (GND)

J6-1 (Aux Pwr)

J6-2 (GND)

Signal

Direction

To Modem

From Modem

To Modem

To Modem

From Modem

From Modem

---

To Modem

---

Modem

Conn. & Sig. Name

J5-3 (TXD)

J5-2 (RXD)

J5-4 (DTR)

J5-7 (RTS)

J5-8 (CTS)

J5-1 (CD)

J5-5 (GND)

TB4-2 (EXTVDC)

TB4-1 (GND)

Port

Usage

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

Ground

Power

Pwr Gnd

TB1-1 (T/R) Phone Line

TB1-2 (T/R) Phone Line

Note: CPU Bd. Connector J5 is associated with CPU P/N 392561XXX (older CPU).

CPU Bd. Connector J13 is associated with CPU P/N 392926XXX (current CPU) .

Table 2-12 - Original 9600 BPS Modem Wiring Listing

Figure 2-13B - Current 9600 BPS - PSTN Modem (see Manual CI-9600TF)

2-16 / Installation TeleFlow™

TeleFlow

Conn. & Sig. Name

J5-17 (RTXD)

J13-7 (RTXD)

J5-16 (RRXD)

J13-6 (RRXD)

J5-13 (RDTR)

J13-3 (RDTR)

J5-15 (RRTS)

J13-5 (RRTS)

J5-14 (RCTS)

J13-4 (RCTS)

J5-12 (RDCD)

J13-2 (RDCD)

J5-11 (GND)

J13-1 (GND)

J6-1 (AUX PWR)

Signal

Direction

To Modem

From Modem

To Modem

To Modem

---

From Modem

---

Modem

Conn. & Sig. Name

J2-3 (TXD)

J2-2 (RXD)

J2-4 (DTR)

J2-7 (RTS)

---

J2-1 (CD)

J2-5 (GND)

Port

Usage

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

Ground

To Modem TB4-1 (EXTVDC) Power

J6-2 (GND) --TB4-2 (GND) Pwr Gnd

Note: CPU Bd. Connector J5 is associated with CPU P/N 392561XXX (older CPU).

CPU Bd. Connector J13 is associated with CPU P/N 392926XXX (current CPU).

Table 2-13 - Current 9600 BPS Modem Wiring Listing

2.5 MOUNTING THE OPTIONAL SOLAR PANEL

The 1 Watt Solar Panel can be mounted as follows:

- Directly mounted to the rear of the TeleFlow enclosure utilizing the four 1/4-20 sealing screws provided (installed) with the unit (see Figure 2-14).

- Mounted to a 2" pipe utilizing four 1/4-20 bolts and lock washers (see Figures 2-15 & 2-16).

Mounting brackets ares provided with the solar panel for either mounting method. Mounting brackets provide for adjustment of "Tilt Angle" and Swivel (Directional Facing).

2.5.1 Swivel (Directional Facing)

Solar panels used in the northern hemisphere should face due south (not magnetic south) while those used in the southern hemisphere should face due north (not magnetic north).

2.5.2 Tilt Angle

Table 2-14 shows the angle (from horizontal) at which the solar panel should be installed in order to maximize annual energy output. At most latitudes, performance can be improved by less of an angle during the summer and more of an angle during the winter.

TeleFlow™ Installation / 2-17

Figure 2-14 - 1W Solar Panel & Mounting Hardware (Rear Mount)

Figure 2-15 - 1W Solar Panel & Mounting Hardware - 2" Pipe Mount

2-18 / Installation TeleFlow™

Figure 2-16 - 5W Solar Panel & Mounting Hardware - 2" Pipe Mount

LATITUDE

0-4 E

5-20 E

21-45 E

45-65 E

66-75 E

INSTALLATION ANGLE

10 E from Horizontal

Add 5 E to the Local Latitude

Add 10 E to the Local Latitude

Add 15 E to the Local Latitude

80 E from Horizontal

Table 2-14 - Solar Panel Tilt Angle

2.6 TeleFlow CONFIGURATION

TeleFlow J EGM Computers are shipped with certain defaults. Most likely these defaults don't match your meter run. Use the TeleFlow J Menu System (TMS) (see Appendix F and Appendix

C) or the appropriate BBI software tool to configure your system (see the appropriate soft-ware manual (see Section 2.6.1 and Chapter 1A).

TeleFlow™ Installation / 2-19

2.6.1 Application Software Reference Documents

Categories of application software are discussed in Chapter 1A.

The following BBI software manuals provide the information necessary to configure and operate your system:

D4044 ACCOL II Referenece Manual - for information on ACCOL modules and statements

D4051 ACCOL Workbench User Manual - for information on creating an ACCOL source file

D5081 Open BSI Utilities Manual - for information on setting up communications between the

PC and the BBI controller network (Open BSI 3.0 or newer)

D5082 Open BSI Scheduler Manual - for information on setting up scheduled data collections

(Open BSI 3.0 or newer)

D5083 Open BSI Collection & Export Utilities Manual - for information on using the Open BSI

Data Collector (Open BSI 3.0 or newer)

D5074 UOI Configuration Manual - for information on creating and modifying menus and logs

D5075 UOI Operator Manual - for information on how to view menus and logs

2.7 INSTALLING A TeleFlow IN A HAZARDOUS AREA

2.7.1 Installing a Nonincendive TeleFlow

Refer to Appendix A - Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Location, when installing a TeleFlow Model 3530-10B in a Class I, Division 2 hazardous location. Refer to the BBI

TeleFlow 3530-10B Model Specification to determine which optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use in a nonincendive TeleFlow.

2.7.2 Installing an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow

Refer to Appendix B - Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Location, when installing a TeleFlow Model 3530-10B in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location. Refer to the

TeleFlow 3530-10B BBI Model Specification to determine which optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use in an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow.

When an externally powered TeleFlow is used in a class I, Division 1 location, it must be used in conjunction with a BBI Istran Communication Interface and installed per instruction manual

CI-3530-IStran (see Figures 2-17 & 2-18).

2-20 / Installation TeleFlow™

Figure 2-17 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow with Modem and External Power Supply

Figure 2-18 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow with Radio and External Power Supply

2.8 INSTALLATION OF A COMMUNICATION OPTION

Information on the installation/removal of the various communication options is provided in the

BBI documents listed in Table 2-15 below.

TeleFlow™ Installation / 2-21

Option

MDS Radio

FreeWave Radio

9600 bps PSTN Modem &

Modem Grounding Kit

9600 bps PSTN Modem (Current)

Expansion Transmitter Intf. Bd.

Expansion RS-232 Bd.

Expansion RS-485 and/or AO Bd.

Isolated RS-485 Intf. Bd.

see Appendix D.

see Appendix E.

Reference Documents see CI-9600 see PIP-3530MGKI (for units without a Ground Lug) see CI-9600TF see PIP-EXPTIBTF see PIP-EXP232TF see PIP-EXP485/AO see PIP-ISORS485 - (Ext. Mounted on a DIN Rail)

Table 2-15 - Comm. Option Reference Documents

2-22 / Installation TeleFlow™

Section 3

Service

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This section provides Removal/Replacement Procedures, and Troubleshooting/Fault Isolation information for the TeleFlow J model 3530-10B.

Calibration utilizes a PC running the either the TMS program (see Appendix F - Section F.8.4) or UOI program (UOI utilizes tools to generate calibration menus - see D5074, D5075, D4087 &

D4088). External test equipment such as a digital multimeter and oscilloscope will also be required to aid in isolating and troubleshooting certain problems.

Figure 3-1 - Local Port Communications Setup

3.2 ACCESSING PARTS FOR TESTING OR REPLACEMENT

In order to test or replace any major system component, it will be necessary to open the Instrument Front Cover. These operations should only be performed by technically-qualified persons having advanced mechanical and electronic skills, and possessing the proper service equipment. Any damage to the TeleFlow J resulting from improper handling or incorrect service procedures will not be covered under the product warranty agreement. If these procedures cannot be performed properly, the unit should be returned to Bristol Babcock for factory evaluation and repairs.

TeleFlow J Service / 3-1

Warning

Opening the door of a powered TeleFlow that is operating in a hazardous area exposes the electrical circuitry to the atmosphere and could result in accidental fire or explosion (see

Appendix A).

Caution

PC board components can be damaged by electrostatic discharges (ESD) during disassembly, reassembly, and test procedures. Use grounded wrist straps and surface pads when working near or handling the Main Circuit Board. See attached instruction supplement S14006 for proper grounding and handling techniques.

3.3 COMPONENT REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

The following major items are covered in this section:

$ Battery, CPU Board, On Board Fuse, On Board Battery & LCD Display/Switch Panel

Assembly

The following options are covered in appendices:

$ Optional Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (see PIP-EXPTIBTF)

$ Optional Expansion Comm. Port RS-232 Board (see PIP-EXP232TF)

$ Optional Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board (see PIP-EXP485/AO)

Note:

Should it become necessary to replace the Multivariable Transducer or the CPU Board, the entire TeleFlow J Assembly must be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair. These are matched parts which must be compensated together at the factory.

3.3.1 Intrinsically Safe Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure

(see Figures 3-2 & 3-3)

1. Push the Activate Display Button on the TeleFlow's Instrument Front Cover.

2. Remove the three (3) screws (and the lock if present) which secure the Instrument's Front

Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.

3. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector J8 or J7 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.

Note: In the event the TeleFlow requires continuous operation, a small auxiliary 9V battery can be plugged into the Secondary Connector (J7).

4. In the case of the 6V Lead Acid Battery System (Figure 3-2) hold the Battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws). Carefully remove the

Battery.

In the case of the Intrinsically Safe Single Lithium Battery Systems (Figure 3-3) remove the

Cover/Modem Mounting Plate from the Battery Mounting Bracket and carefully remove the

Battery System in question.

3-2 / Service TeleFlow J

Figure 3-2 - TeleFlow With 6V Lead Acid Intrinsically Safe Battery System

Note: This arrangement may be used with either the 1W, 6V Solar Panel System or the 5W, 6V Solar

Panel System

TeleFlow J Service / 3-3

5. To replace the battery:

In the case of the 6VLead Acid Battery System (Figure 3-2):

- Position (hold) the Battery on the Right Battery Mounting Bracket and replace the Left

Battery Mounting Bracket (2 screws).

- Install (Plug) the Battery Wiring Harness Connector into CPU Board Connector J8.

- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

Figure 3-3 - TeleFlow With 6V Single Lithium Battery System

In the case of the Single Lithium Battery System (Figure 3-3):

- Place the new Lithium Battery onto the Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket's right side.

- Install (Plug) the Battery Wires into CPU Board Connector J8 as follows: Black =

(Neg. - J8- GND), Red = (Pos. - J8 - PWR1).

- Install the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate onto the Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket.

- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

3-4 / Service TeleFlow J

Figure 3-4 - TeleFlow with 6V Dual Lithium Battery System

3.3.2 Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Modem Option)

(see Figures 3-4, 3-5, 3-6 & 3-7)

1. Push the Activate Display Button on the TeleFlow's Instrument Front Cover.

2. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

3. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector J8 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.

Note: In the event the TeleFlow requires continuous operation, a small auxiliary battery can be plugged into the Secondary Connector (J7).

Note: In the case of the Dual Lithium

Battery System (Figure 3-4), you may want to leave the battery associated with

Connector J7 connected.

TeleFlow J Service / 3-5

4. Disconnect the phone wires from Modem Connectors TB1-1 (Black) and TB1-2 (Red) (see

Figure 2-13A) or from the Modem’s RJ11 Connector (J1) (see Figure 2-13A or 2-13B).

5. Disconnect the D-Type Connector from Modem Connector J5 (see Figure 2-13A) or Modem

Connector J2 (see Figure 2-13B). Disconnect modem power by removing the two-wire power plug from CPU Board Connector J6.

6. Remove the #10-32 Hex Nut that secures the Cabinet Ground Cable to the TeleFlow Case.

7. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it.

Figure 3-5 - TeleFlow With 6V Lead Acid Battery

Note: This arrangement may be used with either the 1W, 6V Solar Panel System or the 5W,

6V Solar Panel System

8. In the case of the 6V Lead Acid Battery System (Figure 3-5), carefully remove the battery

(with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8" screws (A) that secure the left side of the Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting

Bracket to the rear of the unit.

Note: In the case of the Dual Lithium Battery System

(Figure 3-4), you may want to replace one battery at a time, i.e., replace the battery

3-6\ Service TeleFlow J

associated with connector J8 prior to removing and replacing the Lithium Battery associated with connector J7.

In the case of the 12V Alkaline Battery System (Figure 3-6), carefully remove the eight (8),

1.5V batteries from the Battery Holder.

Figure 3-6 - TeleFlow With 12V Alkaline Battery System

9. To replace the battery:

Follow steps 3 through 8 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.

In the case of the 12V Alkaline Battery System (Figure 3-6), observe battery polarities when installing them into the Battery Holder.

- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

TeleFlow J Service / 3-7

In the case of the Dual Lithium Battery System (Figure 3-4):

- Place the new Lithium Batteries onto the Battery Mounting Bracket.

- Install (Plug) the Right Battery Wires into CPU Board Connector J8 as follows: Black =

(Neg. - J8- GND), Red = (Pos. - J8 - PWR1).

- Install (Plug) the Left Battery Wires into CPU Board Connector J7 as follows: Black =

(Neg. - J7- GND), Red = (Pos. - J7 - PWR2).

- Install the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate onto the Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket.

- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

3.3.3 Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Radio Option)

(see Figures 3-7 & 3-8)

1. Push the Activate Display Button on the TeleFlow's Instrument Front Cover.

2. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

3. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector J8 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.

Note: In the event the TeleFlow requires continuous operation, a small auxiliary battery can be plugged into the Secondary Connector (J7).

3-8\ Service

Figure 3-7 - TeleFlow With 12V Lead Acid Battery (Radio Removed)

TeleFlow J

4. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio.

5. If the MDS radio is installed, unplug the two-wire power connector associated with the 2-

Wire Radio Power Interface Cable (395445-02-7) from the bottom of the radio. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) from the bottom of the radio.

If a FreeWave radio is installed, unplug the two-wire Auxiliary Power Jack from CPU

Board connector P6. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) from radio connector J1. Note: When re-installing the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-

01-4), make sure that the cable connector’s red wire aligns with FreeWave radio connector

J1's Pin 1.

Figure 3-8 - TeleFlow With MDS Radio Option

6. Unscrew the Antenna Cable from the bottom of the Radio.

TeleFlow J Service / 3-9

7. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio Mounting Plate (with radio) to the

Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.

8. Carefully remove the Battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8" screws (A) that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.

9. To replace the battery:

- Follow steps 3 through 8 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.

- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

3.3.4 CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement (without Radio/Modem

Option)

(see Figure 3-2)

Note:

The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the TeleFlow has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual S14006). The CPU Board should only be removed to replace the on board Lithium Battery.

1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

2. Remove the Battery Plug(s) from Connector J8 and/or J7 on the Main Circuit Board. Also remove the Solar Panel Power Plug from Connector J10 and/or the Auxiliary Power Plug from Connector J6 if both or either of them are used.

3. Hold the Battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with

2 screws) (see Figure 3-2). Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting

Bracket. Carefully remove the Battery (with wiring harness).

4. Remove the Right Battery Mounting Bracket.

5. Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, Field I/O and Auxiliary Power Wires from the PCB's connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs on the front edge of the CPU Board.

J5 PIN J5 NAME

7 GND

8

9

10

LRXD

LTXD

Black & Brown

White

Red

COLOR

WAKEUP Green

Ground

FUNCTION

Receive Data Input

Transmit Data Output

Wakeup Signal

Table 3-1 - Local Port Connections to J5

6. Carefully remove the PC Board Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by

2 (#4-40 x 1/4" screws).

Note:

Exercise extreme care to avoid damage to surface mounted components.

3-10\ Service TeleFlow J

7. Remove the screw that secures the Mutivariable Transducer Interface Cable Connector to the CPU Board Standoff at J1 and unplug the Flex Cable Connector from J1.

8. Remove the two (2) M/F (#4-40 x 5/8") Hex Standoff Post that secure the CPU Board to the

Main Mounting Bracket. This will require the use of a 3/16" Wrench or Hex Driver.

9. Remove the remaining 3 (#4-40 x 1/4") screws that secure the CPU Board to the Main

Mounting Bracket.

10. Disconnect (unplug) the Display Module Connector from J2 and the Wakeup Switch

Connector from J3.

11. Carefully remove the CPU Board from the TeleFlow Enclosure. Be careful not to damage the surface mounted components. Avoid contact with the Main Mounting Bracket, Wiring

Harnesses, etc. Note: This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe work area.

12. To Replace the CPU Board:

- Carefully place the CPU Board into the TeleFlow J enclosure and connect the Wakeup

Switch Connector to J3.

Note: This connector is not keyed and can be installed backward

(with no resulting damage to the unit).

- Install the LCD Display Module Connector into J2 (yellow conductor goes to Pin 1 of J2).

- Install the Pressure Sensor Cable Connector to J1. Replace the J1 Connector/Cable

Securing Screw so that the hardware is installed as follows: Screw, Washer, Connector

Hardware, Washer, Mounting Standoff.

- Secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting Bracket with the 3 screws and the two hex standoffs.

- Follow steps 1 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.

3.3.5 CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement

(with Radio/Modem Option)

Note:

The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the TeleFlow has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual S14006). The CPU Board should only be removed to replace the on board Lithium Battery.

1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

2. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector JP8 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.

3. If equipped with a modem follow steps 4 through 7 of section 3.3.2.

If equipped with a radio, follow steps 4 through 7 of section 3.3.3, but disconnect the Radio

Power Connector (P6) from CPU Board AUX PWR Connector J6. Unplug any remaining harnesses (I/O, Solar Power, Secondary Power) from the CPU Board's card edge connectors (J10, J7, J5, J13 & J14).

4. Carefully remove the Battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8" screws (A) that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.

5. While holding the Main Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8" screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear

TeleFlow J Service / 3-11

of the TeleFlow J . Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the TeleFlow Housing.

6. Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, Field I/O and any Power Wires from the

PCB's connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs on the front edge of the

CPU Board.

CPU PIN

P5-10

P6-1

P6-2

P13-1

P13-2

P13-3

P13-4

P13-5

P13-6

P13-7

P14-8

NAME

WAKEUP

AUXPWR

GND

GND

RDCD

N/A

RCTS

RRTS

RRXD

RTXD

AI

COLOR

Yellow

Red

Black

Black

Green

N/A

Brown

Blue

White

Red

Orange

FUNCTION

Wakeup

DC Power (+)

DC Power (-) Ground

PCOMM Ground

Data Carrier Detect Input

N/A

Clear To Send Input

Request To Send Output

Receive Data Input

Transmit Data Output

Analog Input

NOTES

Not on 396369-01-4

Not on 392733-01-3

Not on 392733-01-3

Not on 396369-01-4

Table 3-2 - CPU Board Network Port Connections from MDS Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) or

FreeWave Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4)

7. Carefully remove the PC Board Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by

2 (#4-40 x 1/4" screws).

8. Remove the screw that secures the Mutivariable Transducer Interface Cable Connector to the CPU Board Standoff at J1 and unplug the Ribbon Cable Connector from J1.

9. Remove the two (2) M/F (#4-40 x 5/8") Hex Standoff Post that secure the CPU Board to the

Main Mounting Bracket. This will require the use of a 3/16" Wrench or Hex Driver.

10. Remove the 3 (#4-40 x 1/4") screws that secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting

Bracket.

11. Disconnect (unplug) the Display Module Connector from J2 and the Wakeup Switch

Connector from J3.

12. Carefully remove the CPU Board from the TeleFlow Enclosure. Be careful not to damage the surface mounted components. Avoid contact with the Main Mounting Bracket, Wiring

Harnesses, etc.

13. To Replace the CPU Board:

3-12\ Service TeleFlow J

- Carefully place the CPU Board into the TeleFlow J Enclosure and connect the Wakeup

Switch Connector to J3. Note: This connector is not keyed and can be installed backward

(with no resulting damage to the unit).

- Install the LCD Display Module Connector into J2 (yellow conductor goes to Pin 1 of J2).

- Install the Multivariable Transducer Cable Connector into J1. Replace the J1 Connector-

/Cable Securing Screw so that the hardware is installed as follows: Screw, Washer, Connector Hardware, Washer, Mounting Standoff.

- Secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting Bracket with the 3 screws and the two hex standoffs.

- Follow steps 1 through 11 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question (see Table 3-1 for Local Port wiring and Table 3-2 for Network Port wiring).

3.3.6 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Fuse F1

F1 is a 350mA (Schurter 3402.0043) fast acting fuse that is located on the CPU Board.

1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

2. Disconnect power from the CPU board by unplugging P10, P8, P7 and P6 as required.

3. Remove F1 with a pair of Needle-nose pliers or a pair of tweezers.

4. Carefully press the replacement fuse (using Tweezers or Needle-nose Pliers) into its receptacle.

5. Reconnect power to the CPU board.

6. Close and secure the Door.

3.3.7 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Battery

Note:

The On Board Battery should be changed in an ESD safe area.

The On Board Tadiran TL-5134/P Lithium Thionyl Chloride Battery provides 1AH of 3.6VDC

backup power for RAM, Real Time Clock and analog switches which are powered from the V+5B

Supply.

1. Remove the CPU Board (see appropriate Removal/Replacement Procedure).

2. If it is desired to save the contents of RAM, it will be necessary to install the Main Battery

Power Supply at J8 prior to removal of the Lithium Battery.

3. Slide the rubber hold-down band from the Lithium Battery and carefully pull the three pronged battery off the CPU Board.

4. Carefully install the replacement Lithium Battery onto the CPU Board making sure to install the rubber hold-down band.

TeleFlow J Service / 3-13

5. Disconnect The Main Battery Power Supply from J8.

6. Reinstall the CPU Board (see appropriate Removal/Replacement Procedure).

Figure 3-12 - TeleFlow J CPU Board

3.3.8 Removal/Replacement of the Display/Switch Panel Assembly

1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

2. Follow the appropriate steps to remove the CPU Board without removing any wiring except the Power Supply Connector at J8.

3-14\ Service TeleFlow J

3. With the Battery removed and the CPU Board loose (but still wired into the system), slightly move the CPU Board toward the front of the unit and remove the connectors from

J2 (Display) and J3 (Wakeup).

Note:

It is recommended that you secure the CPU Board with at least 2

screws until you are ready to replace the LCD Display/Switch Assembly.

4. Carefully remove the ribbon cables associated with the LCD Display/Switch Panel

Assembly. These cables run between the Main Mounting Bracket and the left side of the

Enclosure (right side when facing the front of the unit).

5. Remove the eight (8) #4-40 screws which secure the LCD Display/Switch Panel Assembly to the Door.

6. The LCD Display/Switch Panel Assembly can be disassembled if it is desired to replace either the Membrane Switch Panel or LCD Display Sub-assembly. The LCD Display Subassembly is secured to the Membrane Switch Panel via four screws (with washers).

7. To replace the LCD Display/Switch Panel assembly:

Installed the LCD Display/Switch Panel Ass’y. on the Door via 8 mounting screws.

Carefully route the Ribbon Cables between the Main Mounting Bracket and the left side of the enclosure (right side when facing the front of the unit). Run the cables under the Main Mounting Bracket (approximately 1") and plug them into their respective connectors. The two wire cable plugs into J3 (Wakeup) and can be installed without regard to polarity (with no resulting damage to the unit). The

LCD Display Module Connector plugs into J2 (yellow wire adjacent to pin 1 of J2).

8. Remove the screws that were temporarily securing the Main Mounting Bracket and secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting Bracket (via three (3) screws and two hex stand-offs.

9. Carefully replace the PC Board Shield (securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket with two

(2) screws).

10. Replace the PC Shield Label (secured to PC Board Shield and two hex stand-offs).

11. Replace the Battery and Battery mounting Hardware. Connect the Battery to J8.

12. Close and secure the Door.

3.3.9 Removal/Replacement of the Modem or Radio Options

Removal/Replacement of the 9600 bps Modem Option is covered in BBI Customer Instruction

Manuals as follows: Modem P/N 396039-02-2 (see CI-9600)

Modem P/N 400000-01-6 (see CI-9600TF)

Removal/Replacement of the MDS Radio Option is covered in Appendix D. Removal/-

Replacement of the FreeWave Radio Option is covered in Appendix E.

TeleFlow™ Service / 3-15

3.3.10 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion TIB Option

Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Board Option is covered in BBI

Product Information Package PIP-EXPTIBTF.

3.3.11 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Intf. Bd. Option

Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Interface Board Option is covered in BBI

Product Information Package PIP-EXP232TF.

3.3.12 Removal/Replacement of the Exp. RS-485 and/or AO Bd. Option

Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option is covered in BBI Product Information Package PIP-EXP485/AO.

3.4 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

3.4.1 Battery & Fuse F1 Checks (Processor not running or no power)

Check the inputs to the PWR1, PWR2, & SPWR circuits at the card edge connector.

The CPU Bd. requires a Supply Voltage of 5.4 to 16 (vdc) for normal operation. PWR1 and

PWR2 and SPWR share a single 350mA Fuse. Auxiliary Power Out (J6-1/J6-2) is not fused.

• If Power is below Spec. at PWR1 (P8), PWR2 (P7) or SPWR (P10) check the battery (and solar panel if present).

• If the correct voltage is present at the PWR1, PWR2 or SPWR terminals check Fuse F1 on the CPU Board.

PIN # PIN NAME CONNECTION

P10-1

P10-2

P8-1

+SP

-SG

PWR1

Solar Panel +

Solar Panel -

Battery (+)

P8-2

P7-1

P7-2

P6-1

P6-2

GND

PWR2

GND

GND

Battery (-)

Battery (+)

Battery (-)

AUX PWR +5 to +16 (VDC)

Ground/Return

Table 3-3 - Power Plugs P6, P7, P8 & P10

NOTES

Solar Pwr.

Solar Pwr.

Primary Pwr.

Primary Pwr.

Secondary Pwr.

Secondary Pwr.

Auxiliary Pwr.

Auxiliary Pwr.

3-16 / Service TeleFlow™

3.4.2 LED Checks:

The CPU Board contains two LEDs (D27 is green & D26 is red). These LEDs are situated near the top of the CPU Board between the PWR2 & AUX POWER connectors on the card edge.

These LEDs function as follows:

D27 - Green: This LED indicates the TeleFlow™ operating mode.

Flash 5/Sec. = Communications or Calculation Mode.

Short Flash 1/Sec. = Sleep Mode.

D26 - Red: This LED indicates when the Check Sum calculated for Compensation/-

Calibration EPROM is either correct or incorrect.

ON = Check Sum invalid.

OFF = Check Sum is valid.

Flashing = Flash PROM download in progress.

• If these LEDs are inoperable, check the voltage at PWR1. Check Fuse F1.

• These LEDs flash alternately during download to the FLASH PROM.

3.4.3 LCD Display Checks

On initial system startup, the LCD will indicate that a warm or cold start is in progress. The display will then scroll through its list twice. TeleFlow EGMCs leave the factory with either a standard TeleFlow load or an ACCOL-based TeleFlow load installed. Verify that the LCD displays the following messages:

1. Date & Time

2. Local I.D. & Group I.D.

3. Network Comm. Active (Note: This message will appear intermittently when the

Carrier Detect RS232 signal on the Network Serial Port is Active.)

4. TeleFlow Version X.X

5. Active Alarms (if any)

One or more of the following messages may appear:

- AGA 8 Calc Status

- System Power Status

- Low DP Cutoff

6. Meter ID

7. System Power

8. Differential Pressure Value in H

2

O

9. Flowing Pressure Value in PSIG

10. Flowing Temperature Value in Deg. F.

11. Daily Flow Rate

12. Flow Time Today

13. Today's Volume XXXXXX SCF

14. Yesterday's (yesday's) Volume XXXXXX SCF

15. Volume Totalizer XXXXXX SCF

TeleFlow™ Service / 3-17

Note:

The user must download an ACCOL load to continue, if the LCD displays the following message:

AWAITING ACCOL DOWNLOAD

• If the LCD Display is difficult to read, check its Contrast Adjustment on the CPU Board.

This Adjusting Pot. (R-18) is situated above and behind the Green LED (D27).

All active alarms are displayed once per display scroll cycle.

3.4.4 Calibration Checks:

Calibrations can be verified (see Section F.8.4.1) or conducted (see Section F.8.4.2). The

TeleFlow Menu System (TMS) provides Help Menus if F2 (Function Key #2) is pressed during a calibration routine. For units not running a TMS load, calibration can be performed utilizing

OpenBSI’s Calibration Tool (see document # D5129 - OpenBSI CALIBRATION TOOL User

Manual).

3.4.5 TMS Menu System:

(see Appendix F)

It is recommended that this system be used to determine the actual status of the Multivariable

Transducer, the RTD and all I/Os. TMS provides the following capabilities:

- Status of Current Gas Flow Information (see Section F.8.1)

- Log Collection (see Section F.8.2)

- View/Change Configuration (see Section F.8.3)

- Calibration of RTD and Multivariable Transducer (see Section F.8.4)

- Radio Communications Set-up (see Section F.8.5)

- Status of Comm. Port (see Section F.8.6)

- Status of Alarms (see section F.8.7)

- Set Time & Date (see Section F.8.8)

- Special Functions (Reset Hardware, Change Local Address/Group Number)

(see Section F.8.9)

- Security Maintenance (see Section F.8.10)

- Security level 4 Maintenance Operations (see Section F.8.11)

3.4.6 Field Wiring/Signal Checks

Check Input or Output Field Wires at the Card Edge Connector and at the field device. Check wiring for continuity, shorts & opens. Check the I/O signals at the Card Edge Connectors (J5,

J13 & J14) (see Figures 3-13 through 3-18 & Table 3-4).

3-18 / Service TeleFlow™

J14-2

J14-3

J14-4

J14-5

J14-6

J14-7

J14-8

J13-1

J13-2

J13-3

J13-4

J13-5

J13-6

J13-7

J14-1

CPU PIN

J5-1

J5-2

J5-3

J5-4

J5-5

J5-6

J5-7

J5-8

J5-9

J5-10

GND

RDCD

RDTR

RCTS

RRTS

RRXD

RTXD

GND

Signal

DIN 0

GND

DOUT 0

DIN 1

GND

DOUT 1

GND

LRXD

LTXD

WAKEUP

Function

Discrete Input 0

Ground

Discrete Output 0

Discrete Input 1

Ground

Discrete Output 1

Ground

Receive Data Input

Transmit Data Output

Wakeup Signal

Notes

See Section 2.4.1

See Section 2.4.2

See Section 2.4.1

See Section 2.4.2

PULSE

RTD-

GND

EXC

AI

Ground

Data Carrier Detect Input See Section 2.4.5.3

Data Term Ready Output See Section 2.4.5.3

Clear To Send Input See Section 2.4.5.3

Request To Send Output See Section 2.4.5.3

Receive Data Input See Section 2.4.5.3

Transmit Data Output

Ground

See Section 2.4.5.3

Pulse Input

Return

RTD+ Sense

RTDEXC Excitation

Ground

Excitation

Analog Input

See Section 2.4.5.2

See Section 2.4.5.2

See Section 2.4.5.2

See Section 2.4.3

See Section 2.3.5

See Section 2.3.5

See Section 2.3.5

See Section 2.4.4

See Section 2.4.4

Table 3-4 - Field I/O Wiring List

TeleFlow™ Service / 3-19

Figure 3-10 - 3-Wire RTD Temperature Input

Figure 3-11 - Discrete Input Wired to TeleFlow™

Figure 3-12 - Pulse Input Wired to TeleFlow™ (See Section 2.4.3)

3-20 / Service TeleFlow™

Figure 3-13 - Discrete Output Wired to TeleFlow™

Figure 3-14 - Auxiliary Analog Input Wired to TeleFlow™

TeleFlow™

Figure 3-15 - PC Connected to TeleFlow™ Local Port

Service / 3-21

BLANK PAGE

Section 4

SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 MODEL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

3530-10B-AB-C-D-EFG-H-J-K = Model Structure

WETTED PART MATERIAL

316 Stainless Steel

Hastelloy C

PRESSURE RANGE

150" DP/500 PSI STATIC

150" DP/500 PSI STATIC

150" DP/2000 PSI STATIC

150" DP/2000 PSI STATIC

300" DP/2000 PSI STATIC

300" DP/2000 PSI STATIC

150" DP/1000 PSI STATIC

150" DP/1000 PSI STATIC

300" DP/1000 PSI STATIC

300" DP/1000 PSI STATIC

25 PSI DP/2000 PSI STATIC

25 PSI DP/2000 PSI STATIC

100" DP/2000 PSI STATIC

100" DP/2000 PSI STATIC

ENCLOSURE

Standard

Special

1 4

0 5

1 5

0 6

1 6

0 7

1 7

A B

0 1

1 1

0 2

1 2

0 3

1 3

0 4

C

0

1

A

0

1

CERTIFICATION

None

Class 1 Division 1 (CUL-I.S.)

Class 1 Division 2 (CUL-N.I)

Note: Consult Factory on availability of UL listings

POWER SYSTEM (* = 0 or 2)

External

External With I.S. Interface

External With Radio

External With Modem

Alkaline Battery

Lithium Battery (Single)

Lithium Battery (Single) I.S.

Lithium Battery Pack (Dual)

1W Solar Panel System, 6V Lead Acid Battery

1W Solar Panel System, 6V Lead Acid Bat. I.S.

5W Solar Panel System, 6V Lead Acid Battery

5W Solar Panel System, 6V Lead Acid Bat. I.S.

5W S.P. System, 12V Lead Acid Battery

5W Solar Panel System, 12V Lead Acid with Radio

Alkaline Rechargeable Battery

RTD*

Without

With

1

2

G

0

E F G

0 0 *

0 0 1

0 1 *

0 2 *

1 * *

2 * *

2 0 1

3 * *

4 * *

4 0 1

5 * *

5 0 1

6 * *

6 1 *

7 * *

H

0

1

APPLICATION PROGRAM

Standard

ACCOL

Custom Program

2

9

D

1

STATIC PRESSURE/FLANGE

ORIENTATION*

Upstream Left

Upstream Right

J

1

2

COMMUNICATION

RS-232 (* = Any Selection)

Radio (* 1 = 0 or 6)

Modem (* = Any selection)

E F

* 0

* 1 1

* 2

EXPANSION BOARDS

None

Expansion TIB

Expansion RS-232

Expansion AO (IS)

Expansion RS-485

See Table 4-2 for Model Number Breakdown for 3530-10B Expansion Boards

Table 4-1 - Model Number Breakdown for 3530-10B

3

4

1

2

K

0

* Note: Field changeable items may not match the units Model Number as shipped from the factory .

TeleFlow J Specifications / 4-1

None

EXPANSION

BOARDS

Expansion TIB

Expansion RS-232

Expansion A0 (I.S.)

D

*

E

*

G K NOTES

(* = Any Selection)

* 0 No Expansion Bds.

2 # * 1

2

2

2

*

0

*

* 1

1

1

1

2

2

2

Ext. Pwr. or +12V Lead Acid Batt.

No Certification or Class I, Div. 2

Ext. Pwr., Class I, Div. 1

Standard - Class I, Div. 1 (ISTRAN)

2

2

0

*

1

1

3

3

Ext. Pwr., Class I, Div. 1

Class I , Div. 1 (ISTRAN)

Expansion RS-485 2 # * 1 4 Ext. Pwr. or +12V Lead Acid Batt.

Note: * 1 = 0 (No Certification) or 2 (Class I, Division 2 Certification)

Note: # = 0 (External Power System) or 6 (12Vdc Lead Acid Battery)

Table 4-2 - Model Number Breakdown for 3530-10B (Expansion Boards)

4.2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Calculation Accuracy: Conforms to accepted published results to within 10 parts per million when calculated using fixed values.

Static & Differential

Pressure Accuracy:

Static Pressure Effect on

Differential Pressure:

Overpressure Effect on

Differential Pressure:

Reverse Overpressure Effect on Differential Pressure:

±.1% FS

Static and Differential

Resolution:

0.005% FS

Ambient Temp. Effect on Static 0.25% URL and Differential Pressure: (Over Operating Temperature Range)

0.005% FS Power Supply Effect:

(All Variables)

Reproducibility: ±0.1% in 1-Hour Period

(Including hysteresis and repeatability)

RTD Temperature Range:

RTD Resolution:

Specifications / 4-2

Zero error: ±.1% FS per 1000 psi (DP/2000 PSIG)

Span error: ±.1% FS per 1000 psi (DP/2000 PSIG)

Zero error: ±.1% FS per 500 psi (DP/500 PSIG)

Span error: ±.1% FS per 500 psi (DP/500 PSIG)

±.2% FS per 2000 psi

±.2% FS per 2000 psi

-40 E to +248 E F

±0.02

E F

TeleFlow J

RTD Reading Accuracy:

Ambient Temp. Effect on

RTD Reading Accuracy:

±0.25

E F (Not including RTD Element)

0.1% FS (Over Operating Temperature Range)

4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Temperature:

Relative Humidity:

Vibration Effect:

Transient Susceptibility:

ESD Susceptibility:

EMI Susceptibility:

Hazardous Locations:

Operating Range: -40 to +60 E C (-40 to 140 E F)

0 to +40 E C (+32 to 104 E F)(w/alkaline battery)

5% to 90% (noncondensing)

< ±0.1% FS for 15-150 Hz at 2 g and 150-2000 Hz at 1 g on any axis per SAMA PMC 33.1-1978.

Meets the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989

(formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.

Meets ESD withstand capability to 10KV (No Damage).

Meets SAMA PMC 33.1-1978 (10V/M) from 20MHz to

500MHz. Effect on pressure and temperature readings is < ±0.25% FS.

Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups C &

D hazardous locations (in certain configurations - see

Section 5.1 for model numbers) (see Appendix A).

4.4 CPU, MEMORY & PROGRAM INTERFACE

Processor:

Memory:

RAM Battery Backup:

80C188EB, 16-bit microprocessor operating at 8MHz.

- 128K bytes Flash PROM.

- 128K bytes of Battery Backed Static RAM.

Lithium battery (3.6 V) with 5000 hours cumulative backup.

4.5 COMMUNICATIONS

Communication Ports:

Signal:

Local Port:

Network Port:

Communication Rates:

Two asynchronous ports standard

RS-232 Levels

For configuration, data collection, etc.

For Radio or Modem

Selectable from 1200 bps to 19.2 Kbps

TeleFlow J Specifications / 4-3

Protocol: Bristol Standard Asynchronous Protocol (BSAP) compatible with International Standard, ISO 1745, 2111 &

2629. Interface compatible for use with Radio Modems or Phone-line Modems (Private Line or Switched

Network types).

4.6 DISCRETE INPUTS

No. of Inputs:

Input Voltage Range:

Input Threshold:

Pullup Voltage:

Input Leakage:

Sink Current (to pull input low):

Allowable Source Leakage:

4.7 DISCRETE OUTPUTS

No. of Outputs:

Switched Voltage Range:

Load:

Off-state Leakage:

On-state Resistance (to ground):

4.8 PULSE INPUT

Voltage Range:

Minimum Frequency:

Maximum Frequency:

Minimum Pulse Width:

Input Threshold (Low):

Input Threshold (High):

2 DIs

0 to 16 Vdc

High = 3.6V (Min) Low = 0.98V (Max)

4.8V (Nominal) at terminal (with input open)

15uA (Max)

100uA (Min)

7uA (Max)

2 DOs

0 to 16 Vdc (Transorb Clamped)

100 mA Max.

8uA (Typical), 100uA (Max)

0.29 Ohms (Typical), 0.50 Ohms (Max)

0 to 16V

DC

5KHz (Max.) (0-5V Square Wave)

200 Hz (Open Collector or Dry Contact)

100uS

1.95V (Typical), 1.50V (Minimum)

2.95V (Typical), 3.50V (Maximum)

Specifications / 4-4 TeleFlow J

4.9 ANALOG INPUT

Input Range:

Load Resistance:

Configuration:

4.11 POWER

0 to 16 Vdc

155K Ohms

Resolution: .5mV

Uncalibrated Error at 25

Temperature Effect:

E C: <.5% FS (Typical)

<.25% FS (per 100 E F)

4.10

RTD INPUT

Type: 100-Ohm Platinum Bulb

(DIN 43760 Curve)

3-Wire

Operating Voltage

Ripple Voltage Tolerance:

Operating Current:

Noise Voltage Tolerance:

Connector Type:

Wire Size:

Fuse Type & Rating:

4.12 AUXILIARY POWER

Output Voltage:

Min. = +5.4 Vdc (Max. = +16 Vdc)

Max. = 100 mVpp ( # 60Hz)

Typ. = 81mA Communication Mode

(Max. = 90mA)

Typ. = 63mA Calculation Mode

(Max. = 68mA)

Typ. = 0.9mA Sleep Mode

(Max. = 1.6mA)

Max. = 100 mVpp

Pluggable MSTB (or equivalent) (J7, J8 & J10)

Max. = 14AWG

350mA (Schurter 3402.0043)

Max. Load Current:

On Resistance:

Equals [Vin - (Iload) x Ron)] where:

Vin = Power at the PWR Connector

Iload = Load Current & Ron = On Resistance

1.8A Continuous (2.5A Momentary)

Typ. = 0.37 Ohms (Max. = 0.5 Ohms)

TeleFlow J Specifications / 4-5

4.13 BACKUP BATTERY

Type:

Voltage:

Discharge Current (Backup):

Tadiran TL-5134 (Lithium Thionyl Chloride)

1 Ah capacity

3.6Vdc (Nominal)

Max. = 60uA

Specifications / 4-6 TeleFlow J

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations

1. A version of the TeleFlow is available which is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Group C and D hazardous locations or nonhazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive TeleFlow. Refer to the

TeleFlow User's Manual for general information. In the event of a conflict between the TeleFlow

User's Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.

2. The TeleFlow includes both nonincendive and unrated field circuits. Unless a circuit is specifically identified in this document as nonincendive, the circuit is unrated. Unrated circuits must be wired using Division 2 wiring methods as specified in article 501-4(b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA

70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian

Electrical Code for installation in Canada.

3. The local communications port terminates in a circular connector on the bottom of the TeleFlow enclosure. The wiring on this connector is unrated. No connections may be made to this port unless the user ensures that the area is known to be nonhazardous. Connections to this port are temporary, and must be short in duration to ensure that flammable concentrations do not accumulate while it is in use.

4. Optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use with the nonincendive

TeleFlow as described in the Model Specification. The connection to these solar panels is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods are not required. The nominal panel voltage must match the nominal battery voltage (6V or 12V).

5.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect the Solar PWR, PWR1, PWR2 or AUX PWR terminals unless the area is known to be nonhazardous.

6.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in

Class I, Division 2 environments.

7.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - The area must be known to be nonhazardous before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.

8.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless power has been disconnected and the area is known to be nonhazardous.

9. An RTD is normally supplied with the TeleFlow. Connection to the RTD is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods are not required.

10. The signals available for customer wiring are available in Table A1.

11.

The UL listed nonincendive TeleFlow includes radio communications (MDS Model 2310A, 4310, 4710, 9710 or

9810) or (FreeWave Spread Spectrum Radio) that is used in conjunction with a 5W, 12V Solar Panel System.

Installation of a BBI modem in the TeleFlow housing is approved.

Connection to the radio or modem is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods are not required.

Table A1 - CPU Board Customer Wiring Signal Names

Signal Name

SOLAR PWR

PWR 1 & 2

AUX

POWER

DIN 0 & 1

DOUT 0 & 1

LRXD, LTXD,

& WAKEUP

Signal Description

Solar Panel inputs; 5W, 6V or 12V. Refer to ¶ 4 of this document.

Power supply inputs; maximum 16VDC. Refer to ¶ 5 of this document.

Power output to Radio or Modem; maximum 16VDC. Refer to ¶ 5 of this document.

Discrete inputs; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.

Discrete outputs; maximum 16VDC, 100mA. Use Division 2 wiring methods.

Local communications port; factory wired, maximum input or output is ±16VDC.

Refer to ¶ 3 of this document. Note: When WAKEUP is used with an optional radio r efer to ¶ 11 of this document.

10/18/2000 Appendix A, Document CI3530-10B Page 1 of 2

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations

Signal Name

RDCD, RDTR,

RCTS, RRTS,

RRXD, RTXD

Pulse

RTD-, RTD+,

RTD EXC

AI EXC & AI

Signal Description

Remote communications port (for radio or modem). Refer to 3530-10B Model

Spec. and ¶ 11 of this document.

Pulse input; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.

RTD inputs and excitation; refer to ¶ 9 of this document.

Analog input and excitation; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.

Note: When AI is used with an optional radio refer to ¶ 11 of this document.

10/18/2000 Appendix A, Document CI3530-10B Page 2 of 2

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

1.

A version of the TeleFlow J is available which is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe TeleFlow. Refer to the

TeleFlow User's Manual for general information. In the event of a conflict between the

TeleFlow User's Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.

2.

The TeleFlow includes both intrinsically safe and unrated field circuits. Unless a circuit is specifically identified in this document as intrinsically safe, it may not be wired.

3.

The local communications port terminates in a circular connector on the bottom of the

TeleFlow enclosure. The wiring on this connector is unrated. WARNING: No connections may be made to this communications port unless the user ensures that the area is known to be nonhazardous.

4.

Optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use with the intrinsically safe TeleFlow as described in the Model specification. The solar panel can be mounted remotely, with the cable length not to exceed 25 feet. Connections to these components are approved as intrinsically safe circuits. Do not substitute any other battery, solar panel, or other power source. When an externally powered TeleFlow is used in a

Division 1 location, it must be used in conjunction with a BBI IStran Communication

Interface and installed per instruction manual CI-3530-IStran.

5.

An RTD is typically supplied with the TeleFlow. Connection to the BBI-supplied RTD is approved as an intrinsically safe circuit. BBI part numbers for the RTD are 39545X-YY-Z

(with 6' cable & fixed RTD) and 39514X-YY-Z (with 15' cable & Fixed RTD), where X represents the digits 5-8, YY represents 01-11, and Z represents 0-9, and 392610-XX-Y (with bendable RTD), where XX represents the digits 01-03 and Y represents 5-9 . These part numbers all designate the same basic associated assembly, with the different combinations representing whether an optional connection head is included, whether a thermowell is included, and the lengths of the RTD probe and thermowell. The RTD cable length is not to exceed 50 feet.

6.

WARNING: Installation of a radio or modem in the intrinsically safe TeleFlow housing is not permitted. Connection to the network communications port on the CPU Board is only permitted via a Model 3530-IStran, which is located in a Nonhazardous/Division 2 area (see Figures B5 through B12 and CI-3530-IStran).

7.

WARNING: Substitution of components may impair intrinsic safety.

8.

Illustrations of the approved internal battery systems are provided in Figures B1 and B2.

9.

Figures B3 through B14 show approved connections to the intrinsically safe TeleFlow.

10. See Appendix B of PIP-EXP232TF when making connections to a RS-232 Expansion Board in a Class I, Division 1 location.

12/03/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 1 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

12/03/03

Figure B1 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow with 6V Lead Acid Battery System

Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 2 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B2 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow With 6V Single Lithium Battery System

12/03/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 3 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

12/03/03

Figure B3 - Approved Power & RTD Connections

Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 4 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B4 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow Discrete Input Wiring Diagram

Figure B5 - Modem System with Independent Power Supply

12/03/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 5 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B6 - Modem System with Single Power Source

12/03/03

Figure B7 - Radio with Independent Power Source

Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 6 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B8 - Radio with Single Power Source

12/03/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 7 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

12/03/03

Figure B9 - Multidrop Radio System (Featuring MDS Radio)

(TeleFlows not situated in a Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe Area)

Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 8 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

12/03/03

Figure B10 - Multidrop Radio System (Featuring FreeWave Radio)

(TeleFlows not situated in a Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe Area)

Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 9 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

12/03/03

Figure B11 - Multidrop Modem System

(TeleFlows not situated in a Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe Area)

Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 10 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B12 - TeleFlow with External Power Source

12/03/03

Figure B13A - Model 2808-IXX Connected to an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow

(IStran powers TeleFlow (via J8) - TeleFlow Connector J6 powers 2808-IXX

Analog Input Wiring Diagram 1

Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 11 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B13B - Intrinsically Safe Model 2808-IXX

Connected to an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow

IStran powers TeleFlow (via J8) and 2808-IXX

Analog Input Wiring Diagram 2

12/03/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 12 of 13

TeleFlow

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B14 - Wiring Diagram

Intrinsically Safe Discrete I/O & Pulse Input Signals via IStran #1

Intrinsically Safe RS-232 Signals via IStran #2

12/03/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-10B Page 13 of 13

BLANK PAGE

Appendix C

COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL SUPPORT

C.1 GENERAL

BSAP is Bristol Babcock's Synchronous Asynchronous Protocol for network communications.

The TeleFlow™ Computer acts as a slave to a Bristol Babcock host device and must be polled.

C.2 BSAP COMMUNICATION LISTS

The following lists are provided for data gathering by Bristol Babcock nodes connected to the

TeleFlow™ network port:

10

List #

14

15

16

11

12

13

17

18

50

51

52

20

21

22

53

60

List Name

Configuration List

AGA3 Calculated Data list - w/AGA8

Configuration List #1

Configuration List #2

Control List

AGA8 Gross Method List

AGA8 Detail Method List

AGA3 Calculated Data List - w/NX19

Communication Configuration List

Live Data List

Rate Volume List

Input List

LCD Display List

Poll List 1 (User Configurable)

Poll List 2 (User Configurable)

Poll List 3 (User Configurable)

Event List (User Configurable)

Table C-1 TeleFlow Point List Names

The point lists available in the TeleFlow™ Firmwareare are provided on the pages that follow.

Entries following the horizontalline (in lists 10, 11, 14 and 21), appear for the first time in

Firmware version 1.41).

TeleFlow™ Page C-1

Signal Description

TeleFlow Version

Unit ID

Meter ID

Meter Number

Alarm Rep Format

Alarm Rep Format

Display Alarms

Flow Equations

Pressure Base

Temperature Base

Pipe Material

Orifice Material

AGA 8 Method

Gross Method

Contract Hour

Pipe Diameter

Temp Ref Pipe

Tap Location

Tap Type

Orifice Diameter

Temp Ref Orifice

Low DP Cutoff

DP Full Scale

DP Low Scale

Press Full Scale

Press Low Scale

Temp High Scale

Temp Low Scale

Rate Lo-Lo Limit

Rate Lo Limit

Rate Hi Limit

Rate Hi-Hi Limit

Rate Hi Deadband

Rate Lo Deadband

DP Lo-Lo Limit

DP Lo Limit

DP Hi Limit

DP Hi-Hi Limit

DP High Deadband

DP Low Deadband

Pres Lo-Lo Limit

Page C-2

List #10 - Configuration List

Default

Value

Signal Name

1.26

9999

Unnamed Meter

0.0

Short

Normal

On

1992

14.73 Psia

60.0 Deg. F

Carbon

Steel

GROSS

GCN

7.0

4.026 Inches

68.0 Deg. F

Upstrm

Flange

2.0 Inches

68.0 Deg. F

0.25 InH2O

300.0 In H2O

0.0 In H2O

2000.0 Psig

0.0 Psig

300.0 Deg. F

0.0 Deg. F

0 MSCFH

0 MSCFH

3000 MSCFH

5000 MSCFH

50 MSCFH

50 MSCFH

0.0 In H2O

10.0 In H2O

250.0 In H2O

300.0 In H2O

10.0 In H2O

3.0 In H2O

0.0 Psig

PROGREV..

UNITID..CFG

METERID..CFG

METERNUM..CFG

#ALARM.FORMAT.

#ALARM.FORMAT.001

ALRMDISP.ENA.CFG

FLOWEQN.SELECT.CFG

PRESBASE..CFG

TEMPBASE..CFG

PIPEMTRL..CFG

ORIFMTRL..CFG

AGA8MTH..CFG

GROSSMTH..CFG

CONTRACT.HOUR.CFG

PIPE.DIAM.CFG

PIPET.REFTMP.CFG

TAPLOC..CFG

TAPTYPE..CFG

ORIF.DIAM.CFG

ORIFT.REFTMP.CFG

DPCUTOFF.VAL.CFG

DPFULL.HSCALE.CFG

DPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG

SPFULL.FSCALE.CFG

SPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG

TEMPFULL.FSCALE.CFG

TEMPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG

RATELOLO..LLAL

RATELO..LAL

RATEHI..HAL

RATEHIHI..HHAL

RATEHIDB..HIDB

RATELODB..LODB

DPLOLO..LLAL

DPLO..LAL

DPHI..HAL

DPHIHI..HHAL

DPHIDB..HIDB

DPLODB..LODB

SPLOLO..LLAL

TeleFlow™

Signal Description

List #10 - Configuration List (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

Pres Lo Limit

Pres Hi Limit

Pres Hi-Hi Limit

Pres Hi Deadband

Pres Lo Deadband

Temp Lo-Lo Limit

Temp Lo Limit

Temp Hi Limit

Temp Hi-Hi Limit

Temp Hi Deadband

Temp Lo Deadband

Batt Lo-Lo Limit

Batt Lo Limit

Batt Hi Limit

Batt Hi-Hi Limit

Batt Hi Deadband

Batt Lo Deadband

Atmospheric Pres

Spec Heat Ratio

Heating Value

Heat Value Src

Specific Gravity

Gravity type is:

Flwing Viscosity

Methane Content

Nitrogen Content

CO2 Content

Ethane Content

Propane Content

H2O Content

H2S Content

Hydrogen Content

CO Content

Oxygen Content

I-Butane Content

N-Butane Content

I-Pentan Content

N-Pentan Content

Hexane Content

Heptane Content

Octane Content

100 Psig

1500 Psig

2000 Psig

50 Psig

10 Psig

32.0 Deg. F

50.0 Deg. F

150.0 Deg. F

250.0 Deg. F

10.0 Deg. F

3.0 Deg. F

5.5 Volts

6.0 Volts

14.0 Volts

16.0 Volts

0.5 Volts

0.5 Volts

14.73 Psia

1.3

1000.0 BTU/CF

Fixed

0.6

Real

0.0000069 Lb/FTS

89.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

8.0 Mole %

3.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

SPLO..LAL

SPHI..HAL

SPHIHI..HHAL

SPHIDB..HIDB

SPLODB..LODB

TEMPLOLO..LLAL

TEMPLO..LAL

TEMPHI..HAL

TEMPHIHI..HHAL

TEMPHIDB..HIDB

TEMPLODB..LODB

BATTLOLO..LLAL

BATTLO..LAL

BATTHI..HAL

BATTHIHI..HHAL

BATTHIDB..HIDB

BATTLODB..LODB

ATMOS..CFG

K..CFG

HTVAL.VAL.CFG

HVSRC..CFG

GRAVITY.VAL.CFG

GRAVTYP..CFG

VISC..CFG

CH4.CNTENT.CFG

N2.CNTENT.CFG

CO2.CNTENT.CFG

C2.CNTENT.CFG

C3.CNTENT.CFG

H2O.CNTENT.CFG

H2S.CNTENT.CFG

H2.CNTENT.CFG

CO.CNTENT.CFG

O2.CNTENT.CFG

IC4.CNTENT.CFG

NC4.CNTENT.CFG

IC5.CNTENT.CFG

NC5.CNTENT.CFG

C6.CNTENT.CFG

C7.CNTENT.CFG

C8.CNTENT.CFG

TeleFlow™ Page C-3

Signal Description

List #10 - Configuration List (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

Nonane Content

Decane Content

Helium Content

Argon Content

Sampler Function

Sampler Volume

Pulse Width

Flow Rate Contrl

Valve Ctrl. limit

Flow Setpoint

Flow Deadband

Ke - Prop Gain

Ti - Integral Tm

Td - Deriv Time

Maximum Flw Rate

Valve Travel Tim

Calc Interval

Logging Interval

Break Log on Chg

Trending Log

Netwrk Baud Rate

RTS Delay Mode

RTS Txmit delay

Aux. Pwr Default

Radio Scheduling

Listen Duration

Comm Timeout

Start Poll Hour

Stop Poll Hour

Local Comm Time

Local Timeout

Time per Node

Time per Group

Time Past Hour

Nomination Function

Nomination Units

Nomination Mode

Stop Mode

Daily Nomination

Dial On Nom Alarm

Alarm Percentage

30 Secs

60 Secs

Hourly

Disabl

Enable

9600 bps

Timer

0 msec

Off

Disabl

120.0 Secs

20.0 Secs

0.0

24.0

120.0 Secs

20.0 Secs

26.0 Secs

5.0 Secs

60.0 Secs

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

Disabl

100.0 MSCF

1.0 Secs

Disabl

Disabl

0.0 MSCFH

1.0 % stpt

1.0

2.0 Secs

0.0 Secs

5000 MSCFH

Disabl

MCF

Fast

Open

Off

Disabl

100.0 %

C9.CNTENT.CFG

C10.CNTENT.CFG

HE.CNTENT.CFG

AR.CNTENT.CFG

SAMPLER.ENA.CFG

SAMPVOL..CFG

SAMPDUR..CFG

FLWCNTL.ENA.CFG

CTLLIMIT.ENA.CFG

SETPNT..CFG

DEADBND..CFG

GAIN..CFG

INTEGRAL..CFG

DERIV..CFG

MAXRATE..CFG

VALVE.TIME.CFG

CALCINT..CFG

LOGINT..CFG

LOGBRK.ENA.CFG

TREND.ENA.CFG

NETBAUD..CFG

RTSMODE..CFG

RTSDEL..CFG

RADIO.POWER.DFLT

RADIO.SCHED.ENBL

RADIO.TIME.SP

RADIO.TIMOUT.SP

RADIO.START.HOUR

RADIO.END.HOUR

LOCAL.TIME.SP

LOCAL.TIMOUT.SP

NODE.POLL.TIME

GROUP.POLL.TIME

OFFSET.POLL.TIME

NOMIN.ENA.CFG

NOMUNIT.SELECT.CFG

NOMMODE.SELECT.CFG

NOMSTOP.SELECT.CFG

NOMDAILY.SELECT.CFG

NOMALM.DIAL.ENBL

CURRENT.ALARM.PCT

Page C-4 TeleFlow™

Signal Description

List #10 - Configuration List (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

Next Start Date

Next Start Hour

Next Stop Date

Next Stop Hour

Demand Polling

Listen Interval

Radio On Time

Demand Poll Start

Demand Poll End

0.0

7.0

0.0

7.0

Disabl

1.0 Secs

300.0 msec

0.0

24.0

NEXT.START.DATE

NEXT.START.HOUR

NEXT.STOP.DATE

NEXT.STOP.HOUR

DEMAND.POLL.ENBL

DEMAND.INTVL.TIME

DEMAND.LISTEN.TIME

DEMAND.POLL.STRT

DEMAND.END.HOUR

Flow Rate

Beta Ratio

Ev

Cd

Zs (@14.73, 60)

Zb (@Pb, Tb)

Zf (@Pf, Tf)

Y-Expansion Fctr

Flow Extension

Cprime Factor

List #11 - AGA3 Calculated Data List - w/AGA8

0.0 MSCFH

0.5

1.0

0.6

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.0

0.0

FLOWRATE..CALC

BETA..CALC

EV.FACTOR.CALC

CD.FACTOR.CALC

ZS.FACTOR.CALC

ZB.FACTOR.CALC

ZF.FACTOR.CALC

Y.FACTOR.CALC

EXT.CURR.CALC

CPRIME.FACTOR.CALC

List #12 - Configuration Data List #1

Orifice Diameter

Pipe Diameter

Specific Gravity

Heating Value

Atmospheric Pres

Pressure Base

Temperature Base

Flwing Viscosity

Spec Heat Ratio

Tap Location

Tap Type

Low DP Cutoff

TeleFlow Version

2.0 Inches

4.026 Inches

0.6

1000.0 BTU/CF

14.73 Psia

14.73 Psia

60.0 Deg. F

0.0000069 Lb/FTS

1.3

Upstrm

Flange

Clear

ORIF.DIAM.CFG

PIPE.DIAM.CFG

GRAVITY.VAL.CFG

HTVAL.VAL.CFG

ATMOS..CFG

PRESBASE..CFG

TEMPBASE..CFG

VISC..CFG

K..CFG

TAPLOC..CFG

TAPTYPE..CFG

DPCUTALM..

List #13 - Configuration Data List #2

0.0

PROGREV..

TeleFlow™ Page C-5

List #13 - Configuration Data List #2 (Continued)

Signal Description Default

Value

Signal Name

Meter Number

Flow Equations

Calc Interval

Contract Hour

Logging Interval

Break Log on Chg

Heat Value Src

Gravity type is:

AGA 8 Method

Gross Method

0.0

1992

60 Secs

7

Hourly

Disabl

Fixed

Real

GROSS

GCN

METERNUM..CFG

FLOWEQN.SELECT.CFG

CALCINT..CFG

CONTRACT.HOUR.CFG

LOGINT..CFG

LOGBRK.ENA.CFG

HVSRC..CFG

GRAVTYP..CFG

AGA8MTH..CFG

GROSSMTH..CFG

Sampler Function

Sampler Volume

Pulse Width

Flow Rate Contrl

Valve Ctrl Limit

Flow Setpoint

Flow Deadband

Ke - Prop Gain

Ti - Integral Tm

Td - Deriv Time

Valve Travel Tim

Maximum Flw Rate

Nomination Function

Nomination Units

Nomination Mode

Stop Mode

Daily Nomination

Dial On Nom Alarm

Alarm Percentage

Next Start Date

Next Start Hour

Next Stop Date

Next Stop Hour

Specific Gravity

Heating Value

List #14 - Control List

Disabl

MCF

Fast

Open

Off

Disabl

100.0 %

0.0

7.0

0.0

7.0

Disabl

100.0 MSCF

1.0 Secs

Disabl

Disabl

0 MSCFH

1.0 % stpt

1.0

2.0 Secs

0.0 Secs

30 Secs

5000 MSCFH

SAMPLER.ENA.CFG

SAMPVOL..CFG

SAMPDUR..CFG

FLWCNTL.ENA.CFG

CTLLIMIT.ENA.CFG

SETPNT..CFG

DEADBND..CFG

GAIN..CFG

INTEGRAL..CFG

DERIV..CFG

VALVE.TIME.CFG

MAXRATE..CFG

NOMIN.ENA.CFG

NOMUNIT.SELECT.CFG

NOMMODE.SELECT.CFG

NOMSTOP.SELECT.CFG

NOMDAILY.SELECT.CFG

NOMALM.DIAL.ENBL

CURRENT.ALARM.PCT

NEXT.START.DATE

NEXT.START.HOUR

NEXT.STOP.DATE

NEXT.STOP.HOUR

List #15 - AGA8 Gross Method

0.6

1000.0 BTU/CF

GRAVITY.VAL.CFG

HTVAL.VAL.CFG

Page C-6 TeleFlow™

Signal Description

List #15 - AGA8 Gross Method (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

CO2 Content

Nitrogen Content

Gross Method

Gravity type is:

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

GCN

Real

CO2.CNTENT.CFG

N2.CNTENT.CFG

GROSSMTH..CFG

GRAVTYP..CFG

Methane Content

Nitrogen Content

CO2 Content

Ethane Content

Propane Content

H2O Content

H2S Content

Hydrogen Content

CO Content

Oxygen Content

I-Butane Content

N-Butane Content

I-Pentan Content

N-Pentan Content

Hexane Content

Heptane Content

Octane Content

Nonane Content

Decane Content

Helium Content

Argon Content

Flow Rate

Beta Ratio

Fpb Factor

Ftb Factor

Fg Factor

Ftf Factor

Fa Factor

Fr Factor

Y-Expansion Fctr

Fb Factor

List #16 - AGA8 Detail Method

89.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

8.0 Mole %

3.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

List #17 - AGA3 Calculated Data List - w/NX19

CH4.CNTENT.CFG

N2.CNTENT.CFG

CO2.CNTENT.CFG

C2.CNTENT.CFG

C3.CNTENT.CFG

H2O.CNTENT.CFG

H2S.CNTENT.CFG

H2.CNTENT.CFG

CO.CNTENT.CFG

O2.CNTENT.CFG

IC4.CNTENT.CFG

NC4.CNTENT.CFG

IC5.CNTENT.CFG

NC5.CNTENT.CFG

C6.CNTENT.CFG

C7.CNTENT.CFG

C8.CNTENT.CFG

C9.CNTENT.CFG

C10.CNTENT.CFG

HE.CNTENT.CFG

AR.CNTENT.CFG

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.0

0.0 MSCFH

0.5

1.0

1.0

0.0

FLOWRATE..CALC

BETA..CALC

FPB.FACTOR.CALC

FTB.FACTOR.CALC

FG.FACTOR.CALC

FTF.FACTOR.CALC

FA.FACTOR.CALC

FR.FACTOR.CALC

Y.FACTOR.CALC

FB.FACTOR.CALC

TeleFlow™ Page C-7

List #17 - AGA3 Calculated Data List w/NX19 (Continued)

Signal Description Default

Value

Signal Name

Fpv Fctor (NX19)

C prime Factor

Flow Extension

1.0

0.0

0.0

FPV.FACTOR.CALC

CPRIME.FACTOR.CALC

EXT.CURR.CALC

List #18 - Communications Configuration List

Netwrk Baud Rate

RTS Delay Mode

RTS Txmit Delay

Aux. Pwr Default

Radio Scheduling

Listen Duration

Comm Timeout

Start Poll Hour

Stop Poll Hour

Local Comm Time

Local Timeout

Time per Node

Time per Group

Time Past Hour

Demand Polling

Listen Interval

Radio On Time

Demand Poll Start

Demand Poll End

Alarm Dialout

Dial on Cutoff

Dial on Backflow

Dial on Txmitter

Dial on RAM Batt

Dial on FP Error

Dial on Self-chk

Dial on DP Alm

Dial on Pressure Alm

Dial on temp Alm

Dial on Rate Alm

Dial on Batt Alm

Dial on Aux Alm

Dial on Ovrchrg

Dial On Nom Alarm

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

0.0

24.0

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

9600 bps

Timer

0 msec

Off

Disabl

120.0 Secs

20.0 Secs

0.0

24.0

120.0 Secs

20.0 Secs

26.0 Secs

5.0 Secs

60.0 Secs

Disabl

1.0 Secs

300.0 msec

NETBAUD..CFG

RTSMODE..CFG

RTSDEL..CFG

RADIO.POWER.DFLT

RADIO.SCHED.ENBL

RADIO.TIME.SP

RADIO.TIMOUT.SP

RADIO.START.HOUR

RADIO.END.HOUR

LOCAL.TIME.SP

LOCAL.TIMOUT.SP

NODE.POLL.TIME

GROUP.POLL.TIME

OFFSET.POLL.TIME

DEMAND.POLL.ENBL

DEMAND.INTVL.TIME

DEMAND.LISTEN.TIME

DEMAND.POLL.STRT

DEMAND.END.HOUR

DIAL.ENABLE..

CUTOFF.DIAL.ENBL

BACKALM.DIAL.ENBL

TXFAIL.DIAL.ENBL

BBATLOW.DIAL.ENBL

FPERRALM.DIAL.ENBL

SELFALM.DIAL.ENBL

DPALM.DIAL.ENBL

SPALM.DIAL.ENBL

TEMPALM.DIAL.ENBL

RATEALM.DIAL.ENBL

BATTALM.DIAL.ENBL

AUXALM.DIAL.ENBL

CHRGALM.DIAL.ENBL

NOMALM.DIAL.ENBL

Page C-8 TeleFlow™

Signal Description

Live Diff Press

Live Static Pres

Live Temperature

Flow Rate

Operator Change

List #20 - Live Data List

Default

Value

Signal Name

0.0 In H2O

0.0 Psig

0.0 Deg. F

0.0 MSCFH

Off

DIFFPRES.VAL.LIVE

STATPRES.VAL.LIVE

FTEMP.VAL.LIVE

FLOWRATE..CALC

CONFIG.CHANGE.

Flow Rate

Flow Rate @ Std

Energy Flow Rate

Daily Flow Rate

Flow Time Today

Today's Energy

Flow Time Yesday

Yesday's Volume

Yesday's Energy

Monthly Volume

Monthly Energy

Volume Totalizer

Energy Totalizer

Prev Month Volume

Prev Month Energy

Scaled Frequency

Scaled Pulse Today

Scaled Pulse Yesterday

Total Scaled Pulses

Diff Press

Flowing Pres

Flowing Temperature

System Power

Power Input #1

Power Input #2

Backup Battery

PC Board Temp

Auxiliary Input

Total Pulses

TeleFlow™

List #22 - Input List

0.0 In H2O

0.0 Psig

0.0 Deg. F

0.0 Volts

0.0 Volts

0.0 Volts

0.0 Volts

0.0 Deg. F

0.0

0.0

DIFFPRES.VAL.INP

STATPRES.VAL.INP

FTEMP.VAL.INP

BATTERY.VOLTS.INP

PWRSRC1..INP

PWRSRC2..INP

BBATVLT..INP

BRDTMP..INP

AUXINP..INP

PULSES..INP

Page C-9

Signal Description

Pulse Frequency

Discrete Out #1

Discrete Out #2

Discrete In #1

Discrete In #2

Meter ID

System Power

Auxiliary Input

Differential Pressure

Flowing Pressure

Flowing Temp.

Daily Flow Rate

Flow Time Today

Today's Volume

Yesday's Volume

Volume Totalizer

List #22 - Input List (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

0.0 Hz

Off

Off

Off

Off

FREQ..INP

DO1.STATE.OUT

DO2.STATE.OUT

DI1.STATE.IN

DI2.STATE.IN

List #50 - LCD Display List

Unnamed Meter

0.0 Volts

0.0

0.0 Psig

0.0 Deg. F

0.0 MSCFD

0.0 Mins

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MSCF

METERID.CFG

BATTERY.VOLTS.INP

AUXINP..INP

DIFFPRESS.VAL.INP

STATPRESS.VAL.INP

FTEMP.VAL.INP

DFLWRATE..CALC

FLWTMTDY.TODAY.CALC

VOLTDY.TODAY.CALC

VOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC

VOLTOT.ACCUM.CALC

Page C-10 TeleFlow™

Alarm Rep Format

Alarm Rep Format

On Signal

Tap Location

Tap Type

Orifice Material

Pipe Material

Flow Equations

Heat Value Src

AGA 8 Method

Gross Method

Gravity type is:

Sampler Function

Flow Rate Contrl

Valve Ctrl Limit

Press Measured

Logging Interval

Break Log on Chg

Trending Log

RTS delay Mode

Calibration Mode

Discrete Out #1

Discrete Out #2

Discrete Out #3

Discrete Out #4

Discrete Out #5

Discrete Out #6

Discrete Out #7

Discrete Out #8

Discrete Out #9

Discrete Out #10

Charge Regulator

Power System

Aux. Power Defualt

Radio Scheduling

Demand Polling

Local Turnon

Radio Shutdown

Operator Change

C.3 MASTER SIGNAL DIRECTORY

Signal Description

Logical Signals

Default

Value

Signal Name

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Enable

Upstrm

Hourly

Disabl

Enable

Timer

Off

Off

Off

Off

Short

Normal

On

Upstrm

Flange

Steel

Carbon

1992

Fixed

GROSS

GCN

Real

Disabl

Disabl

Enable

12Volt

Off

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Off

Off

#ALARM.FORMAT..

#ALARM.FORMAT.001

#ON..

TAPLOC..CFG

TAPTYPE..CFG

ORIFMTRL..CFG

PIPEMTRL..CFG

FLOWEQN.SELECT.CFG

HVSRC..CFG

AGA8MTH..CFG

GROSSMTH..CFG

GRAVTYP..CFG

SAMPLER.ENA.CFG

FLWCNTL.ENA.CFG

CTLLIMIT.ENA.CFG

CTL.TAPLOC.CFG

LOGINT..CFG

LOGBRK.ENA.CFG

TREND.ENA.CFG

RTSMODE..CFG

CALIB.MODE..

DO1.STATE.OUT

DO2.STATE.OUT

DO3.STATE.OUT

DO4.STATE.OUT

DO5.STATE.OUT

DO6.STATE.OUT

DO7.STATE.OUT

DO8.STATE.OUT

DO9.STATE.OUT

DO10.STATE.OUT

CHRGREG.ENA.CFG

PWRRNG.SELECT.CFG

RADIO.POWER.DFLT

RADIO.SCHED.ENBL

DEMAND.POLL.ENBL

RADIO.LOCAL.ENBL

RADIO.RESET.REQ

CONFIG.CHANGE..

TeleFlow™ Page C-11

Signal Description

Alarm Dialout

Dial on Cutoff

Dial on Backflow

Dial on Txmitter

Dial on RAM Batt

Dial on FP Error

Dial on Self-chk

Dial on DP Alm

Dial on Pres Alm

Dial on Temp Alm

Dial on Rate Alm

Dial on Batt Alm

Dial on Aux Alm

Dial on OvrChrg

Dial on Nom Alm

Dial on DI Alarm

Display Alarms

Nomination

Nom in Progress

Nomination Units

Nomination Mode

Stop Mode

Daily Nomination

Low DP Cutoff

Backflow

AGA 8 Calc Fail

Sensor Checksum

Transmitter Fail

Low Backup Batt.

FP Math Error

Self-Check Fail

Discrete In #1

Discrete In #2

Discrete In #3

Discrete In #4

Discrete In #5

Discrete In #6

Page C-12

Logical Signals (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

Disabl

On

Disabl

Off

MCF

Fast

Open

Disabl

DIAL.ENABLE..

CUTOFF.DIAL.ENBL

BACKALM.DIAL.ENBL

TXFAIL.DIAL.ENBL

BBATLOW.DIAL.ENBL

FPERRALM.DIAL.ENBL

SELFALM.DIAL.ENBL

DPALM.DIAL.ENBL

SPALM.DIAL.ENBL

TEMPALM.DIAL.ENBL

RATEALM.DIAL.ENBL

BATTALM.DIAL.ENBL

AUXALM.DIAL.ENBL

CHRGALM.DIAL.ENBL

NOMALM.DIAL.ENBL

DISCALM.DIAL.ENBL

ALRMDISP.ENA.CFG

NOMIN.ENA.CFG

NOMPROG.ACTIVE.CALC

NOMUNIT.SELECT.CFG

NOMMODE.SELECT.CFG

NOMSTOP.SELECT.CFG

NOMDAILY.SELECT.CFG

Logical Alarm Signals

On

On

On

On

On

On

Clear

Clear

Clear

OK

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

DPCUTALM..

BACKFLOW..

AGA8ERR..

COMPCHK.FAIL..

TXMITTER.FAIL..

BBAT.LOW..

FPERR..

SELFCHK.FAIL..

DI1.STATE.IN.

DI2.STATE.IN.

DI3.STATE.IN.

DI4.STATE.IN.

DI5.STATE.IN.

DI6.STATE.IN.

TeleFlow™

TeleFlow Version

Calc Interval

Orifice Diameter

Pipe Diameter

Temp Ref Orifice

Temp Ref Pipe

Specific Gravity

Heating Value

Low DP Cutoff

Atmospheric Pres

Pressure Base

Temperature Base

Flwing Viscosity

Spec Heat Ratio

Live Diff Press

Live Static Pres

Live Temperature

Absolute Press

Absolute Temp

Flow Orif Diam

Flow Pipe Diam

Beta Ratio

Ev

Cd

Zs (@14.73, 60)

Zb (@Pb, Tb)

Zf (@Pf, Tf)

Y-Expansion Fctr

Fpb Factor

Ftb Factor

Fg Factor

Ftf Factor

TeleFlow™

Signal Description

Discrete In #7

Discrete In #8

Discrete In #9

Discrete In #10

Batt. Overcharge

Nom Alarm Reached

Logical Alarms Signals (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

On

On

On

On

Clear

Clear

DI7.STATE.IN.

DI8.STATE.IN.

DI9.STATE.IN.

DI10.STATE.IN.

BATTERY.OVRCHG..

NOMALM..

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.6

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.0 Psig

0.0 Deg. F

0.0 Psia

0.0 Deg. R

2.0 Inches

4.026 Inches

0.5

Analog Signals

0.0

60 Secs

2.0 Inches

4.026Inches

68.0 Deg. F

68.0 Deg. F

0.6

1000.0 BTU/CF

14.73 Psia

14.73 Psia

60.0 Deg. F

0.0000069 Lb/FTS

1.3

PROGREV..

CALCINT..CFG

ORIF.DIAM.CFG

PIPE.DIAM.CFG

ORIFT.REFTMP.CFG

PIPET.REFTMP.CFG

GRAVITY.VAL.CFG

HTVAL.VAL.CFG

DPCUTOFF.VAL.CFG

ATMOS..CFG

PRESBASE..CFG

TEMPBASE..CFG

VISC..CFG

K..CFG

DIFFPRES.VAL.LIVE

STATPRES.VAL.LIVE

FTEMP.VAL.LIVE

ABSPRES..FLW

ABSTEMP..FLW

ORIFCORR.FDIAM.CALC

PIPECORR.FDIAM.CALC

BETA..CALC

EV.FACTOR.CALC

CD.FACTOR.CALC

ZS.FACTOR.CALC

ZB.FACTOR.CALC

ZF.FACTOR.CALC

Y.FACTOR.CALC

FPB.FACTOR.CALC

FTB.FACTOR.CALC

FG.FACTOR.CALC

FTF.FACTOR.CALC

Page C-13

Signal Description

Fa Factor

Fr Factor

Fb Factor

C prime Factor

Fpv Fctor (NX19)

Flow Rate @ Std

Daily Flow Rate

Energy Flow Rate

Flow Extension

Flow Time

Current Volume

Current Energy

Flow Time Today

Today's Volume

Today's Energy

Flow Time Yesday

Yesdays Volume

Yesdays Energy

Monthly Volume

Monthly Energy

Prev Month Vol

Prev Month Enrgy

Volume Totalizer

Energy Totalizer

Rate Hi-Hi Limit

Rate Hi Limit

Rate Lo Limit

Rate Lo-Lo Limit

Rate Hi Deadband

Rate Lo Deadband

Methane Content

Nitrogen Content

CO2 Content

Ethane Content

Propane Content

H2O Content

H2S Content

Hydrogen Content

CO Content

Oxygen Content

I-Butane Content

Page C-14

Analog Signals (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

1.0

1.0

0.0

0.0

1.0

0.0 MSCFH

0.0 MFCFD

0.0 MMBTUH

0.0

0.0 Mins

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MMBTU

0.0 Mins

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MMBTU

0.0 Mins

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MMBTU

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MMBTU

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MMBTU

0.0 MSCF

0.0 MMBTU

5000 MSCFH

3000 MSCFH

0.0 MSCFH

0.0 MSCFH

50 MSCFH

50 MSCFH

89.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

8.0 Mole %

3.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

FA.FACTOR.CALC

FR.FACTOR.CALC

FB.FACTOR.CALC

CPRIME.FACTOR.CALC

FPV.FACTOR.CALC

SFLWRATE..CALC

DFLWRATE..CALC

ENGYRATE..CALC

EXT.CURR.CALC

FLOWTIME.CURR.CALC

VOLUME.CURR.CALC

ENERGY.CURR.CALC

FLWTMTDY.TODAY.CALC

VOLTDY.TODAY.CALC

ENGYTDY.TODAY.CALC

FLWTMYDY.YESDAY.CALC

VOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC

ENGYYDY.YESDAY.CALC

VOLMON.MONTH.CALC

ENGYMON.MONTH.CALC

LVOLMON.MONTH.CALC

LENGYMON.MONTH.CALC

VOLTOT.ACCUM.CALC

ENGYTOT.ACCUM.CALC

RATEHIHI..HHAL

RATEHI..HAL

RATELO..LAL

RATELOLO..LLAL

RATEHIDB..HIDB

RATELODB..LODB

CH4.CNTENT.CFG

N2.CNTENT.CFG

CO2.CNTENT.CFG

C2.CNTENT.CFG

C3.CNTENT.CFG

H2O.CNTENT.CFG

H2S.CNTENT.CFG

H2.CNTENT.CFG

CO.CNTENT.CFG

O2.CNTENT.CFG

IC4.CNTENT.CFG

TeleFlow™

Signal Description

N-Butane Content

I-Pentan Content

N-Pentan Content

Hexane Content

Heptane Content

Octane Content

Nonane Content

Decane Content

Helium Content

Argon Content

B-2nd Virial

C-3rd Virial

Flow Setpoint

Max Op Pressure

Min Op Pressure

Flow Deadband

Ke - Prop Gain

Ti - Integral Tm

Td - Deriv Time

Maximum Flw Rate

Valve Travel Tim

Sampler Volume

Pulse Width

Contract Hour

Local Baud Rate

Netwrk Baud Rate

RTS Txmit delay

Power Input #1

Power Input #2

Backup Battery

PC Board Temp

Aux Analog Zero

Aux Analog Full

Aux Hi-Hi Limit

Aux Hi Limit

Aux Lo Limit

Aux L0-L0 Limit

Aux High Deadband

Aux Low Deadband

DP Low Scale

DP Full Scale

TeleFlow™

Analog Signals (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0 Mole %

0.0

0.0

0.0 MSCFH

0.0 Psig

0.0 Psig

1.0 % stpt

1.0

2.0 Secs

0.0 Secs

5000 MSCFH

30 Secs

100.0 MSCF

1.0 Secs

7.0

19200 bps

9600 bps

0.0 msec

0.0 Volts

0.0 Volts

0.0 Volts

0.0 Deg. F

0.0

100.0

150.0

100.0

10.0

0.0

10.0

3.0

0.0 In H2O

300.0 In H2O

NC4.CNTENT.CFG

IC5.CNTENT.CFG

NC5.CNTENT.CFG

C6.CNTENT.CFG

C7.CNTENT.CFG

C8.CNTENT.CFG

C9.CNTENT.CFG

C10.CNTENT.CFG

HE.CNTENT.CFG

AR.CNTENT.CFG

AGA8B.COEFF.CALC

AGA8C.COEFF.CALC

SETPNT..CFG

MAXOP.OVRD.CFG

MINOP.OVRD.CFG

DEADBND..CFG

GAIN..CFG

INTEGRAL..CFG

DERIV..CFG

MAXRATE..CFG

VALVE.TIME.CFG

SAMPVOL..CFG

SAMPDUR..CFG

CONTRACT.HOUR.CFG

LOCBAUD..CFG

NETBAUD..CFG

RTSDEL..CFG

PWRSRC1..INP

PWRSRC2..INP

BBATVLT..INP

BRDTMP..INP

FIZERO.ZSCALE.CFG

FIFULL.HSCALE.CFG

FIHIHI..HHAL

FIHI..HAL

FILO..LAL

FILOLO..LLAL

FIHIDB..HIDB

FILODB..LODB

DPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG

DPFULL.HSCALE.CFG

Page C-15

Signal Description

DP Hi-Hi Limit

DP Hi Limit

DP Lo Limit

DP Lo-Lo Limit

DP High Deadband

DP Low Deadband

Press Low Scale

Press Full Scale

Pres Hi-Hi Limit

Pres Hi Limit

Pres Lo Limit

Pres Lo-Lo Limit

Pres Hi Deadband

Pres Lo Deadband

Temp Low Scale

Temp High Scale

Temp Hi-Hi Limit

Temp Hi Limit

Temp Lo Limit

Temp Lo-Lo Limit

Temp Hi Deadband

Temp Lo Deadband

Batt Hi-Hi Limit

Batt Hi Limit

Batt Lo Limit

Batt Lo-Lo Limit

Batt Hi Deadband

Batt Lo Deadband

Total Pulses

Pulse Frequency

Pulse Scale Fctr

Scaled Frequency

Scaled Pulses

Scaled Pulse Tdy

Scaled Pulse Ysy

Total Scaled Pulses

Signon Flag

Meter Number

Reg. Active Time

Reg. Limit @ 77 F

Temp. Coefficient

Page C-16

Analog Signals Continued

Default

Value

Signal Name

300.0 In H2O

250.0 In H2O

10.0 In H2O

0.0 In H2O

10.0 In H2O

3.0 In H2O

0.0 Psig

2000.0 Psig

2000 Psig

1500 Psig

100 Psig

0.0 Psig

50 Psig

10 Psig

0.0 Deg. F

300.0 Deg. F

250.0 Deg. F

150.0 Deg. F

50.0 Deg. F

32.0 Deg. F

10.0 Deg. F

3.0 Deg. F

16.0 Volts

14.0 Volts

6.0 Volts

5.5 Volts

0.5 Volts

0.5 Volts

0.0

0.0 Hz

1.1 PPU

0.0 /hr

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

30.0 Secs

14.4 Volts

20.0 mv/Deg.

DPHIHI..HHAL

DPHI..HAL

DPLO..LAL

DPLOLO..LLAL

DPHIDB..HIDB

DPLODB..LODB

SPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG

SPFULL.FSCALE.CFG

SPHIHI..HHAL

SPHI..HAL

SPLO..LAL

SPLOLO..LLAL

SPHIDB..HIDB

SPLODB..LODB

TEMPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG

TEMPFULL.FSCALE.CFG

TEMPHIHI..HHAL

TEMPHI..HAL

TEMPLO..LAL

TEMPLOLO..LLAL

TEMPHIDB..HIDB

TEMPLODB..LODB

BATTHIHI..HHAL

BATTHI..HAL

BATTLO..LAL

BATTLOLO..LLAL

BATTHIDB..HIDB

BATTLODB..LODB

PULSES..INP

FREQ..INP

SCALE.FACTOR.CFG

SFREQ..CALC

SPULSE.CURR.CALC

SPULSTDY.TODAY.CALC

SPULSYDY.YESDAT.CALC

SPULSTDT.ACCUM.CALC

SIGNON..

METERNUM..CFG

REGDLAY..CFG

REGVOLT..CFG

TEMPCOEF..CFG

TeleFlow™

Signal Description

Backflow delay

Bkflw Time Today

Bkflw Time Ysday

Radio ON Minute

Radio ON Second

Listen Duration

Comm Timeout

Start Poll Hour

Stop Poll Hour

Local Comm Time

Local Timeout

Time per Node

Time per Group

Time Past Hour

Listen Interval

Radio on Time

Demand Poll Strt

Demand Poll End

Maximum Dialouts

Last start date

Last start hour

Last stop date

Last stop hour

Last Target Amt

Amount Delivered

Percent Delivered

Nom start date

Nom start hour

Nom stop date

Nom stop hour

Target Amount

Amount Delivered

Percent Delivered

Alarm Percentage

Percent Elapsed

Next start date

Next start hour

Next stop date

Next stop hour

Next Target Amt

Expn AI#1 Low

TeleFlow™

Analog Signals Continued

Default

Value

Signal Name

0.0

0.0 %

100.0 %

0.0 %

0.0

7.0

0.0

7.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

300.0 msec

0.0

24.0

2.0 /hour

10.0 Secs

0.0 Mins

0.0 Mins

0.0 Mins

0.0 Mins

120.0 Secs

20.0 Secs

0.0 Secs

24.0 Secs

120.0 Secs

20.0 Secs

26.0 Secs

5.0 Secs

60.0 Secs

1.0 Secs

BKFLOW.DELAY.CFG

BKFLOW.TODAY.CFG

BKFLOW.YESDAY.CFG

HOUR.MIN.

HOUR.SEC.

RADIO.TIME.SP

RADIO.TIMOUT.SP

RADIO.START.HOUR

RADIO.END.HOUR

LOCAL.TIME.SP

LOCAL.TIMOUT.SP

NODE.POLL.TIME

GROUP.POLL.TIME

OFFSET.POLL.TIME

DEMAND.INTVL.TIME

DEMAND.LISTEN.TIME

DEMAND.START.HOUR

DEMAND.END.HOUR

MAXDIAL.PER.HOUR

LAST.START.DATE

LAST.START.HOUR

LAST.STOP.DATE

LAST.STOP.HOUR

LAST.TARGET..

LAST.ACTUAL..

LAST.NOMIN.PCT

CURRENT.START.DATE

CURRENT.START.HOUR

CURRENT.STOP.DATE

CURRENT.STOP.HOUR

CURRENT.TARGET..

CURRENT.ACTUAL..

CURRENT.NOMIN.PCT

CURRENT.ALARM.PCT

CURRENT.TIME.PCT

NEXT.START.DATE

NEXT.START.HOUR

NEXT.STOP.DATE

NEXT.STOP.HOUR

NEXT.TARGET..

EXPA2D1.ZSCALE.CFG

Page C-17

Signal Description

Expn AI#1 High

AI#1 Hi-Hi Limit

AI#1 Hi Limit

AI#1 Lo Limit

AI#1 Lo-Lo Limit

AI#1 Hi Deadband

AI#1 Lo Deadband

Expn AI#2 Low

Expn AI#2 High

AI#2 Hi-Hi Limit

AI#2 Hi Limit

AI#2 Lo Limit

AI#2 Lo-Lo Limit

AI#2 Hi Deadband

AI#2 Lo Deadband

Analog Out Low

Analog Out High

Analog Output

Expn Tot Pulses

Expn Pulse Freq

Expn Pulse Scale

Expn Scaled Freq

Expn Scaled Pls

Expn S Pulse Tdy

Expn S Pulse Ysy

Expn Tot S Pulse

Diff Pressure

Flowing Pressure

Flowing Temp

Flow Rate

System Power

Auxiliary Input

Expn AI #1

Expn AI #2

Load Date

Page C-18

Analog Signals Continued

Default

Value

Signal Name

0.0

100.0

0.0

0.0

0.0 Hz

1.0 PPU

0.0 /hr

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

100.0

110.0

100.0

0.0

0.0

2.0

2.0

0.0

100.0

110.0

100.0

0.0

0.0

2.0

2.0

EXPA2D1.HSCALE.CFG

A2D1HIHI..HHAL

A2D1HI..HAL

A2D1LO..LAL

A2D1LOLO..LLAL

A2D1HIDB..HIDB

A2D1LODB..LODB

EXPA2D2.ZSCALE.CFG

EXPA2D2.HSCALE.CFG

A2D2HIHI..HHAL

A2D2HI..HAL

A2D2LO..LAL

A2D2LOLO..LLAL

A2D2HIDB..HIDB

A2D2LODB..LODB

EXPD2A.ZSCALE.CFG

EXPD2A.HSCALE.CFG

EXPD2A.VAL.OUT

EXPPLS..INP

EXPFREQ..INP

EXPSCALE.FACTOR.CFG

EXPSFREQ..CALC

EXPSPLS.CURR.CALC

EXPSPTDY.TODAY.CALC

EXPSPYDY.YESDAY.CALC

EXPSPTOT.ACCUM.CALC

0.0 Psig

0.0 Deg. F

0.0 MSCFH

0.0 Volts

0.0

0.0

0.0

Analog Alarm Signals

DIFFPRES.VAL.INP

STATPRES.VAL.INP

FTEMP.VAL.INP

FLOWRATE..CALC

BATTERY.VOLTS.INP

AUXINP..INP

EXPINP1..INP

EXPINP2..INP

String Signals

MM/DD/YY HHMM #LOAD..

TeleFlow™

Signal Description

Unit ID

Meter ID

System Password

Password #2

Password #3

Password #4

Password #5

Password #6

Password #7

Password #8

Password #9

Password #10

Password #11

Password #12

Password #13

Password #14

Password #15

Password #16

Modem init Strng

Primary.Dialout#

Alternate Phone#

String Signals (Continued)

Default

Value

Signal Name

9999

Unnamed Meter

SYSTEM 6666666

BBI 4 4

(see * below)

* = ATE0S7=30 S11=55 S0=1 VIX0&C1

UNITID..CFG

METERID..CFG

PW.1..

PW.2..

PW.3..

PW.4..

PW.5..

PW.6..

PW.7..

PW.8..

PW.9..

PW.10..

PW.11..

PW.12..

PW.13..

PW.14..

PW.15..

PW.16..

MODEM.INIT.STR

DIAL1.NUMBER..

DIAL2.NUMBER..

Default Archive Content

Archive 1 - Daily

Date

Local Seq#

Global Seq#

Volume MSCF

Average Extension

Flow Time

Average Dp

Average Pf

Average Tf

Energy MMBTU

Average Aux Input

TeleFlow™ Page C-19

Archive 2 - Hourly

Date

Local Seq#

Global Seq#

Volume MSCF

Average Extension

Flow Time

Average Dp

Average Pf

Average Tf

Energy MMBTU

Average Aux Input

Archive 3 - 15 Minute

Date

Local Seq#

Global Seq#

Instantaneous Dp

Instantaneous Pf

Instantaneous Tf

Default Archive Content (Continued)

Page C-20 TeleFlow™

Instruction Manual

CI-3530-10B

May, 2006

TeleFlow Model 3530-10B

RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE for MDS

Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios

Appendix D

www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

BLANK PAGE

Appendix D

RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE

For MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

1.2 LEDs ................................................................................................................................... 1

Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE

3.1

3.1.1

3.1.2

3.1.3

3.2

3.2.1

3.2.2

3.2.3

3.3

3.3.1

3.3.2

3.3.3

3.4

2.1.1 Radio

2.2

WIRING LISTS.................................................................................................................... 4

Section 3- SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................ 5

Model 4710 General Specs ................................................................................................ 5

Model 9710 General Specs. ............................................................................................... 5

Model 9810 General Specs. ............................................................................................... 6

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................... 6

Model 4710 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 6

Model 9710 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 7

Model 9810 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 7

RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................... 8

Model 4710 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 8

Model 9710 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 8

Model 9810 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 9

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 9

REFERENCED OEM MANUALS

MDS 4710A – Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide –

MDS Doc. 05-3305A01, Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 4710A

MDS 4710B – Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,

Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 4710B

MDS 9810 – Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 9810/24810 900 MHz/2.4GHz Spread Spectrum Transceivers Installation and Operation Guide –

MDS Doc. 05-3301A01, Rev. B, April 2000 (PDF = 3301B-x810.pdf) for model MDS 9810

MDS 9710A Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver – MDS Doc. 05-3305A01,

Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (Installation & Operation) (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 9710A

CI-3530-10B Appendix D Page 0-1 Table Of Contents

Appendix D

RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE

For MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios

TABLE OF CONTENTS

REFERENCED OEM MANUALS (Continued)

MDS 9710B Data Transceiver (Radio)

MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,

Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 9710B

CI-3530-10B Appendix D Page 0-2 Table Of Contents

Appendix D

RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE for MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

Each TeleFlow may be ordered with a MDS Radio Installed, i.e., "Radio Equipped," or as a "Radio

Ready" unit. Radio Ready units contain all hardware required to field install a Bristol provided MDS Radio except the radio, antenna and external antenna cable. Radio Ready units can be ordered with or without an optional Polyphaser (Lightning/Impulse Suppresser). (see Figures 1, 2 & 3)

Each Bristol supplied MDS Data Transceiver (Radio) Option mounts inside the TeleFlow Enclosure and is secured to the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket by four screws. The Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket is secured to the Battery Mounting Bracket by four screws.

TeleFlows equipped with the MDS Radio Option utilize the following additional hardware:

1.

MDS Radio Transceiver (Choice of seven models):

Model 4710 (9600 Baud/330-512 MHz)

Model 9710 (9600 Baud/800-960 MHz)

Model 9810 (900MHz -Spread Spectrum)

2.

MDS Radio Mounting Plate(s) (secured to rear of MDS radio via four (4) screws) - Secures Radio to

Battery Mounting Bracket via four (4) screws (see Figure 1 - mounting holes are indicated by four (4)

“Bs.”

3.

Radio/Teleflow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) - 25-Pin D-Type Plug P1 connects to radio and 8 open-ended wires connect to CPU Board Connectors P5 ,P13 & P14 (see Table 2).

4.

2-Wire Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7) - Plugs into the Radio Power Connector and wired to P6 of

TeleFlow). (see Table 1)

5.

Internal Coaxial Antenna Cable or Polyphaser and Polyphaser Cable.

6.

12V Battery Mounting Bracket (for Radio Option) with 12V Battery.

1.2 LEDs

MDS Radio model 9810 is supplied with six (6) LEDs that function as follows:

TR - Terminal Ready RTS (Request To Send) has been received by the internal modem from the TeleFlow.

MR - Modem Ready

CD - Carrier Detect

TD - Transmit Data

CTS (Clear To Send) time has elapsed and the radio is ready to transmit data from the TeleFlow.

The radio senses an RF signal from the master station.

Reflects the current state of the TXD line from the

TeleFlow. LED ON = 0 Bit, LED OFF = 1 Bit.

IN - Radio Inhibited/Disabled A ground on Pin 12 of the INTERFACE connector disables all

RD - Receive Data radio functions. This LED is dimly lit when Pin 12 of the

INTERFACE connector is grounded and power is applied to the radio.

Reflects the current state of the Receive Data line from the transceiver's internal modem. LED ON = 0 Bit, LED OFF =

1 Bit.

CI-3530-10B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 1

MDS Radios models 4710 & 9710 are supplied with four (4) LEDs that function as follows: detected. error.

Off = No power applied to radio or radio is in sleep mode.

Continuous = Radio is receiving a data signal from a continuously keyed radio.

TXD - Transmit Data A mark signal is being received at the Data Interface.

RXD - Receive Data A mark signal is being sent out from the Data Interface.

Page 2

Figure 1 - TeleFlow with Radio Option

Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-10B

Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE

2.1 RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION

DANGER

MDS Radio models 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 provided by Bristol Inc. are approved for use in Class I, Groups C & D, Division 2, Hazardous Locations. The installer must be familiar with hazardous location installation guidelines before installation or maintenance is undertaken. Do not begin radio installation or service to the TeleFlow unless the area is known to be non-hazardous. Refer to the appropriate appendix of the MDS Installation, Operation & Field Maintenance

Manual applicable to the radio in question, for approved conditions under which the MDS radio can be installed in hazardous locations.

AVOID OPERATING EQUIPMENT DURING AN ELECTRICAL STORM. THE IM-

PULSE SUPPRESSOR MAY SAVE EQUIPMENT FROM DANGER, BUT SHOULD

NOT BE CONSIDERED AS BEING SAFE FOR PERSONNEL.

Figure 2 - Bottom View of MDS Radios

2.1.1 Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure

To remove the Radio Transceiver follow steps 1 through 5 below. To replace the Radio

Transceiver follow steps 2 through 5 below in reverse order, installing rather than removing the item in question and then perform step 6.

1. Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.

CI-3530-10B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 3

2.

Disconnect power from the radio by removing the two-wire power plug from the bottom of the radio.

3.

Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) from the bottom of the Radio.

4.

Unscrew the Antenna Lead from the bottom of the radio.

5.

Unscrew the four (4) screws that secure the radio (via the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket) to the Battery Mounting Bracket (Location B Figure 1).

6. Remove the MDS radio

7. Close and secure the Door.

2.2 WIRING LISTS

Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7)

RADIO

Pwr. Conn.

COLOR

TeleFlow CPU

SIGNAL

+ RED 1

- BLK 2

16.5 V Max

13.8 V Typ.

GND

Table 1 - Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7) Wire List

NOTE

Plug the Cable Connector (which has the Locking Clip removed) into the Radio (only).

Plug the Cable Connector (which has the Locking Clip) into the TeleFlow.

Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3)

CPU Pin #

CPU Board

Sig. Name

Radio D-Conn. #

& Wire Color

Radio D-Conn.

Signal Name

Function

Ground

J13-2

J13-4

J13-5

J13-6

J13-7

RDCD

RCTS

RRTS

RRXD

RTXD

8 (Green)

5 (Brown)

4 (Blue)

3 (White)

2 (Red)

DCD (Out)

CTS (Out)

RTS (In)

RXD (Out)

TXD (In)

J14-8 AI 21 RSSI

Data Carrier Detect Input

Clear To Send Input

Request To Send Output

Receive Data Input

Transmit Data Output

Receive Signal Strength

Indicator/Analog Input

Table 2 - TeleFlow/Radio Interface Cable (392733-01-3) Wire List

Page 4 Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-10B

Figure 3 - Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable 392733-01-3

Note:

The red RSSI conductor (Receive Strength Signal Indicator) can be used to monitor the receiver's signal strength when a volt meter is placed across RRSI (Orange) and Ground (CPU Connector J13-1).

Section 3 - SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.1.1 Model 4710 General Specs.

Frequency Band:

Frequency Increments:

Frequency Stability:

380-512 MHz

6.25 kHz or 5 kHz (factory configurable)

1.5 PPM, -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F)

Primary Power:

Voltage: 13.8 Vdc nominal

(10.5 - 16 Vdc Operating Range)

1.8 A nominal, 2.5 A maximum TX Supply Current:

RX Supply Current:

Reverse Polarity Protection:

3.1.2 Model 9710 General Specs.

Frequency Band:

Frequency Increments:

150 mA (< 16 mA in Sleep Mode)

Diode across primary input

800-960 MHz

6.25 kHz or 5 kHz (factory configurable)

CI-3530-10B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 5

Frequency Stability:

Primary Power:

Voltage:

TX Supply Current:

RX Supply Current:

Reverse Polarity Protection:

3.1.3 Model 9810 General Specs.

Frequency Band:

Frequency Hopping Range:

Frequency Stability:

Primary Power:

Voltage:

TX Supply Current:

RX Supply Current:

Standby Current (Sleep Mode):

Reverse Polarity Protection:

3.2 TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS

3.2.1 Model 4710 Transmitter Specs.

Frequency Range:

Power Output:

Duty Cycle:

Output Impedance:

1.5 PPM, -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F)

13.8 Vdc nominal

(10.5- 16 Vdc Operating Range)

1.8 A nominal, 2.5 A maximum

150 mA (< 16 mA in Sleep Mode)

Diode across primary input

902-928 MHz part 15 Spread Spectrum

Band

8 selectable zones each containing 128 frequencies for a total of 1019 frequencies

±

0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F) For all Models

13.8 Vdc nominal

(10.5- 26.0 Vdc Operating Range)

<400 mA

<125 mA

<30 mA

Diode across primary input

380-512 MHz, Programmable in 6.25 kHz or 5 kHz increments (factory configurable) to any channel pair in radio operating subband.

5 Watts/+37 dBm (maximum) at the

Antenna Connector

Continuous

50 Ohms

Page 6 Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-10B

Frequency Stability:

RF Channel Bandwidth:

Spurious & Harmonic Emissions:

Response Time:

Time-out Timer:

3.2.2 Model 9710 Transmitter Specs.

Frequency Range:

1.5 PPM, -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F)

12.5 kHz

-65 dBc

5 ms

Internal; programmable from 1-255 seconds in 1-second increments

Power Output:

Duty Cycle:

Output Impedance:

Frequency Stability:

RF Channel Bandwidth:

Spurious & Harmonic Emissions:

Response Time:

Time-out Timer:

3.2.3 Model 9810 Transmitter Specs.

Frequency Band:

Power Output:

Duty Cycle:

Output Impedance:

Frequency Stability:

Spurious Emissions:

CI-3530-10B

800-960 MHz, Programmable in 6.25 kHz or 5 kHz increments (factory configurable) to any channel pair in radio operating subband.

5 Watts/+37 dBm (maximum) at the

Antenna Connector

Continuous

50 Ohms

1.5 PPM, -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F)

12.5 kHz

-65 dBc

5 ms

Internal; programmable from 1-255 seconds in 1-second increments

902-928 MHz Part 15 Spread Spectrum

Band.

.1 to 1 Watt (20-30 dBm ± 1dB)

Continuous

50 Ohms

±

0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F) For all Models

-60 dBc

Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 7

Harmonic Emissions:

Transmitter Keying:

3.3 RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS

3.3.1 Model 4710 Receiver Specs.

Frequency Range:

-80 dBc

Data activated

380-512 MHz Programmable in 6.25 kHz increments to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.

Frequency Stability:

Intermodulation:

IF Selectivity:

Desensitization:

Spurious and Image Rejection:

RF Channel Bandwidth:

Sensitivity:

Squelch Opening Time:

3.3.2 Model 9710 Receiver Specs.

Frequency Range:

1.5 PPM, -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F)

75 dB minimum (EIA)

65 dB minimum at adjacent Channel

65 dB minimum on 12.5 kHz Channel

85 dB minimum

12.5 kHz

12 dB SINAD at -110 dBm

2 ms

800-960 MHz Programmable in 6.25 kHz increments to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.

Frequency Stability:

Intermodulation:

IF Selectivity:

Desensitization:

Spurious and Image Rejection:

RF Channel Bandwidth:

Sensitivity:

Squelch Opening Time:

Page 8

1.5 PPM, -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F)

75 dB minimum (EIA)

65 dB minimum at adjacent Channel

65 dB minimum on 12.5 kHz Channel

85 dB minimum

12.5 kHz

12 dB SINAD at -110 dBm

2 ms

Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-10B

3.3.3 Model 9810 Receiver Specs.

Frequency Band: 902-928 MHz Part 15 Spread Spectrum Band.

Frequency Stability:

Intermodulation:

Desensitization:

Spurious and Image Rejection:

Bit Error Rate:

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.4.1 MDS Models 4710, 9710 & 9810

Temperature Range:

Humidity:

±0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F) For all Models

75 dB minimum (EIA)

65 dB minimum (EIA) on 12.5 kHz Channels

70 dB minimum

Less than 10

-6

at -110 dBm

Full Performance -30

°

C to +60

°

C,

(-22

°

F to +140

°

F)

95% at +40

°

C (104

°

F)

CI-3530-10B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 9

BLANK PAGE

Appendix E

FreeWave RADIO OPTION

For Instruction Manuals

CI-3530-10B

Issue: 04/2002

FREE

W AVE

Model Number: DGRO9RFS

RS232

6V

Serial Number: XXX-XXXX

FCC ID: KNY-205-108213

Canada: 2329 102 336A

FreeWavw Technologies, Inc.

Boulder, CO 80301. This device complies with

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received, including interferences that may cause undesired operation.

1

Bristol Babcock

Appendix E

FreeWave RADIO OPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE #

1.1

1.2

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

GENERAL INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1

LEDs................................................................................................................................... 1

Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE

2.1 RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION ............................................ 4

2.1.1

2.1.2

2.2

2.3

Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure .......................................................................... 4

Radio Installation Procedure ............................................................................................ 5

WIRING LISTS.................................................................................................................. 9

ADDITIONAL FreeWave INFORMATION ..................................................................... 9

Section 3- SPECIFICATIONS

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 10

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 10

RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 11

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................... 11

Reference Document

FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual

FreeWave Technologies, Inc.

1880 South Flatiron Court

Boulder, CO 80301

CI-3530-10B Appendix E Page 0-1 Table Of Contents

Section 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

The TeleFlow J may be ordered with a FreeWave Radio installed, i.e., "Radio Equipped," or the FreeWave Radio may be “ field installed." TeleFlow units contain all hardware required to field install a BBI provided FreeWave Radio except the radio (with Radio/Mounting

Plate), signal cable, four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws, the antenna and the external antenna cable. The FreeWave Radio option can be used with or without an optional

Polyphaser (Lightning/Impulse Suppresser) (see Figures 1 through 6).

The BBI supplied FreeWave Radio is mounted to the Radio Mounting Plate via four (4) 4-

40 UNC-2A x 1/4 Pan Head Screws. The Radio Mounting Plate (with Radio Option) mounts inside the TeleFlow J Enclosure and is secured to the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate

(Battery Cover) via (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws. The Radio/Modem Mounting Plate is secured to the Battery Mounting Bracket by four screws.

TeleFlows equipped with the FreeWave Radio Option utilize the following additional hardware:

1. FreeWave Wireless Data Transceiver

2. Radio Mounting Plate (secured to rear of the radio via four (4) screws) - Secures Radio to Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) via four (4) screws (see Figures 2 & 3).

Mounting holes for Radio to Radio Mounting Plate are indicated by four (4) ‘ Cs.

’

Mounting holes for Radio Mounting Plate to Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery

Cover) are indicated by four (4) ‘ Bs.

’

3. Radio/Teleflow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) - 10-Pin Jack Connector (MTA-100) connects to the radio while the eight (8) open-ended wires (see Table 4) are connected to

CPU Board Connectors J6/P6 (Power) and J13/P13 (Network).

4.

Internal Coaxial Antenna Cable or Polyphaser and Polyphaser Cable.

5.

Four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws - secures radio to Radio Mounting Plate.

6.

Four (4) No. 4 washers (Internal Tooth Lock) - used with item 5 above.

.

7.

Four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws - secures Radio Mounting Plate to Radio/Modem

Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) (Location B - Figures 2 & 3)

1.2 LEDs

The FreeWave Radio is supplied with three (3) visible LEDs that provide important information on the operation of the transceiver. Compare the status of radio’s LEDs with

Tables 1 and 2 to aid you in the troubleshooting process.

CD - Carrier Detect LED

TX Transmit LED

CTS - Clear To Send LED

CI-3530-10B Appendix E Page 1 FreeWave Radio Option

Table 1 - LED Status in Point to Point Communications

Condition

Power Disconnected

Connected, no repeater, sending sparse data

Master calling slave through repeater

Master connected to

Repeater, not to slave

Repeater connected to slave

Mode 6, disconnected

Setup Mode

Master Slave Repeater

CD TX CTS CD TX CTS CD TX CTS

SR SR SR SR O BR SR O BR

SG IF IF SG IF IF

SR SD

FO SD

SG

SR

IF

O

SG SG

SR

SR

IF

BR

SG

SR

SR

SG

SR

SG

O

O

IF

O

SG

BR

BR

IF

SG

SR

SR

SG

SG

O

SD

IF

SG

BR

SR

IF

SG

Table 1 & Table 2 Legend:

BR

FO

IF

O

SD

SG

SR

Blinking Red

Flashing Orange

Intermittent Flash Red

Off

Solid Red, Dim

Solid Green

Solid Red, Bright

Table 2 - LED Status in Multipoint Communications

Condition

Power Disconnected

Repeater & slave connected to master, no data

Repeater & slave connected to master, master sending data to slave

Repeater & slave connected to master, slave sending data to master

Master Slave Repeater

CD TX CTS CD TX CTS CD TX CTS

SR SD O SR O BR SR O BR

SR

SR

SG-

SR

SD

SD

SD

O

O

IF

SG

SG

SG

O

O

IF

SR*

SR*

SR*

SG

SG

SG

SD

SD

SR

SR*

SR*

SR*

* = CTS will be Solid Red with a solid link, as the link weakens the CTS LED on the repeater and slave radios will begin to flash.

FreeWave Radio Option Page 2 CI-3530-10B Appendix E

Figure 1 - FreeWave Radio

Figure 2 - Radio Mounting Plate installation Diagram

CI-3530-10B Appendix E Page 3 FreeWave Radio Option

Section 2

INSTALLATION & SERVICE

2.1 RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION

DANGER

The FreeWave Wireless Data Transceiver (Radio) model DGRO-115 provided by Bristol Babcock is approved for use in Class I, Division 2,

Groups A, B, C & D or non-hazardous locations. The installer must be familiar with hazardous location installation guidelines before installation or maintenance is undertaken. Do not begin radio installation or service to the TeleFlow J unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.

AVOID OPERATING EQUIPMENT DURING AN ELECTRICAL STORM. THE

IMPULSE SUPPRESSOR MAY SAVE EQUIPMENT FROM DANGER, BUT

SHOULD NOT BE CONSIDERED AS BEING SAFE FOR PERSONNEL.

2.1.1 Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure

To remove the Radio follow steps 1 through 6 below. To replace the Radio perform step 6 of section 2.1.2 and then follow steps 2 through 6 below in reverse order, installing rather than removing the item in question and then perform step 7.

1. Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.

2. Disconnect power from the radio by removing the two-wire auxiliary power jack from the TeleFlow CPU Board connector P6.

3. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) from the lower edge of the radio.

4. Unscrew the Antenna Lead from the bottom of the radio.

5. Unscrew the four (4) screws that secure the radio (via the Radio Mounting Plate) to the

Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) (Location B Figure 2).

6. Remove the FreeWave radio (installed on the Radio Mounting Plate).

7. Close and secure the Door.

FreeWave Radio Option Page 4 CI-3530-10B Appendix E

Figure 3 - FreeWave Radio Option Installed in TeleFlow

(without Polyphaser Option)

2.1.2 Radio Installation Procedure

To install the FreeWave Radio Option into a TeleFlow (for the first time) follow steps 1 through 9 below.

CI-3530-10B Appendix E Page 5 FreeWave Radio Option

1.

Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.

2.

Loosen the four screws that secure the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) to the Battery Mounting Bracket (Location A - Figure 3) and remove the Radio/Modem

Mounting Plate.

3. Install the FreeWave radio (mounted on the Radio Mounting Plate) onto the

Radio/Modem Mounting Plate using four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws (see Figures 4

& 2).

Figure 4 - FreeWave Radio Mounted on Radio Mounting Plate

4. Install the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (with radio installed) onto the TeleFlow’s

Batery Mounting Bracket. Secure the screws loosened in step 2 (Location A - Figure 3).

FreeWave Radio Option Page 6 CI-3530-10B Appendix E

5. Install the Radio Cable (396306-01-2) between the radio’s RF connector and the bottom of the TeleFlow enclosure (see Figure 3 & 5) (also see Section 2.3.1 of CI-3530-10B).

Note: If an optional Polyphaser is used install Radio Cable (396306-02-0) between the radio’s RF connector and the top of the Polyphaser (within the enclosure) (see Figure 6). TeleFlow enclosures that support a Polyphaser have is

.625” diameter mounting hole while those that support a radio (without Polyphaser

Option) have a .580” diameter mounting hole.

Figure 5 - Top View - TeleFlow with FreeFlow Radio (without Polyphaser)

Figure 6 - Partial View - TeleFlow with Polyphaser Installed

CI-3530-10B Appendix E Page 7 FreeWave Radio Option

6. Follow the “Tuning Transceiver Performance” section of the FreeWave Technologies,

Inc. FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual to configure the radio.

Note: The setup program is invoked by connecting the radio to any PC equipped with a terminal program (such as Hyperterminal), setting the parameters for that terminal to those of Table 3, and putting the radio into setup mode.

Connection to the PC requires a special RS-232 cable with a 9-pin Female D-

Type connector on the PC side and a 10-pin Female MTA-100 Connector assembly on the radio side. A cable can be constructed as illustrated in Figure

7. The terminal program must be running before invoking the setup program.

The setup program is invoked by shorting MTA-100 Connector pins 4 (GND) and 2 (MENU) together.

Table 3 - Setup Menu Terminal Settings

PARAMETER

Baud Rate

Data Rate

Parity

Stop Bits

Parity Check

Carrier Detect

SETTING

19,200

8

None

1

None/Off

None/Off

Figure 7 - Cable Diagram for Radio to PC Interface

7. Install the TeleFlow Radio Interface Cable (396369-01-4) between Radio Connector J1 and TeleFlow CPU Board Connectors J6 & J13 (see Table 4). Make sure that the cable connector’s red wire aligns with FreeWave Radio connector Pin 1 (see Figures 1 & 3).

8. Connect the Antenna Cable between the remote Antenna and the Radio Cable (or

Polyphaser on the bottom of the TeleFlow.

9. Close and secure the Door.

FreeWave Radio Option Page 8 CI-3530-10B Appendix E

2.2 WIRING LISTS

Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4)

CPU Pin #

J6-1

J6-2

J13-1

J13-2

J13-4

J13-5

J13-6

J13-7

CPU Board

Sig. Name

AUX PWR

GND

GND

RDCD

RCTS

RRTS

RRXD

RTXD

Wire Pin. #

& Color

01 (Red)

04 (Black)

06 (Black)

08 (Green)

10 (Brown)

09 (Blue)

05 (Red)

07 (White)

Note: Pins 2 & 3 are not used.

Radio

Signal Name

B+

GND

GND

DCD (Out)

CTS (Out)

RTS (In)

TXD (Out)

RXD (In)

Function

DC Power (+)

DC Power (-) Ground

Ground

Data Carrier Detect Output

Clear To Send Output

Request To Send Input

Transmit Data Output

Receive Data Input

Table 4 - Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) Wire List

2.3 ADDITIONAL FreeWave INFORMATION

The FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual contains indepth details on modem parameters, operation, installation, tuning transceiver performance, and more. Copies of the FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data

Transceiver User Manual can be obtained from FreeWave Technologies, Inc.

(electronically) by contacting their Technical Support Group.

FreeWave Tech. Support can be reached at 303-444-3862 or 303-786-9948.

Online information about Spread Spectrum Modem (Model DRG09RFS) can be obtained at www.freewave.com or www.freewave.com/ProductInformation/products.htm.

CI-3530-10B Appendix E Page 9 FreeWave Radio Option

Section 3

SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Frequency:

Power Requirements:

Transmit Current:

Receive Cuurrent:

Idle Current:

Operating Modes:

902 - 928 MHz

650 mA at 12V for 1W

600 mA at 8.5V for 400mW

100 mA at 12V

65 mA at 12V

Point-to-Point

Point-to-Multipoint

Peer-to-Peer

Store and Forward Repeater

Data Transmission:

Error Detection:

Data Encryption:

Link Throughput:

Interface:

32 Bit CRC, resend on error

Substitution, dynamic key

115 Kbaud

RS-232, 1200 Baud to 115.2 Kbaud,

Async., full duplex

3.2 TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS

Output Power:

Range:

Modulation:

Occupied Bandwidth:

1W (+30 dBm) at 9.5V to 18.0V

400mW (+25 dBm) at 7.5V to 9.5V

20 Miles - Line of sight distance with unity gain antenna at 900 MHz.

GFSK, 120 kBs - 170 kBs

230 kHz

FreeWave Radio Option Page 10 CI-3530-10B Appendix E

3.3 RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS

Sensitivity:

Selectivity:

-108 dB at 10 -6 raw BER

40 dB at fc ±230kHz

60 dB at fc ±460 kHz

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Temperature Range:

Humidity:

Full Performance -40 ° C to +60 ° C,

(-40 ° F to +140 ° F)

5% to 90% (noncondensing)

CI-3530-10B Appendix E Page 11 FreeWave Radio Option

BLANK PAGE

Appendix F

Using the TeleFlow

TM

Menu System

Issue: 07/2003

Bristol Babcock

Appendix F

Using the TeleFlow™ Menu System

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE #

F.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................F-1

F.2 INSTALLING TMS SOFTWARE..............................................................................................F-1

F.2.1 Communication Connections....................................................................................................F-2

F.2.2 ATOOL.INI Setup File ...............................................................................................................F-4

F.2.3 PC Function Key Usage .............................................................................................................F-6

F.3 TMS PROGRAM STARTUP......................................................................................................F-7

F.4 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP MENUS ..................................................................................F-8

F.4.1 Setting the Baud Rate, Port & Modem Usage Parameters ....................................................F-9

F.5 SIGN-ON MENU......................................................................................................................F-10

F.6 SYSTEM SET-UP.......................................................................................................................F-11

F.7 ON-LINE FUNCTIONS...........................................................................................................F-12

F.8 ORGANIZATION OF THE START-UP MENUS.................................................................F-15

F.8.1 Current Gas Flow Information................................................................................................F-15

F.8.1.1

F.8.1.2

F.8.1.3

F.8.1.4

F.8.1.5

Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings Menu ..............................................................................F-15

Volume, Energy and Flow Time.............................................................................................F-16

Flow Equation Components....................................................................................................F-16

Gas Composition Menu ...........................................................................................................F-16

Plot Trend Data.........................................................................................................................F-17

F.8.2 Log Utilities ...............................................................................................................................F-19

F.8.3 Read/Write Configurable Data ..............................................................................................F-20

F.8.3.1

Live Inputs/Outputs................................................................................................................F-21

F.8.3.2

F.8.3.3

F.8.3.4

F.8.3.5

Configuration Constants Menu ..............................................................................................F-21

Alarm Configuration................................................................................................................F-22

Gas Composition ......................................................................................................................F-24

PID Flow Controller/Sampler Control..................................................................................F-24

Nominations Function ......................................................................................................F-24

Status...................................................................................................................................F-24

ENABLE..............................................................................................................................F-24

SETPOINT ..........................................................................................................................F-25

GAIN...................................................................................................................................F-25

INTEGRAL .........................................................................................................................F-25

DERIVATIVE .....................................................................................................................F-26

DEADBAND ......................................................................................................................F-26

SPAN...................................................................................................................................F-26

VALVE TRAVEL TIME ....................................................................................................F-26

PROCESS LIMITING ........................................................................................................F-26

FLOW RATE ......................................................................................................................F-26

PRESSURE OVERRIDE (SET ONE OR BOTH TO ENABLE OVERRIDE) ................F-26

PRESSURE TAP LOCATION ..........................................................................................F-27

FLOW AT STD...................................................................................................................F-27

SAMPLER FUNCTION ....................................................................................................F-27

SAMPLER VOLUME ........................................................................................................F-27

SAMPLER PULSE WIDTH ..............................................................................................F-27

DP LIVE ..............................................................................................................................F-27

SP LIVE ...............................................................................................................................F-27

CI-3530-10B/20B Appendix F Page 0-1 Table Of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE #

F.8.3.6

TEMP LIVE.........................................................................................................................F-27

RATE/DAY........................................................................................................................F-28

Nominations..............................................................................................................................F-28

Nominations Operation....................................................................................................F-29

Enabling the Nomination Function.................................................................................F-29

Beginning a Nomination Period ......................................................................................F-31

Ending a Nomination Period ...........................................................................................F-32

Changing the Nomination Target ...................................................................................F-32

F.8.3.7

Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period.........................................................F-32

Read/Write Configuration......................................................................................................F-33

F.8.4 Transmitter Calibration/Verification ....................................................................................F-33

F.8.4.1

F.8.4.2

Verification ................................................................................................................................F-33

Calibration Procedures ............................................................................................................F-34

Calibration of Differential Pressure ................................................................................F-34

Calibration of Static Pressure...........................................................................................F-35

Calibration RTD Temperature .........................................................................................F-36

F.8.4.3

Damping And Mode Control..................................................................................................F-37

F.8.5 Radio Communications Set-up Menu....................................................................................F-37

ENABLE..............................................................................................................................F-37

REMAIN ACTIVE FOR ....................................................................................................F-38

TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER...................................................................................F-38

START OFFSET MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS .........................................F-38

POLL ENABLE START HOUR & POLL ENABLE END HOUR ................................F-38

START OFFSET INTO HOUR .........................................................................................F-39

POLL TIME PER NODE ...................................................................................................F-39

POLL TIME PER GROUP.................................................................................................F-39

AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT DEFAULT...................................................................F-39

F.8.5.1

RTS DELAY MODE...........................................................................................................F-39

RTS TRANSMIT DELAY..................................................................................................F-39

RADIO SHUTDOWN .......................................................................................................F-39

RADIO SENSING..............................................................................................................F-39

Modem Configuration And Dial-Out Setup Menu..............................................................F-40

DIAL ENABLE...................................................................................................................F-40

MODEM INITIALIZATION ............................................................................................F-40

PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER .........................................................................................F-40

ALTERNATE PHONE NUMBER ...................................................................................F-40

DIAL ATTEMPTS PER HOUR ........................................................................................F-41

F.8.6 Serial Port Setup Menu ............................................................................................................F-41

PORT TYPE ........................................................................................................................F-41

LOCAL BAUD RATE........................................................................................................F-41

NETWORK BAUD ............................................................................................................F-41

RTS DELAY MODE...........................................................................................................F-41

RTS TRANSMIT DELAY..................................................................................................F-42

F.8.7 Alarm Status Information menu......................................................................................F-42

DIFF PRESS ........................................................................................................................F-42

STATIC PRESS...................................................................................................................F-42

FLOW RATE ......................................................................................................................F-42

FLOWING TEMP ..............................................................................................................F-42

SYSTEM VOLTAGE..........................................................................................................F-42

RAM BATTERY .................................................................................................................F-43

BATTERY OVERCHARGE ..............................................................................................F-43

CI-3530-10B/20B Appendix F Page 0-2 Table Of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE #

AUXILIARY INPUT..........................................................................................................F-43

NOMINATION..................................................................................................................F-43

F.8.8 Set Time Menu ..........................................................................................................................F-43

F.8.9 Special Functions Menu...........................................................................................................F-43

F.8.9.1

Reset Hardware ........................................................................................................................F-44

F.8.9.2

F.8.9.3

F.8.9.4

Change Local Address .............................................................................................................F-44

Change Group Number ...........................................................................................................F-44

Charge Regulator Set-up .........................................................................................................F-44

REGULATOR DELAY ......................................................................................................F-44

NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE..................................................................................F-44

CHARGE VOLTAGE ........................................................................................................F-44

F.8.9.5

F.8.9.6

TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT.....................................................................................F-44

List Configuration.....................................................................................................................F-46

Archive Editing.........................................................................................................................F-46

Overview ............................................................................................................................F-47

Editing Archives In The Product.....................................................................................F-47

Editing Archive Definitions In Files................................................................................F-48

Writing Files To A Product ..............................................................................................F-48

Archive Memory Usage....................................................................................................F-48

Effects On TMS Archive Conversion To ASCII.............................................................F-48

Effect Of Different Archive Sizes On TMS Usage .........................................................F-49

F.8.10 Security Maintenance...............................................................................................................F-49

Entering Security Codes ...................................................................................................F-50

Access Levels .....................................................................................................................F-50

Security Code Storage.......................................................................................................F-50

Security Code Maintenance .............................................................................................F-50

F.8.11 Maintenance Operations..........................................................................................................F-51

F.9 OFF LINE FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................................F-51

ADDENDUM

Using the Windows™ UOI/TMS/Smartkit Shell.................................................. Addendum

CI-3530-10B/20B Appendix F Page 0-3 Table Of Contents

Appendix F

Using the TeleFlow™ Menu System

F.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW

The TeleFlow™ Menu System (TMS) is a collection of software generated menus which are displayed on a personal computer (PC) to allow a user to configure and monitor a 3530-10

Electronic Gas Measurement (EGM) Computer. TMS menus provide:

* Sign-on to the 3530-10B Electronic Gas Measurement Computer (EGMC)

* Change the PC communications setup parameters

* Invoke menus to configure the EGMC for operation

* Read current gas flow and total information

* Set the EGMC Date and Time

* Change the EGMC network address

* Reset the EGMC to factory default conditions

* Collect & Display the Daily, Periodic, 15 Minute & Audit Logs

F.2 INSTALLING TMS SOFTWARE

TMS software requires a PC (computer) with a minimum of 640 kilobytes of RAM, a minimum

1 megabytes of fixed disk storage, and a 3.5" diskette drive.

1. With the DOS Prompt displayed on the screen, set the PC to the root directory. For example, if your root directory is on the C drive, type CD \ and press the [ENTER] key.

2. Insert the TMS program diskette into the appropriate 3.5" diskette drive.

Type: A:INSTALL A C <Directory> [ENTER]

Where A: is the 3.5" diskette drive, <Directory> is the Directory on the Hard

Disk where TMS is to be installed, and C: is the hard disk drive on which

TMS will be installed.

3. Once the installation is finished, change directory (CD) to the directory where TMS was installed; i.e., type CD C:\TMS and press [ENTER]. This will set the PC to the TMS directory.

4. Type DIR and press [ENTER] to display the names of the files in the directory. Verify that it contains the following files:

Teleflow.UML

Teleflow.UCL

Teleflow.UHL

Teleflow.UMS

Teleflow.UCS

Teleflow.UHS

TMS.EXE

HLPFILE.D50

ATOOL.INI

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-1

Also check the sub-directory SAMPLES; it should include the following files:

ATOOLS.INI SECAMS.REL

Figure F-1 TeleFlow Connected to PC Via the Local Communications Cable

5. Change the AUTOEXEC.BAT file to contain a PATH statement to the

Directory where TMS is installed. Set the correct time and date on the PC before starting the TMS program. If the computer has no hard disk, TMS can be operated from drive A on portable computers but log collections will be restricted unless multiple disks are used.

F.2.1 Communication Connections

The TeleFlow™ communicates with the PC through the Local Port as shown in Figures F-1 &

F-3. The Local Port has been provided specifically for installation/startup and on-site configuration and data collection.

Note: Since TMS is distributed as a compressed file, it must first be installed on a hard disk and then copied to a floppy drive. The files necessary for TMS to execute from a floppy are: TMS.EXE, TELEFLOW.UML, TELEFLOW.UCL, and

TELEFLOW.UHL. The ATOOLS.INI & HLPFILE.D50 may also be required.

The cable used for local communications connects to the TeleFlow™ via a round 7-pin VII plug.

A 9-pin D-type connector provides the connection to the PC. Cable Pin connections between the computer and the TeleFlow's Local Port are listed in Table F-1.

To install the Local Communications Cable, align the cable connector's white line and notch

(above the white pointer) with the white arrowhead on the Local Port Jack and carefully push

F-2 / Using TMS CI-3530-10/20B

the connector into the jack. To remove the Local Communications Cable from the TeleFlow

Local Port twist the section above the white dot to the right (in the direction of the white pointer) and then carefully pull the cable connector from the jack (see Figure F-2).

Twist To The Rightt

Figure F-2 Local Communications Cable Connector VII Plug/Jack

Figure F-3 TeleFlow™ Local Port Communication Link

Caution

To minimize power consumption, the EGM Computer utilizes a special "SLEEP

Mode" which it awakes from whenever the Local Communications Cable is plugged into the Local Port. Battery life will be substantially reduced if this cable is left plugged into the TeleFlow™, regardless if the other end (D Conn.) is terminated or open. Therefore; always unplug this cable whenever the Local Port is not being utilized.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-3

Wire

Color

Black

White

Red

Green

Brown

VII

Plug Pin #

6

2

7

1*

4*

D Conn.

Pin #

5

2

3

N/A*

N/A*

Signal Name

GND

RXD

TXD

N/A

N/A

Table F-1 Local Communications Cable Wiring List

* Pins 1 & 4 are shorted together in the VII Plug/D Conn. wiring harness (AKA the

Local Communications Cable). This short pulls the wakeup signal to ground whenever the Local Communications Cable is plugged into the TeleFlow™. Pins 7 & 8 of the D-

Type Connector are shorted together (RTS TO CTS).

F.2.2 ATOOLS.INI Setup File

Certain characteristics of the TMS may be customized for the user's application using an initialization file called 'ATOOLS.INI'. This file, which resides in the Local directory, can be displayed via a DOS text editor. A major advantage to customizing this file is that it reduces the need for the operator to alter default parameters in the Communications Setup Menu each time TMS is started.

The items identified below may be included in the file as required by the user. Words listed in upper case should be spelled exactly as shown (though upper case letters are not a requirement).

Each entry should begin in column 1 of the file. Any quotation marks '' shown surrounding an entry choice are NOT part of the entry, and should not be typed in the file.

POLL-RATE= n sets the Display Refresh Poll Rate. Valid entries are: 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 and

1.0. The default value is set to 0.3.

ADDRESS= n sets the Local Address to be used for communication. Valid entries are in the range (1-

127). The default value is set to 1.

GROUP= n sets the Expanded BSAP Group Number used for communication. Valid entries are in the range (0-127). The default value is set to 0.

PORT=COMn: sets the default communication port, where 'COMn:' is replaced with either 'COM1:' or

'COM2:' NOTE: If this entry is omitted, 'COM1:' will be chosen as the default.

F-4 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

BAUDRATE=x sets the default Baud rate for this port. Valid entries include: '150', '300', '600', '1.2K',

'2.4K', '4.8K', '9.6K', or '19.2K'. Note: 19.2K is used as the default Baud rate.

MODEM=modem type declares the type of modem which will be used. Valid entries for modem_type are:'BBI_FSK', for the Bristol Babcock FSK modem, 'Hayes' for a Hayes modem or

'UDS' for a UDS modem. Note: If this entry is omitted, 'NO MODEM' will be used.

NAME=username may be used; in conjunction with the "Password" command, to omit the normal sign-on sequence if only one person will be using this TMS system. Username must be replaced with a valid username, up to 10 ASCII characters in length, which represents the one person who will be using TMS. If the NAME= entry is included, the PASSWORD= entry must also be defined.

PASSWORD=accesscode may be used; in conjunction with the "Name" command, to omit the normal sign-on sequence if only one person will be using the TMS system. "Accesscode" must be replaced with up to 6 ASCII characters which represent the password of the one person who will be using TMS. This entry must be used in conjunction with the NAME= entry.

XMT_FACTORY_SETTINGS=nnn determines whether the 3530 transmitter calibration menus will include the selection for "Set to factory defaults'. 'nnn' is replaced with either 'YES' to include this selection, or NO to omit it. The default is NO.

A number of error messages are built into TMS. They appear along the bottom of the CRT screen. Sometimes these messages scroll by too quickly to be read. In some cases, it may be useful to activate WAIT_ON_ERROR mode, which halts scrolling of error messages (to allow them to be read) and prompts the user to press any key to cause processing to continue.

WAIT_ON_ERROR=nnn controls waiting whenever an error message is displayed. The use of this command is recommended, particularly when the system is being set up by the system manager.

'nnn' is replaced with 'YES' or 'NO'. The default is NO.

TIMEOUT=seconds specifies the maximum expected time (in seconds) that TMS will wait to respond to a poll. Replace seconds with the maximum expected timeout value. If not specified here, this is defined on the Communications Setup Menu.

It is sometimes necessary to alter the initialization sequence sent to a modem before a phone number is dialed. Normally, the set-up stream is initialized to Q0E0V0X4, a standard Hayes modem stream. The following two keywords are available to modify the stream:

TOT_INIT_MODEM=string replaces the current set-up stream, with string, e.g., if the set-up stream is Q0E0V0X4, and TOT_INIT_MODEM=ABCDE is included in the ATOOLS.INI file, the set-up stream becomes ABCDE.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-5

CAT_INIT_MODEM=string will concatenate string to the end of the current set-up stream. For example, if the set-up stream is Q0E0V0X4, and CAT_INIT_MODEM=ABCDE is included in the

ATOOLS.INI file, the set-up stream will now be Q0E0V0X4ABCDE.

If a Hayes or UDS modem is specified via the 'MODEM=' keyword, the following keywords may be used:

PHONE=phone_number when used with a Hayes or UDS modem, this keyword will cause the number specified by phone_number to be dialed.

DIAL=dialing_mode specifies the type of dialing technique to be used for modem dialing. Valid entries for dialing_mode are either 'TONE' or 'PULSE'.

A sample ATOOLS.INI file might include the following:

PORT=COM1:

BAUDRATE=19200

COLOR=YES

XMT_FACTORY_SETTINGS=NO

WAIT_ON_ERROR=YES

F.2.3 PC Function Key Usage

The TMS program uses the PC function keys (keys F1...F8), the INS key, and the PAGE UP key as follows:

F2

F3

Call up a help screen, if one is available.

Examine signal details or advance to the next display.

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

INS

Back out to the previous menu level.

Toggle Manual Inhibit/Enable.

Back up one menu page.

Toggle Control Inhibit/Enable.

Move forward to another menu page.

The Insert key will activate a menu poke point or complete a change in signal value.

PAGE UP This key clears a displayed field - key is used prior to making value changes.

F-6 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

F.3 TMS PROGRAM STARTUP

Ensure that the Local Communications Cable connections (at both the TeleFlow & the PC) are secure.

Change the Directory to the directory where TMS was installed, e.g. type CD\TMS and hit

[ENTER]. TMS may be started with the following command: TMS [xxx]; where xxx is the optional parameter which specifies the local address to be used for communications.

Note: It is now possible to create user defined menus using UOI V3.2. The following command will start TMS referencing user defined menus:

TMS -f''FILENAME' [XXX]

The -f portion of the command informs TMS to open a set of menu files.

'FILENAME' is the file basename of the menu files to be opened and {XXX} is an optional local address.

Example: TMS -fMyFiles

This example invokes TMS which will open the files MyFiles.UCL,

MyFiles.UML, and MyFiles.UHL.

If the ATOOL.INI file has not been set-up, TMS will attempt to start using the default communications parameter (and xxx as the local address, if specified). If communications with the EMC Computer is successful, the Main Menu for security level 2 will appear.

If an ATOOL.INI file has been set-up, TMS will attempt to start-up, overriding default parameters with the values configured in the ATOLL.INI file. If communications with the EGM

Computer is successful, the main menu for security level 2 or the main menu for the security level associated with the Name and Password cmmands specified in the ATOOL.INI file will appear.

If after typing TMS followed by pressing the [ENTER] Key, communications can't be established, a Help Menu will appear. Perform the following seven (7) steps:

Note: Poke Point ( ) Selections are made by moving the cursor to the desired poke point and then pressing the INSERT [INS] Key.

1. Press F3; the Sign-on Menu of Figure F-6 will appear (see Section F.5).

2. Select the System Set-up poke point ( ). The System Set-up Menu of Figure F-7 will appear (see Section F.6).

3. Select the Reconfigure Communications poke point ( ). The BBI Tools Communications Set-up Menu of Figure F-4 will appear (see Section F.4).

4. Select the Define Local Link poke point ( ). The BBI Tools Communications Port Setup Menu of Figure F-5 will appear.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-7

If necessary select the COM1 poke point ( ) to change from COM2 port usage (or visaversa). Keep in mind that these are the PC's port connections to the TeleFlow J . The default setting is Communications Port 1 (COM1).

If necessary select the 19200 poke point ( ) to set the baud rate. The default setting is 19200 bps.

If necessary change the type of modem that the PC is communicating with. The default is NO MODEM (Note: This is the equivalent to choosing None, so if the connection between the PC and the TeleFlow J is via the Local Communications Cable the default setting of NO MODEM can be left alone).

5. Press BACKDISP (the F4 Key) to return to the BBI Tools Communications Set-up Menu.

6. Press the F3 Key to go to the Sign-on Menu (Figure F-6) (Section F.5).

7. Select the Sign-on To On-line Function poke point ( ). The Operator Name will prompt.

Enter the operator name (up to ten (10) characters in length). Enter the password (up to six (6) characters in length). If sign-on is successful, the Main Menu for the associated security level will appear (Figure F-8) (Section F-7).

Once a user has successfully logged on, pressing F4 (Back Display); from any of the main menus, will invoke the Sign-on Menu. This will allow the user to change security level if required.

F.4 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP MENUS

BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS SETUP MENU

HELP (F2 Key) Available

ACTIONS

Identify Local Node

Identify Global Node

Define Local Link

Node Attached to PEI Hardware

Target Node is not Local Node

Baud Rate, Port, Modem Usage

Issue Node Routing Table/Time Sync

STATUS

Global Node Address: 0000

Local Node Address: 1 Mode: NORM

Baud Rate: 19200 Timeout: 2 seconds Comm Port: COM1

NO MODEM

Press NEXT DISPLAY Key (F3) To Enter Program With Communications System As Defined

Figure F-4 BBI Tools Communications Setup Menu (Main Comm. Menu)

F-8 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B / 20B

The address of the TeleFlow J must be specified to TMS. The address and other parameters are entered via the Communication Menus of Figure F-4 and F-5. Either local or global communications are supported.

Note:

Certain communications setup parameters may, if desired, be predefined in a text file called ATOOLS.INI. See ATOOLS.INI Setup File under Section F.2 (see

ATOOLS.INI Setup File)

If your computer is directly connected to the TeleFlow Local Communications Port), proceed as follows: o Move the cursor to the "Identify Local Node" poke point, then press [INS]. The BBI Tools

Communications Setup Menu (not shown) will appear. This menu allows the operator to reconfigure the Local Address, Local Node Name and the Expanded BSAP Group

Address (0-127 defaulted to 0). This menu also provides a poke point for examining the

NETOP File (to aid in node name determination).

o Type in the local address field (1 factory default), press [INS], then press F4.

If you are communicating through the Network (Global Communications), use this procedure: o The TMS program will communicate globally through the Master Node of a network to any 33XX which is a slave to a lower level node. Select the Identify Global Node poke point. The BBI Tools Global Communications Setup Menu will appear. Specify the

33XX's node name as it appears in the Netfile for the network. Note: A NETOP File poke point is provided for examining network setup information. After entering the node name, press [F4] to return to the BBI Tools Communications Setup Menu.

If the operator selects the Define Local Link poke point, the following message will be displayed at the lower left corner of the menu: TIME SYNCH/NRT SENT . This message indicates that the PC's time and networking information have been sent to the TeleFlow J .

F.4.1 Setting The Baud Rate, Port & Modem Usage Parameters

The PC Serial Port is set to 19200 baud through COM1 by default. To change the default communications port or the baud rate, select the Define Local Link poke point and press [INS]; the BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS PORT SETUP MENU of Figure F-5 will appear.

Use the poke points on this menu to change the port and baud rate selections as required. 19200 baud and No Modem are the default settings and should always be used with the TeleFlow J .

When entries on this screen are complete, press [F4] to return to the BBI Tools Communications

Setup Menu. Press [F3] to change all the settings in the PC to the new settings. The TMS will then attempt to communicate with the EGM Computer. If communications are successfully established, the Sign-on Menu (Figure F-6) will appear on the screen.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-9

Note: The Main Comm. Menu referenced by the bottom line of the BBI TOOLS

COMMUNICATIONS PORT SETUP MENU is the BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS

SETUP MENU of Figure F-4.

BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS PORT SETUP MENU

HELP (F2 Key) Available

Select Baud Rate: 19200 Baud

150

300

600

1200

Selected Comm Port: COM1

2400

4800

Timeout: 2 Seconds

9600

19200

3308 Node Type: yes/NO

COM1

Modem: NO MODEM

COM2 Download Retry

None BBI FSK

(HEADBAND)

UDS 202S/D HayesSmart CDPD

Press Back Display Key (Function Key 4) To Return To The Main Communications Menu

Figure F-5 Comm. Setup Baud Rate Menu

F.5 SIGN-ON MENU

SIGN-ON MENU

Security Sign-on to On-line Function

System Set-up

Sign-off and Exit

Figure F-6 Sign-On Menu

The Sign-On Menu provides poke points for signing onto the TMS, configuring the communications system and exiting from the program.

Typically, if you do not specify the local address when starting TMS from the command line, this menu will appear after the Startup Menu and Communication Setup Menu. If an address is specified, however, this menu will appear first.

If you intend to use on-line mode, which is the most common arrangement, you may need to change the system setup first. To do so, move the cursor to the 'System Set-up' poke point, and press [INS]. Follow the directions in section F.6 to change the system setup.

If the system setup does not need to be changed, you may sign on as follows:

F-10 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B / 20B

1. Move the cursor to the 'Security Sign-On' poke-point and press [INS]. TMS will read all the allowed names and passwords from the TeleFlow into the PC, and then display a prompt for an operator name.

2. When the "Enter Operator Name" prompt appears at the bottom left of the screen, type in the operator name and press [INS]. TMS will compare the name to those read from the TeleFlow and either accept or reject the name. The factory default name is

SYSTEM. (Be sure to use the [INS] key, not [ENTER]. If the name is valid a 'password' prompt will appear.

3. When the 'Password' prompt appears, type in the password. The password for

SYSTEM is 666666. To maintain security, the password characters will not be visible as they are typed. Press [INS] to enter the password; TMS will compare it to the oneassociated with the accepted name and either accept or reject the password.

Note:

The security level associated with your username/password (or security code) will determine which functions are accessable within the TMS. Certain poke points and functions shown on the menus in this manual will NOT be visible for those users who have signed on at less than the highest security level.

F.6 SYSTEM SET-UP

This menu may be accessed through the 'System Set-up' poke point on the Sign-on Menu of

Figure F-6.

SYSTEM SET-UP color/MONOCHROME Display

Block Cursor/default Cursor

Reconfigure Communications Set-up

Download ACL File

Sign-off and Exit

Figure F-7 System Setup Menu

The color/MONOCHROME Display poke point of Figure F-7 alerts the operator that the system is configured for a black & white monitor. The word that is capitalized connotes the type of monitor used, i.e., Black & White or Color. If this poke point were chosen (as it appears in

Figure F-7) the screen would change to color and the poke point would appear as follows:

COLOR/monochrome Display.

If the Reconfigure Communications Set-up poke point is selected, the BBI Communications Setup

Menu of Figure F-4 will be displayed (see Section F.4).

CI-3530-10B /20B Using TMS / F-11

F.7

ON-LINE FUNCTIONS

When sign-on is successful, an initial TMS menu will appear. It will be either an On-Line

Functions Menu or a Main Menu. To select a menu item, move the cursor up or down (to a poke point) using the arrow keys, then press the [INS] key to activate the (poke point) selection.

The appearance of the initial menu will vary depending upon what security code was entered during sign-on. An On-line Function Menu will be displayed for security levels 5 & 6, while security levels 2 through 4 will receive a variation of the Main Menu.

Figure F-8

On-Line Function Tree Diagram

Figure F-9

Main Menu (Levels 2, 3 & 4) Tree Diagram

F-12 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

Users who signed on with a security level 1 will receive a Sign-on Error Menu. This menu will prompt the operator as follows: "Operator is signed-on at security level one which has no access.

Press F4 to return to the sign-on menu".

The menu of Figure F-12 reflects security level 6 functions. The security level 5 On-line Function Menu is similar; however, the Special Functions and Security Maintenance poke points arenot available to security level 5 users.

Users at security level 2 are provided a start-up menu MAIN MENU which allows them to view configuration data and plot data (see Figure F-10). Users at level 3 & 4 are provided a similar menu (unique to each) which provides them with additional capabilities (see Figure F-11).

Users at level 3 are allowed to view configuration data, plot data, view alarm data and collect logs. Users at level 3 don't have the ability to write to the configuration data. In addition to the capabilities of level 3, users at level 4 have Write Access to 'Configuration' and 'Gas

Composition' data and can perform transmitter calibration functions. The Main Menus associated with levels 3 and 4 are similiar but the level 4 menu has the Calibration poke point.

M A I N M E N U

Station ID ________________ Orifice Diameter _______ ______

Meter ID ________ Pipe Diameter _______ ______

DP In Use ______ ______ DP Live ______ ______

SP In Use ______ ______ SP Live ______ ______

Temp In Use ______ ______ Temp Live ______ ______

Gravity ______ ______ CO2 Content _______ ______

Heating Value ______ ______ N2 Content _______ ______

Flow Rate/Hr ______ ______ Flow Rate/Day _______ ______

Volume Today ______ ______ Backflow Today _______ ______

Volume Yesterday ______ ______ Backflow Yesterday _______ ______

View Configuration Plot Trend Data

View Gas Composition

Sign-off and Exit

Figure F-10 MAIN MENU (Start-up Menu Security Level 2)

The data entries on the menu of Figure F-10 are Read Only. Users at level 2 are allowed to view configuration data and plot data. Users at level 2 do not have the ability to write to the configuration data.

BACKDISP (F4) may be used from any of the start-up menus to access the standard System

Sign-on Menu (Figure F-6). The System Sign-on Menu allows the user to sign-on at a new security level, access the communications set-up menus, or sign-off.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-13

M A I N M E N U

Station ID ________________ Orifice Diameter _______ ______

Meter ID ________ Pipe Diameter _______ ______

DP In Ue _______ ______ DP Live ______ ______

SP In Use _______ ______ SP Live ______ ______

Temp In Use _______ ______ Temp Live ______ ______

Gravity ______ ______ CO2 Content _______ ______

Heating Value ______ ______ N2 Content _______ ______

Flow Rate/Hr ______ ______ Flow Rate/Day _______ ______

Volume Today ______ ______ Backflow Today _______ ______

Volume Yesterday ______ ______ Backflow Yesterday _______ ______

Collect Combo Log

(Daily, Periodic, Audit, Config)

Log Utilities

Plot Trend Data

Sign-off and Exit

View Configuration

View Gas Composition

View Alarms

Maintenance Operations

Figure F-11 MAIN MENU (Start-up Menu Security Levels 3 & 4)

Note: The Maintenance Operations Poke Point of Figure F-11 is not available to level

3 users. The word view (which proceeds the Configuration and Gas Composition poke points) does not appear on the level 4 menu.

ON-LINE FUNCTIONS MENU

Current Gas Flow Information

Collect Logs

Configurable Data

Transmitter Calibration

Radio and Modem Control

Serial Port Information

Alarm Status Information

Set Date and Time

Special Functions

Security Maintenance

Sign-off and Exit

Note: Radio and Modem Control, Special Functions & Security Maintenance Poke

Points are not available at level 5.

Figure F-12 Start-up Menu Security Levels 5 & 6

F-14 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

F.8 ORGANIZATION OF THE START-UP MENUS

Depending on the security level, either an On-Line Functions Menu (Figure F-12) or a Main

Menu (Figures (F-10 & F-11) will appear when the user signs on. The On-Line Function Menu provides ten (10) poke points ( ) which when chosen will lead to a new menu which in turn may contain poke points which (if chosen) may lead to one or more additional menus or screens (See

Figure F-12).

Some of the menus discussed in this section are accessed through the Main Menu of security levels 2 through 4. These menus are discussed with respect to the various levels. The abbreviated or lower level menus (associated with levels 2, 3 & 4) are a form of the menus associated with security levels 5 & 6. These menus (levels 2, 3 & 4) are not shown but are connoted in this manual (see Figures F-8 & F-9).

F.8.1 Current Gas Flow Information

This menu is accessible from the On-Line Functions Menu poke point ( ) Current Gas Flow

Information for users at security level 5 or 6. It provides Read-only access to the indicated gas flow information.

CURRENT GAS FLOW INFORMATION

Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings

Volume, Energy and Flow Time

Flow Equation Components

Gas Composition

Plot Trend Data

Figure F-13 Current Gas Flow Information Menu

Selecting an item from this menu will access a more detailed menu for the indicated information.

F.8.1.1 Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings Menu

The Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings Menu is accessible to users at security level 5 or 6 and this menu provides the following flow readings:

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (H2O)

STATIC PRESSURE (Psig)

TEMPERATURE (On/Off) (Upper Case connotes correct state)

FLOW STATUS (Deg. F)

HEATING VALUE (BTU/CF)

TOTAL FLOW RATE (MSCFH) & (MSCFD)

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-15

TOTAL ENERGY RATE (MMBTUH)

F.8.1.2 Volume, Energy and Flow Time

The Volume, Energy and Flow Time Menu is accessible to users at security level 5 or 6. This menu provides the Flow Time, Backflow Time, Volume Total, Energy Total and Nomination

Quantities for "Today and Yesterday," as-well-as the monthly volume, energy and running totals.

F.8.1.3 Flow Equation Components

This menu provides Read Only access to the Flow Equation components. The TeleFlow supports

AGA3/NX-19 1985, and AGA3/AGA8 1992. Components for all are shown on this menu. When

1985 AGA3/NX-19 is selected, AGA8 METHOD and AGA8 GROSS METHOD lines are meaningless.

FLOW EQUATION COMPONENTS

1992 AGA3/AGA8 1985 AGA3/NX-19

ENABLED DISABLED

CD(FT)

Ev

Y

Flow Extension

Zs

Zb

Zf

0.604137

1.061427

0.998513

144.83

0.997512

0.997512

0.953448

C' Factor

Fpv

Fpb

Ftb

Ftf

Fb

Fg

Fr

Fa

Flow Equation Selected 1992

Beta Ratio 0.579012

Flow Orifice Diameter 7.001

Inches

Flow Pipe Diameter 12.091 Inches

USE PgUp TO CLEAR FIELD

13541.27

1.023381

1.000000

1.000000

0.981295

10612.91

1.268774

1.000280

1.000222

Figure F-14 AGA3/AGA8 Flow Equation Components Menu

F.8.1.4 Gas Composition Menu

The Gas Composition menu is accessible to users at security level 5 or 6. This menu is accessed

(Read Only) from the Current Gas Flow Information Menu or for (Read/Write) from the Read-

/Write Configurable Data Menu.

F-16 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

GAS COMPOSITION

N2 _______ NPENTANE _______

CO2 _______ IPENTANE _______

H2S _______ NHEXANE _______

WATER ________ NHEPTANE _______

HELIUM _______ NOCTANE _______

METHANE _______ NNONANE _______

ETHANE _______ NDECANE _______

PROPANE _______ OXYGEN _______

NBUTANE _______ CARB MONOX _______

IBUTANE _______ HYDROGEN _______

ARGON _______

HEATING VALUE ______ ______ HEATING VALUE SOURCE ______

GRAVITY ______ GRAVITY TYPE ______

VISCOSITY _________ ______ ISENTROPIC COEFF ______

AGA8 METHOD _______ AGA8 GROSS METHOD ______

Figure F-15 Gas Composition Menu

F.8.1.5 Plot Trend Data

When the Plot Trend Data poke point of the Current Gas Flow Information Menu (Figure F-13) is selected, a screen plot similar to Figure F-16 will appear. When the plot is initially called up on the screen, TMS will attempt to show all of the available data. Depending upon your application, this may result in too much data being compressed in too small an area. To adjust this, use the Zoom In poke points, to concentrate on a smaller portion of the plot; this may make the plot easier to read.

The Trend Data plot includes three traces, one for differential pressure (DP) one for pressure

(P) and a third for temperature (T). Individual traces can appear in a variety of styles and/or colors. In the plot above, the DP trace uses squares, the P trace uses circles, and the T trace uses a line.

There are several poke points included with each screen plot, which may be used to alter the way data is presented.

SHIFT PAGE LEFT

This poke point shifts the period for data being plotted back in time, to show older data.

SHIFT COLUMN LEFT

This poke point performs the same function as SHIFT PAGE LEFT, except in smaller increments.

SHIFT PAGE RIGHT

This poke point shifts the period for data being plotted forward in time, to show more

recent data.

SHIFT COLUMN RIGHT

This poke point performs the same function as SHIFT PAGE RIGHT, except in smaller increments.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-17

Figure F-16 TREND DATA Screen

ZOOM OUT 1.2X, 2X, 5X

The zoom out poke points increase the number of data points which will be displayed on the plot, but compresses the amount of space between data points. Zooming out results in a longer time-scale of data points being displayed in a given area of the screen.

ZOOM IN 1.2X, 2X, 5X

The zoom in poke points decrease the number of data points which will be displayed on the plot, but increases the amount of space between data points. Zooming in makes it easier to examine individual data points in the plot.

SCALE MODE: AUTO/MANUAL

The Scale Mode pokepoint toggles the mode used to determine the 0% and 100% scale values for an individual trace on the plot. Each trace has its own scale mode poke point.

If there are less than 4 traces for this plot, the word 'unused' will appear next to the extra poke point(s.)

When AUTO is selected, the word AUTO is capitalized, and manual is shown in lowercase letters. When MANUAL is selected, the word MANUAL is capitalized, and the word auto is shown in lowercase letters.

F-18 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

AUTO

The 0% value is automatically set to the value of the smallest data value for this trace currently being displayed on the screen. The 100% value is automatically set to the value of the largest data value for this trace currently being displayed on the screen. These values are displayed in the 0% and 100% fields at left, and are dynamically updated if the SHIFT poke points are used to call up different time scales of data. AUTO mode ensures that the trace for a particular signal will never go above the 100% line, or below the 0% line on the screen.

MANUAL

Manual mode requires the operator to enter 0% and 100% data values for each individual poke point. Data values which are outside the 0 and 100% range defined by these values may not be visible on the screen, depending upon how far above or below the range, the value has gone.

SHOW/HIDE

Each trace has its own SHOW/HIDE poke point, which is used to turn on/off the display of a particular trace on the plot. When SHOW is selected, the trace will appear. When

HIDE is selected, the trace is omitted from the plot.

F.8.2 Log Utilities

Log Collect, Convert and Display functions are all presented utilizing a common menu. This menu presents the user with a matrix of menu poke-points describing what functions may be performed. In addition, the user may change the default disk drive on the log select menus via the View/Change Drive Directory Poke Point (see Section 1.3.4.1). It should be noted that

"Combo" Logs include the 15 Minute Trend Data.

Meter ID is: ________

LOG UTILITIES

View/Change Drive/Directory

COLLECT CONVERT DISPLAY

Combo Log

Daily Log

Periodic Log

Trend Data Log

Alarm/Event Log

Sign-off and Exit

Figure F-17 Log Utilities Menu

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-19

COLLECT Poke Points : Collects a specific log and appends it to an existing file.

CONVERT Poke Points : Takes collected data and stores it in an ASCII Text File on disk.

DISPLAY Poke Points : Takes text from the ASCII Text File and writes it to the display.

The Meter ID defines the file name used to R/W log data.

F.8.3 Read/WriteConfigurable Data

This menu is accessible from the On-Line Functions Menu for users at security level 5 or 6. It provides Read/Write access to the indicated gas flow information.

READ/WRITE CONFIGURABLE DATA MENU

Live Inputs/Outputs

Configuration Constants

Alarm Configuration

Gas Composition

PID Flow Controller / Sampler Control Constants

Nominations

Read/Write Configuration

Figure F-18 Read/Write Configurable Data Menu

LIVE INPUTS Page 1 of 2

CALIBRATION MODE ______

DIFFERENTIAL STATIC

PRESSURE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE

OVERRIDE STATUS ______ ______ ______

LIVE INPUT VALUE ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______

INPUT VALUE IN USE ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______

CALIBRATED ZERO ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______

CALIBRATED SCALE ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______

PRESS F8 TO VIEW AUXILIARY INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Figure F-19 Live Input/Outputs Menu (Page 1 of 2)

F-20 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

F.8.3.1 Live Inputs/Outputs

The Live Inputs/Outputs Menu is accessible from the Read/Write Configurable Data Menu for users at security levels 5 and 6. This menu indicates whether Maintenance Mode is ON/OFF and provides the mechanism for manually overriding an input value.

AUXILIARY INPUT

AUXILIARY ZERO

AUXILIARY SPAN

PULSE INPUT

SCALED PULSES CURR

SCALED PULSES ACCUM

DISCRETE INPUT 1

DISCRETE OUTPUT 1

AUXILIARY INPUTS/OUTPUTS Page 2 of 2

PC BOARD TEMPERATURE ______ ______ ______

______

______

______

______

______

PULSE FREQUENCY ______ ______

SCALED FREQUENCY ______ ______

SCALED PULSESD YDAY ______ ______

______ DISCRETE INPUT 2 ______

______ DISCRETE OUTPUT 2 ______

POWER INPUT 1

SYSTEM VOLTAGE

______ ______ POWER INPUT 2 ______ ______

______ ______ BACKUP BATTERY ______ ______

USE PgUp To CLEAR FIELD

Figure F-20 Auxiliary Inputs/Outputs Menu

F.8.3.2 Configuration Constants Menu

CONFIGURATION CONSTANTS Page 1 of 2 CONFIGURATION READ/WRITE

STATION ID ______________________ METER ID ______

PIPE DIAMETER

PIPE MATERIAL

PIPE REF TEMP

TAP LOCATION

GRAVITY

HEATING VALUE

AGA8 METHOD

AGA3 METHOD

NITROGEN CONTENT

BASE PRESSURE PB

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

______ ______ ORIFICE DIAMETER

______ ORIFICE PLATE MATERIAL

______ ______ ORIFICE PLATE REF TEMP

______ TAP TYPE

______ GRAVITY TYPE

______ ______ HEATING VALUE SOURCE

______ AGA8 GROSS METHOD

______ LOW DP CUTOFF VALUE

______ ______ CO2 CONTENT

______ ______

______

______ ______

______

______

______

______

______ ______

______ ______

______ ______ BASE TEMPERATURE TB ______ ______

______ ______ PULSE FREQ SCALE FACTOR ______

CONTRACT HOUR ______

PRESS F8 FOR PAGE 2 CONSTANTS

USE PgUp To CLEAR FIELD

CI-3530-10B/20B

Figure F-21 Configuration Constants Menu (Page 1 of 2)

Using TMS / F-21

The Configuration Constants Menu is accessed from the Main Menu for security levels 2, 3, and

4. For security levels 5 and 6 this menu is accessed from the Read/Write Configurable Constants

Menu. When accessed with a security level of 2 or 3, the parameters on this menu are Read-

Only. The parameters on this menu are READ/WRITE for users at security level 4, 5, or 6. The

Config. Constants Menu consists of two separate pages (see Figures F-21 & F-22).

Page 2 of this menu provides access to the standard Configuration Read/Write Menu.

Configuration Constants Page 2 of 2 CONFIGURATION READ/WRITE

LOAD ID: _______ VER: ______ LOAD DATE _______________

BREAK LOG ON CHANGE ______ TREND DATA LOG ______

CALCULATION INTERVAL ______ ______ PERIODIC LOG INTERVAL ______

(1, 2, 5, 15, 60 Secs)

LCD ALARM DISPLAY ______ ______

Figure F-22 Configuration Constants Menu (Page 2 of 2)

F.8.3.3 Alarm Configuration

Three Alarm Configuration Menus are provided, i.e., Pages 1, 2 & 3 of 3. Pages 1 and 2 provide analog alarm configuration information, while page 3 deals with logic alarm con-figuration information. To change an alarm configuration deadband or limit value, enter the new value directly on the display (page 1 or 2) or press F3 (with the cursor set on the high-lighted value in question). The menu which appears will allow the user to examine/change sig-nal details.

ALARM CONFIGURATION Page 1 of 3

DIFFERENTIAL STATIC

PRESSURE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE

CURRENT VALUE 270.00 In H2O 00.00 Psig 80.00 Deg. F

LOW ALARM DEADBAND 3.00 In H2O 10.00 Psig 3.00 Deg. F

LOW ALARM 10.00 In H2O 100.00 Psig 50.00 Deg. F

LOW LOW ALARM 0.00 In H2O 00.00 Psig 32.00 Deg. F

HIGH ALARM DEADBAND 10.00 In H2O 50.00 Psig 10.00 Deg. F

HIGH ALARM 250.00 In H2O 1500.00 Psig 150.00 Deg. F

HIGH HIGH ALARM 300.00 In H2O 2000.00 Psig 250.00 Deg. F

PRESS F8 FOR MORE ALARM CONFIGURATION DATAUSE PgUp To CLEAR FIELD

Figure F-23 Alarm Configuration Menu Page 1 of 3

F-22 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

ALARM CONFIGURATION Page 2 of 3

CURRENT VALUE

FLOW AUXILIARY

RATE INPUT

178.87 MSCFH

LOW ALARM DEADBAND 50.00 MSCFH

LOW ALARM

LOW LOW ALARM

0.0 MSCFH

0.0 MSCFH

150.00

3.00

10.0

0.0

SYSTEM

POWER

12.04 Volts

0.50 Volts

6.00 Volts

5.50 Volts

HIGH ALARM DEADBAND 50.00 MSCFH

HIGH ALARM

HIGH HIGH ALARM

3000.0 MSCFH

5000.0 MSCFH

PRESS F8 FOR LOGICAL ALARM CONFIGURATION DATA

10.00

100.0

150.0

0.50 Volts

14.00 Volts

16.00 Volts

USE PgUp To CLEAR FIELD

Figure F-24 Alarm Configuration Menu Page 2 of 3

ALARM CONFIGURATION Page 3 of 3

STATE STATUS BITS

ALARM DELAY BACKFLOW

LOW DP CUTOFF

Clear ME CE AE

Clear ME CE AE

BACKUP BATTERY Clear ME CE AE

BATTERY OVERCHARGE Clear ME CE AE

AGA8 CALC ERROR

FP MATH ERROR

Clear ME CE AE

Clear ME CE AE

SELF-CHECK FAILURE Clear ME CE AE

TRANSMITTER FAILURE Active ME CE AE

SENSOR CHECKSUM OK ME CE AE

ALARM DELAY Active ME CE AE

10 Secs

Figure F-25 Alarm Configuration Menu Page 3 of 3

Deadbands and Limits :

- A deadband slows down the alarm response and prevents the signal from turning on and off too quickly if the signal oscillates at the threshold of the alarm limit.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-23

Low Alarm, Low Low Alarm, High Alarm and High High Alarm limit data fields represent the alarm setpoints. Note: When configuring an alarm signal, provide an adequate non-alarm zone to ensure that the signal is not in a continuous alarm state.

An alarm condition occurs when the signal value exceeds the alarm limit. The alarm remains activated until the signal returns to the non-alarm range defined by the alarm limits.

To enable (E) or inhibit (I) a Manual (M), Control (C) or Alarm (A) Status Bit (associated with the page 3 of 3 menu Alarm Configuration Menu), press F3 (with the cursor on the highlighted

State associated with the logic signal in question, i.e., Low DP Cutoff, Backup Battery, AGA8

Calc Error or Self-Check Failure. The menu which appears will allow the user to examine and change signal details.

By default, signals that are in the alarm state are displayed on the LCD Display. Alarms may be inhibited from appearing on the LCD Display via the "LCD ALARM DISPLAY" entry on page

2 of the Configuration Constants Menu (see Section F.8.3.2).

F.8.3.4 Gas Composition

The Gas Composition Menu is accessible to users at security levels 5 & 6. This menu is accessed in Read Only mode from the Read Current Gas Flow Information Menu or in Read/Write mode from the Read/Write Configurable Data Menu (see Figure F-15).

F.8.3.5 PID Flow Controller /Sampler Control

The Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID) Flow Controller / Sampler Control Constants Menu

(Figure F-26) is accessible from the Read/Write Configurable Data Menu to users at security level 5 or 6. The PID Controller is utilized in the TeleFlow for Flow Rate Control.

Nominations Function

The Nominations Function provides for enabling/disabling the nominations feature (see

Section F.8.3.6). If this signal is set to the disable state, no nomination will be performed.

Status

The Status signal is an output of the nominations algorithm that indicates whether there is currently a nominations period in progress. The user may change the state of this signal to end an in progress nomination immediately, or to start the next period immediately (see

Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period in Section F.8.3.6).

ENABLE

Pressing the PAGE UP (PgUp) key and then pressing the INS key will clear the

Enable/Disable displayed reading and the following prompt will appear at the bottom of the menu: DO YOU WISH TO TURN THIS SIGNAL TO ITS ENABLED (TRUE) STATE? If so, press the INS Key again. If you do not want the PID Flow Controller enabled, type N. It is recommended that GAIN, INTEGRAL and DERIVATIVE adjustments be checked before turning a controller ON.

F-24 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

Warning

Do not turn the ENABLE selection ON without first checking the external process control loop.

The initial values displayed on the PID Menu may drive some critical processes beyond the extremes of safe limits. This could result in fire, explosion, property damage, and injury to persons. When setting parameters, make sure the associated process is observed and protected.

PID FLOW CONTROLLER / SAMPLER CONTROL CONSTANTS

Nomination: function ______ Status ______

ENABLE

SETPOINT

GAIN

INTEGRAL

DERIVATIVE

DEADBAND

SPAN

______ SAMPLER FUNCTION

__________ ______ SAMPLER VOLUME

______

______ ______

SAMPLER PULSE WIDTH ______ ______ ______

______ ______

______ ______

______ ______ DP LIVE

__________ ______ SP LIVE

VALVE TRAVEL TIME ______ ______ TEMP LIVE

PROCESS LIMITER ______

______ ______

______ ______

______ ______

PRESSURE OVERRIDE'S (SET ONE OR BOTH TO ENABLE OVERRIDE)

MAXIMUM ______ ______

MINIMUM ______ ______

PRESSURE TAP LOCATION RELATIVE TO THE VALVE ______ ______

FLOW RATE __________ ______ RATE/DAY

FLOW AT STD __________ ______

______ ______

USE PgUp TO CLEAR FIELD

Figure F-26 PID Flow Controller/Sampler Control Constants Menu

SETPOINT

This field contains the operating point at which the flow rate is to be controlled. The setpoint units are MSCFH with a default setting of 1000 MSCF per Hour. To change the Setpoint value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value.

Once the new value has been typed in, press the INS key.

GAIN

The GAIN controls the amount of output change resulting from a change of the measured variable. The default value of 1.00 is typically used as a starting point; final gain is usually less. To change the Gain, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.

INTEGRAL

The INTEGRAL determines the time it will take the PID to correct an error in the measured variable. The number of times the output is adjusted in a given time period is specified in seconds. An entry of 60 seconds can be used as a starting point; this would provide one (1) repeat per minute. To change the Integral setting, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-25

DERIVATIVE

DERIVATIVE compensates for a rapidly changing measured variable. The time is specified in seconds (SECS) and most applications will use a setting of zero (0). To change the

Derivative value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.

DEADBAND

The DEADBAND provides a means of specifying a 'window' in which the variable does not affect the output. This entry is in percent (%) of the SETPOINT signal. As an example, a 5% entry would mean that the controller output must exceed the present setpoint by 5% before the output is changed. To change the Deadband value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the

INS key.

SPAN

This entry sets the SPAN for the PID CONTROLLER in (MSCFH). The controller uses this value (default = 5000 MSCFH) to convert the actual flow rate to percent for use by the PID controller; therefore, this value should be set as closely as possible to the expected operating maximum. To change the Span value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.

VALVE TRAVEL TIME

Valve Travel Time is the amount of time it takes a Control Valve to go from being fully open to fully closed (or visa-versa). The default value is 30 Seconds. To change the value of the

Valve Travel Time, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.

PROCESS LIMITER

Should the process variable not change by a certain amount within 8 seconds of the last change, an open condition is assumed and PID output stops. This automatic limiting can be disabled.

FLOW RATE

The Flow Rate value is Read Only data; it is the present calculated flow rate per hour.

PRESSURE OVERRIDE (SET ONE OR BOTH TO ENABLE OVERRIDE)

When the PID controller is active in flow-control mode, it will adjust a pressure valve to maintain the established flow rate setpoint. Pressure override is used in situations where full line pressure should not be applied to the downstream equipment or in circumstances where too low of a pressure should not be allowed.

A Maximum and Minimum pressure can be configured which set the PID controller to switch to pressure control mode whenever the line pressure attempts to go outside the defined limits. The pressure override mode becomes active when either or both limits are set to a non-zero value.

F-26 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

PRESSURE TAP LOCATION

The Pressure Tap location is specified as either upstream (UPSTRM) or downstream

(DNSTRM) with respect to the control valve. The action of the override controller depends on the configured Tap location. When the pressure tap is configured as Downstream of the control valve, pressure will rise as the valve opens to increase the flow rate. Increasing demand will cause the valve to open more. Should conditions occur that cause the pressure to exceed the maximum pressure limit, the override will take control and close the valve to maintain the configured maximum pressure. Should the valve attempt to close and reduce pressure below the configured maximum pressure, the override will take control to maintain the minimum pressure. When the pressure tap is configured as Upstream, the action is reversed, i.e., when the maximum pressure is exceeded the valve will open to lower the pressure. When the minimum pressure is exceeded the valve will be closed.

Users are cautioned to test the regular override controller actions to verify correct valve movement for all expected conditions.

FLOW AT STD

The Flow At Std value is Read Only data; it is the Flow Rate at STANDARD CONDITIONS, i.e., (14.73 Lbs. & 60 F).

SAMPLER FUNCTION

The Sampler Function will not operate if PID is enabled. The Sampler Function enables pulsing of Discrete Output #1 after a determined volume of gas has flowed. Pressing the

[PAGE UP] key and then pressing the INS key will clear the Enable/Disable displayed state of the Sampler Function and the following the prompt will appear at the bottom of the menu: DO YOU WISH TO TURN THIS SIGNAL TO ITS ENABLED

(TRUE) STATE? If so, press the INS Key again; if not, type N.

SAMPLER VOLUME

The volume of gas which must pass before a pulse is generated is called the Sampler Volume.

This value is in MSCF with a default of 100 MSCF. To change the Sampler value, press the

PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.

SAMPLER PULSE WIDTH

The Sampler Pulse Width is the amount of time (in seconds) that the Discrete Output #1 will remain ON when a pulse is generated. The default value is 1 second. To change the value of the Sampler Pulse Width, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display. Type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.

DP LIVE

DP LIVE is the measured differential pressure.

SP LIVE

SP LIVE is the measured static pressure.

TEMP LIVE

Temp LIVE is the measured temperature.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-27

RATE/DAY

The Flow Rate per day value is Read Only data; it is equal to 24 times the present calculated flow rate per hour.

F.8.3.6 Nominations

The nomimations feature provides the user with the ability to set the TeleFlow to allocate precise amounts of gas flow during specific periods of time. These periods are called nomination periods . A nomination period may be set for any duration of time (not to exceed one month). The volume to be delivered (nominated) during a nomination period is the target .

The target may be specified in terms of volume or energy. The user sets a nomination period by keying in the desired day of the month and hour to begin the period and the desired day of the month and hour to end the period. The daily nomination feature is used if the user desires the same start/stop times every day. A TeleFlow programmed with a daily nomination, will ignore the programmed start and end day numbers and will perform the nomination in question at the same time once per day.

Figure F-27 Nominations Configuration Menu

The delivery of the nominated quantity (volume or energy during the nomination period) may be performed via one of the two unique schemes listed below.

The fast approach

The fast approach method permits full flow of gas through the meter in order to arrive at the target (volume or energy) as quickly as possible without regard to the programmed end time.

F-28 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

The PID method

The PID method sets the TeleFlow to calculate the time remaining in the nomination period and the remaining volume/energy required by the nomination and internally enables the PID flow control algorithm in order to hit the target volume/energy at exactly the prgrammed end time.

The user programs the TeleFlow to either close the valve upon reaching the target or leave it in its last position.

Nomination Operation

Enabling the Nomination Function

The nomination function runs once per calculation cycle after the volume and energy accumulations have been updated by the TeleFlow. To setup and enable this feature follow the steps below.

1. Setup of the nominations feature depends on the desired control mode selection, i.e., the Fast approach mode or PID mode. The default control mode for nomination is the Fast approach mode. If the desired control mode is the Fast approach mode, proceed to step 2; however, if the desired control mode selection is the PID mode, you must first program all the PID tuning parameters (see Section F.8.3.5 - Figure F-26) such as gain and integral. DO NOT enable the PID flow control algorithm or the TeleFlow will automatically disable nomination.

When properly configured the TeleFlow will automatically enable the PID flow control algorithm during nomination periods. When the menu of Figure F-26 has been configured and the nominations feature has been enabled, return to the Read/Write Configurable Data

Menu (Figure F-18).

2.. Select the Nominations Configuration Menu (Figure F-27) via the Nominations poke point on the Read/Write Configurable Data Menu (Figure F-18). The operator should select the

VERIFY/SET Time and Date poke point prior to making new entries.

A description of the menu entries (Figure F-27) used to implement the nomination function follows:

NOMINATION CONTROL - This section of the Nominations Configuration Menu provides the following six areas for nomination setup/selection:

Main function

The Main function selection is used to enable/disable the nomination function. If this signal is set to the disable state, nomination will not occur.

Quantity units

The Quantity units selection is used to set the target units as MCF or MMBTU.

Control mode

Control mode provides for the selection of either the Fast approach or PID modes of nomination operation.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-29

Stop mode

The Stop mode selection allows the user to automatically have the valve closed, i.e., shut-in on stop mode, or left in the last position upon reaching the target (programmed end period).

Daily only mode

When Daily mode is enabled, only the programmed start and end hours are used by the

TeleFlow; the Start/Stop days are ignored, i.e., nomination begins and ends within a 24 hour period every day.

Alarm at a level of

The Alarm at a level of setting can be configured as percentage of Volume (MCF) or Energy

(MMBTU). This feature allows the TeleFlow to provide an alarm (logical nomination alarm) or indication to an operator or computer that a specified amount of target has been reached.

The number entered (1 to 100) sets the percentage at which the logical nomination alarm will occur. If the dialout on nomination signal is set (see Figure F-36), the TeleFlow will initiate a phone dialout according to the normal operation of the dialout feature.call The status of this setting, i.e., whether or not a nomination alarm has occured, can be determined via the

Alarm Status Information Menu (see Figure F-38).

Status

The Status signal is an output of the nominations algorithm that indicates whether there is currently a nominations period in progress. The user may change the state of this signal to end an in progress nomination immediately, or to start the next period immediately (see

Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period).

CURRENT NOMINATION PERIOD - This section allows the operator to view the following information associated with a nomination which is curently in progress:

Start: day/hour

The actual time and day of the month when the current nomination period started is displayed. This may be the programmed time or the time at which an operator manually started a period.

Stop: day/hour

The programmed end time and day of the month at which the current nomination period will end. If using the Fast approach mode, the period may end sooner, i.e., when the target is reached. If using the daily nomination feature, the stop date (day) will show 0 to indicate that only the hour matters.

Target value

The Target value provides the value of Volume/Energy to be delivered during this period.

Amount delivered

The Amount Delivered reading provides the actual amount of volume/energy delivered so far during this period.

Percent elapsed time

This signal shows the percentage of time which has elapsed for the current nomination period, e.g., 4 hours into a 100 hour nomination period would cause this value to be 4.0.

F-30 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

Percent delivered

This signal provides the percentage of target delivered to this point in the current nomination period.

NEXT NOMINATION PERIOD - This section allows the operator to set/view the following parameters associated with the next nomination which is to be programmed (has been programmed): Note: New entries must be made prior to the ending of the current nomination period.

Start: day/hour

The actual start day of the month (1-31) and start hour (0-23) when the next nomination period is to start is displayed or entered. The start day is ignored if the daily nomination feature is enabled.

Stop: day/hour

The actual stop day of the month (1-31) and stop hour (1-23) when the next nomination period is to end is displayed or entered. The stop day is ignored if the daily nomination feature is enabled.

Target value

The Target value provides (is used to set) the value of Volume/Energy to be delivered during the next nomination period.

LAST NOMINATION PERIOD - This section allows the operator to view information associated with the last nomination period which was completed. The information displayed remains valid until the next time a nomination period ends (when the information is upgraded to reflect the new "last" nomination period. The start and end times stored here indicate the actual time that the nomination period ended, which is not necessarily the programmed time (because of the time required to close/open valves or complete other actions). The days are valid even if the daily nomination mode is active.

3. Program all the configuration items for the NEXT Nomination Period such as start and stop times and target value.

4. Set the desired parameters for NOMINATION CONTROL such as Quantity units , Control mode , Stop mode , Daily only mode and Alarm at a level of and then set the Main function signal to the Enable State.

5. If a radio or modem is to be used in conjunction with a "logical nomination alarm," access the

Radio Communications menu (Figure F-35) via the Radio and Modem Control poke point on the ON-Line Functions Menu (Figure F-12). See Section F.8.5 to configure the radio or modem for logical nomination alarms.

Beginning a Nomination Period

When no nomination period is in progress, the TeleFlow compares the NEXT start date and time to the current time. If the date and time match (or time only for the daily nomination mode), a new period is begun. The current time is copied into the CURRENT START signals, and the next target is copied into the current target. The accumulators for the current period are zeroed and

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-31

the current stop time is set to the next start time. If the PID mode is selected, a new flow setpoint is calculated and stored in the setpoint signal. The PID setpoint is recalculated every

15 minutes and whenever any parameter is changed.

Ending a Nomination Period

If the 'shut-in on stop' mode is in use, the current period end will end when the target accumulation is reached. At this time, the TeleFlow attempts to close the control valve. If PID control is being used, the setpoint is set to 0.0, the current cycle will ramp down accordingly.

When the flow rate reaches 0.0, the current cycle accumulations and the actual end time are copied into the LAST signals. If the valve fails to close, the volume will continue to accumulate until until the programmed end time. If the shut-in on stop mode is not in use, the nomination period continues until the programmed end time.

Changing the Nomination Target

To change the target of the next period, the user should change the NEXT TARGET signal. If the operator wishes to change the target of a current period already in progress (re-nominate), the CURRENT TARGET should be changed to the new value which reflects the total amount to be targeted for the period.

Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period

When no period is in progress, the user can immediately begin the NEXT period by setting the

Status signal to the ON state. The current start time will reflect the time that the user started the cycle. The target and stop times used will be those of the NEXT period. The user may immediately end a nomination period which is in progress by setting the Status signal to the OFF state. The current time will be stored as the LAST stop time.

READ/WRITE CONFIGURATION MENU

---------------------------- PROCEDURE ------------------------------------

USE THESE POKE POINTS TO:

READ A TELEFLOW CONFIGURATION INTO A FILE ON THE PC

WRITE A CONFIGURATION FILE FROM THE PC TO THE TELEFLOW

VIEW A CONFIGURATION FILE ALREADY READ.

THIS TELEFLOW HAS A METER ID OF ________

THE CONFIGURATION FILE WILL BE NAMED ________.CFG

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

View/Change Drive/Directory

Read Configuration From TELEFLOW

Write Configuration Into TELEFLOW

View the Configuration File

Select a Configuration File

Figure F-28 Read/Write Configuration Menu

F-32 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

F.8.3.7 Read/Write Configuration

Use the Read/Write Configuration Menu to:

1. Read a TeleFlow J configuration into a file on the PC.

2. Write a configuration file from the PC to the TeleFlow J .

3. View a configuration file already read.

F.8.4 Transmitter Calibration/Verification

The TRANSMITTER CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION MENU is accessed from the Transmitter

Calibration poke point on either the ON-LINE FUNCTIONS MENU (levels 5 & 6) or the

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS MENU (Level 4). This menu provides access to verify calibration procedures perform calibration procedures and Damping & Mode Control.

Selection of a Verification poke point automatically turns the calibration mode signal ON and invokes the appropriate Verification menu. When the calibration mode signal is turned ON, the

TeleFlow automatically freezes the DP, P, and T variables at there current value. Verification

Menus are identical except for the variable being verified.

The Calibration Menus have been customized to aid the Technician or Engineer who is performing or checking a TeleFlow J calibration(s). A Help Menu can be accessed by pressing F2.

The Help Menu displayed is dependent upon the screen you are in when you press the F2 key.

The Damping and Mode Control Menu provides access to the DP Floating Point Damping

Enable/Disable feature and the DP Floating Point Damping Time constant.

F.8.4.1 Verification

The Verification menus for DP, P, and T are virtually identical except for the variable being verified. Only the DP Verification menu will be described in this document.

The Verification menu contains the procedure describing how to perform the verification process. The live value for the variable being processed is displayed below the procedure. The verification procedure consists of applying a known test value to the variable being verified and waiting for the live value to stabilize. The ENTER key is used to indicate that this has occurred.

When the ENTER key is pressed, the user is prompted to enter the test value applied to the input. Entering the applied value causes an Audit/Event record to be written to the Teleflow.

This Audit/Event records contains an indication of which variable is being verified, the applied test value, and the actual live value.

The user may apply as many test values as needed.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-33

TRANSMITTER CALIBRATION / VERIFICATION

VERIFICATION PROCEDURES:

Verify Differential Pressure (DP) Calibration

Verify Static Pressure (P) Calibration

Verify Temperature (T) Calibration

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES:

Calibrate Differential Pressure (DP)

Calibrate Static Pressure (P)

Calibrate Temperature RTD (T)

Damping and Mode Control

Figure F-29 Transmitter Calibration/Verification Menu

VERIFY DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INPUT CALIBRATION

Procedure:

1 - Apply test value to DP, when live value is steady press ENTER.

2 - Enter the test value applied.

3 - Repeat steps 1 & 2 as required. (Typically, use test values of

0, 50, 100, 80, 20, 0 percent of scale.)

________________________________________________________________________

DP Live Value: __________ ________

_ Apply a test value to DP, when live value is steady press ENTER

See help menu (F2) for verification procedure.

Figure F-30 Verify Differential Pressure Input Calibration Menu

F.8.4.2 Calibration Procedures

Calibration of Differential Pressure

The differential pressure sensor of the transmitter is checked and calibrated as follows:

1. Vent the HI and LO input ports of the DP body to atmosphere to obtain a 0% differential.

F-34 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

2. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATE ZERO poke point and observe the LIVE DP VALUE.

3. Once the reading in the LIVE DP VALUE has stabilized, press the [INS] key to calibrate the DP Zero.

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (DP) CALIBRATION

LIVE DP VALUE: 0.000 inch H2O

( CALIBRATE ZERO

( CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN

See help menu (F2) for calibration procedure.

Figure F-31 Differential Pressure (DP) Calibration Menu

4. Connect a precision test pressure source (+.025%) to the HI port.

5. Apply a pressure to the HI port that is 15% to 100% of the transmitter's pressure range.

Example 1

If the differential range of the TeleFlow is 0 to 150 in H equivalent to 150 inH used.

2

O, 100% of the range would be

2

O. Any differential pressure (as-low-as 22.5 inH

2

O) could be

6. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN poke point.

7. Observe the LIVE DP VALUE field and note the applied pressure.

8. Once this value has stabilized, press the [INS] key.

9. Type in the applied pressure value in response to the prompt and press the [Ins] key.

Zero and Operating Span calibration is complete.

Note: All linearization has been performed at the factory and is not required.

Calibration of Static Pressure

Static pressure calibration is performed with a test pressure applied to the HI and LO port of the

DP body (the SP sensor is connected to the HI side of the DP body). This procedure is nearly identical to that described above for the Differential Pressure except that the test pressure source must be capable of providing up to the maximum value of the SP sensor (500 or 2000 psi types). The CALIBRATE ZERO point identified in Figure F-32 is checked with no pressure applied, while the CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN point is checked with pressures from 15% to 100% of the upper range limit of the SP sensor.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-35

STATIC PRESSURE (SP) CALIBRATION

LIVE SP VALUE: 0.000 PSI

CALIBRATE ZERO

CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN

See help menu (F2) for calibration procedure.

Figure F-32 Static Pressure (SP) Calibration Menu

Calibration of RTD Temperature

TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION OF RTD

SELECT DISPLAY UNITS

LIVE READING: +76.031 Degrees F

CALIBRATE ZERO (AT 100 OHMS)

CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN

ADJUST LIVE READING

Figure F-33 Temperature Calibration of RTD Menu

1. Disconnect the regular RTD sensor and connect a 100 Ohm (± .025%) precision resistor across the RTD terminals (which is equivalent to 32 F).

2. Move cursor to CALIBRATE ZERO poke point.

3. Observe LIVE T VALUE.

4. When LIVE T VALUE stabilizes press [INS] key to calibrate the RTD Zero.

5. Disconnect the resistor of step 1 and connect a 140 Ohm (± .025%) precision resistor across the RTD terminals (which is equivalent to 220 F).

6. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN poke point.

7. Observe LIVE T VALUE.

F-36 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

8. When LIVE T VALUE stabilizes press [INS] key to calibrate the RTD Operating Span.

9. If after re-connecting the unit to the process it is determined that the number in the LIVE

T VALUE field does not correlate with that measured by an external process monitoring device, offset compensation may be performed. Select the ADJUST LIVE READINGS poke point and press [INS]. This allows a linear shift of the RTD temperature span, e.g., if at 68 F the Live Reading value is 68.5

F, the error is .5

F. To correct this error enter

68 at the prompt.

F.8.4.3 Damping And Mode Control

The TeleFlow's firmware provides output damping selections which can be set on the menu of

Figure F-34.

DAMPING AND MODE CONTROL

DP Floating Point Damping: enabled/DISABLED

DP Floating Point Damping Time: 0.6 Secs.

Figure F-34 Damping and Mode Control Menu

The DP Floating Point Damping Time controls the rate at which the output responds to a given change of input. It is used to slow down the output response to a rapid or oscillatory change of the measured variable. The indicated value changes 63% of the difference between the "present measured pressure" and the "present indicated pressure" in one damping time period. It would take 5 times the DP Floating Point Damping Time for the "present indicated pressure" to equal the "present measured pressure" (if a change in the "present measured pressure" didn't occur).

An increase in the DP Floating Point Damping Time results in an increase in smoothing the input data.

F.8.5 Radio Communications Setup Menu

The Radio Communications Set-up Menu is accessible for users at security level 6 by selecting the Radio and Modem Control poke point on the On-Line Functions Menu. The information on this display is Read/Write for level 6.

Hourly and Local set-up columns are provided to facilitate Hourly (timed) or Local control of the

TeleFlow J radio. Radio Enable is implemented by providing control of the Auxiliary Power

Output.

ENABLE

Is used to enable Hourly or Local control of the radio. Enabling the Hourly radio scheduling causes the TeleFlow J to automatically turn on the radio (via the auxiliary power output) once per hour. Enabling the Local turn-on causes the TeleFlow J to immediately turn on the radio, and then reset the enable signal (back to the disable state). To Enable either feature, place the cursor on the appropriate selection and press the Page Up key followed by pressing

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-37

the Insert key. Select Y from the following message: Do you wish to turn this signal to its

Enable (TRUE) state? Y/N

REMAIN ACTIVE FOR

Is the amount of time that the radio will be enabled (at the selected time), i.e., the "Enabled

Time," before it will shutoff due to the lack of a received radio poll.

TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER

Is the amount of time that the radio will remain enabled after successful communications have been established and completed. The TeleFlow J radio will remain active for the time period specified under TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER before shutting down. If during this period another message is received, the radio will remain active.

RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SETUP

HOURLY LOCAL

ENABLE

REMAIN ACTIVE FOR

TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER

POLL ENABLE START HOUR

START OFFSET INTO HOUR

START OFFSET MINUTES

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______ ______

______ ______

POLL ENABLE END HOUR ______

______ ______

______ START OFFSET SECONDS ______

POLL TIME PER NODE

POLL TIME PER GROUP ______

______

AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT DEFAULT

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

RADIO SENSING

INTERVAL

LISTEN

______

______

______

SECS

______ MSECS

RTS DELAY MODE ______

RTS TRANSMIT DELAY ______ ______

START HOUR ______

END HOUR ______

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

RADIO SHUTDOWN ______

PRESS F8 FOR MODEM DIAL SETUP

Figure F-35 Radio Communications Setup Menu

START OFFSET MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS

These are calculated variables which specify the time (On Time) within each hour that the radio will be enabled. This time is derived as follows: On Time = [(Time Per Node x (Local

Address -1)) + (Time Per Group x Group Number) + Start Offset Into Hour]. If the minutes is set to 12 and the seconds is set to 42, the radio will be turned on at 12 minutes and 42 seconds after the hour. These signals may be control inhibited for testing purposes. If the user control inhibits these signals, the user-entered time will determine when the radio is turned on, and the calculated values will be ignored by the TeleFlow J .

POLL ENABLE START HOUR & POLL ENABLE END HOUR

Specifies the 0 to 23 hour time period within which the TeleFlow J radio Hourly Enable feature will be active. The radio will be enabled once per hour within this time period.

F-38 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

These signals may be used to permit polling only during a specific time frame (such as daylight or normal office hours) each day. This will save the power required to turn on the radio when polling is desired.

START OFFSET INTO HOUR

Specifies a user supplied offset which is used when computing the radio "On Time." The

Start Time Offset is one of the factors used to calculate the "On Time" (see START OFFSET

MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS).

POLL TIME PER NODE

Sets the duration of time (in seconds) allocated for communications per node. The Poll Time

Per Node time is one of the factors used to calculate the "On Time" (see START OFFSET

MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS).

POLL TIME PER GROUP

Sets the duration of time (in seconds) allocated for communications per group. The Poll

Time Per Group time is one of the factors used to calculate the "On Time" (see START

OFFSET MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS).

AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT DEFAULT

Determines if the TeleFlow's Auxiliary Power Output is set ON or OFF when power is initially applied to the TeleFlow. This allows radios or modems to be powered up initially and then turn-off after a 'no comm' interval.

RTS DELAY MODE (Network Port)

Select either TIMER or CTS.

RTS TRANSMIT DELAY (Network Port)

Set the Delay Time when the mode is TIMER.

RADIO SHUTDOWN

Is used to force a radio to turn-off. When the host issues this command, the remote will keep the radio on just long enough to reply back to the master. Issue this command to save battery power at a remote TeleFlow. This is the last command you can send to a remote unit.

RADIO SENSING

Radio sensing allows a user to activate the radio for very short time intervals (specified in milliseconds under LISTEN) every so many seconds (specified in seconds under INTERVAL) to 'sense' a valid BSAP message on the radio's carrier frequency. If a message is not detected, the radio is deactivated. If a message is detected, the radio is left activated until it responds, after which it remains ON for another LISTEN time interval. If no more valid messages are detected, the radio returns to 'sense' mode. This mode allows the system to use as little energy as possible to detect traffic throughout the day. Energy usage depends on the activation time and activation rate (INTERVAL). Assuming a 1 watt radio then a 200 millisecond listening period every 5 seconds is equivalent to .04 watts. Users can configure the Interval and Rate (Listening period) to suit their energy needs. Radio Sensing occurs between the START HOUR and END HOUR specified by the operator.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-39

MODEM AND DIAL-OUT SETUP

DIAL ENABLE

MODEM INITIALIZATION

______

_________________________________________

PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER _____________________________

ALTERNATE PHONE NUMBER _____________________________

DIAL ATTEMPTS PER HOUR ______

----------------------------------- DIAL-OUT CONDITIONS ----------------------------------------

LOW FLOW CUTOFF ALARM ______ BACKFLOW ALARM ______

TRANSMITTER FAILURE ______ RAM BATTERY LOW ALARM ______

FLOATING POINT ERROR ______ SELF-CHECK FAILURE ______

DIFF PRESSURE ALARM ______ STATIC PRESSURE ALARM ______

TEMPERATURE ALARM ______ FLOW RATE ALARM ______

BATTERY VOLTAGE ALARM ______ AUXILIARY INPUT ALARM ______

BATTERY OVERCHARGE ALARM ______ NOMINATION ______

Figure F-36 Modem Configuration & Dial-Out Setup Menu

F.8.5.1 Modem Configuration And Dial-Out Setup Menu

The menu of Figure F-36 provides for modem communications and dial-out setup. This menu is accessed from the Radio Communications Setup Menu (Figure F-35).

If the internal 9600 bps modem is installed, this menu can be used to configure automatic dialout when an alarm occurs.

Enable the conditions at which dial-out should occur, enter the primary and alternate phone numbers (example: 860-945-2200), then set Dial Enable to Enable.

The equipment at the location being dialed MUST be able to recognize the call as coming from a remote and then must be able to poll for alarm information from the TeleFlow J .

DIAL ENABLE

After the rest of this menu has been set up, set this signal to ENABLE to activate automatic dial-out.

MODEM INITIALIZATION

This string has been set to a default value for the internal 9600 bps modem, but it can be revised if necessary.

PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER

This is the number that will be called first when automatic dial-out is triggered by an enabled alarm condition. If three tries are unsuccessful, the secondary number is called.

ALTERNATE PHONE NUMBER

This number is called if the primary number cannot be reached. If three tries are unsuccessful, calling stops.

F-40 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

DIAL ATTEMPTS PER HOUR

Regardless of the number of enabled alarms that have occurred, the system will not attempt to call out each hour more than the number of times specified here, i.e., 3 tries per attempt specified). This number is thus used to manage the energy drain from a battery powered system by limiting the number of times per hour that the modem can be 'awakened' to its fullpower mode.

Alarms not reported in one hour will be reported in the next hour.

F.8.6

Serial Port Setup Menu

The Serial Port Setup Menu is accessible from the On-Line Functions Menu for users at security level 5 or 6. Information on this display is Read/Write for both level 5 and level 6.

PORT TYPE

Network Port communications protocol; BSAP.

LOCAL BAUD RATE

The baud rate of the Local Port.

NETWORK BAUD

The baud rate of the Network Port.

SERIAL PORT SETUP

Port Type BSAP

Local Baud Rate ______ ______

Network Baud Rate ______ ______

RTS Delay Mode ______

RTS Transmit Delay ______ ______

USE PgUp TO CLEAR FIELD

Figure F-37 Serial Port Setup Menu

RTS DELAY MODE (Network Port)

The default mode is TIMER, meaning that the TeleFlow will assert RTS but ignor CTS and instead wait for a time interval before sending characters on the serial port. The wait-time interval is established by the value of the RTS TRANSMIT DELAY setting.

When the RTS DELAY MODE is changed to CTS, the TeleFlow asserts RTS and then waits for CTS to be 'true' before sending characters. Always use the CTS mode when the 9600 bps internal modem is being used for automatic dial-out.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-41

RTS TRANSMIT DELAY (Network Port)

Set the Delay Time when the mode is TIMER.

F.8.7 Alarm Status Information Menu

The Alarm Status Display is accessed from the Main Menu for security levels 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. The information on this display is Read Only from any level.

DIFF PRESS

Indicates the alarm state of the differential pressure input (OKAY or ALARM).

STATIC PRESS

Indicates the alarm state of the static pressure input (OKAY or ALARM).

FLOWING TEMP

Indicates the alarm state of the temperature input (OKAY or ALARM).

FLOW RATE

Indicates the status of the flow rate per hour. If the flow rate per hour is outside the limits for high alarm and low alarm, set on the Alarm Configuration Menu (see Figure F-24), this reading will indicate ALARM.

ALARM STATUS INFORMATION

DIFF PRESS ALARM/ OKAY

STATIC PRESS

FLOWING TEMP

ALARM/

ALARM/

OKAY

OKAY

FLOW RATE

SYSTEM VOLTAGE

RAM BATTERY

BATTERY OVERCHARGE

ALARM/

ALARM/

ALARM/

ALARM/

OKAY

OKAY

OKAY

OKAY

AUXILIARY INPUT

NOMINATIONS

ALARM /OKAY

ALARM/ OKAY

Figure F-38 Alarm Status Information Menu

SYSTEM VOLTAGE

The supply voltage (= Greater Power Source, PWR1 or PWR2) to the TeleFlow is monitored internally and this reading will indicate ALARM if the voltage falls below 6 volts (default) or

OKAY when the voltage rises above 6.5 volts (default). These limits are user configurable

(see Figure F-24 - Alarm Configuration Menu Page 2 of 3).

F-42 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

RAM BATTERY

The internal RAM backup battery on the CPU board is tested every 4 seconds or the calculation interval, whichever is slower. If the voltage is less than 3.0 volts then this reading will indicate ALARM, otherwise it reads OKAY.

BATTERY OVERCHARGE

Indicates tahe the charging software has detected an overcharge condition.

AUXILIARY INPUT

Indicates the status of the Auxiliary Input. If the value of the auxiliary input falls outside the limits for high alarm and low alarm, set on the Alarm Configuration Menu (see Figure

F-24), this reading will indicate ALARM.

NOMINATION

Indicates the status of the current nomination period. Prior to a nomination value being reached, the volume will be compared to a configured alarm level. An alarm will be generated when the volume reaches or exceeds the defined level.

F.8.8 Set Time Menu

The Set Time Menu (not shown) allows the user to set the time in the TeleFlow J . The time in the PC is sent to the TeleFlow J on command. Note: Make sure that the current time in the

PC is correct before invoking this function.

F.8.9 Special Functions Menu

The Special Functions Menu is accessed from the On-Line Functions Menu for users at security level 6.

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

( Reset Hardware

( Change Local Address

( Change Group Number

( Charge Regulator set-up

( List Configuration

( Archive Edit

Figure F-39 Special Functions Menu

The Special Functions Menu of Figure F-39 is used to perform certain configuration tasks which may be necessary, such as resetting the TeleFlow J hardware to its default conditions, or changing the local address of the unit. This menu provides the following selections:

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-43

F.8.9.1 Reset Hardware

Select this poke point to call up the Reset Node Menu. This menu allows you to Reset the

TeleFlow to factory default conditions. When a Hardware Reset occurs all stored (archived) data (input and setup) are lost.

F.8.9.2 Change Local Address

Select this point to change the TeleFlow node address used for local (PC to TeleFlow) or

(TeleFlow to BSAP Network) communications. The factory default address is 1. There are no address switches in the TeleFlow; the address may only be changed by this poke point. Address changes are usually required when the TeleFlow is placed in a network as a slave node to other

Bristol Babcock devices, such as the DPC 3330.

F.8.9.3 Change Group Nnumber

The group Number is used with the Expanded BSAP Communications option. The value of this number may be from 1 to 127. The Group Number is only supported on the Network Port.

F.8.9.4 Charge Regulator Set-up

The menu of Figure F-40 (Charge Regulator Setup Menu) is used to configure the charging characteristics of the battery used in conjunction with the Solar Panel option. Factory default settings are shown in Figure F-40. Configuration of the battery charge parameters may be accomplished as follows:

To disable the battery charge regulator, place the cursor on Enable and press the Page Up key followed by pressing the Insert key. Select N from the following message: Do you wish to turn this signal to its Disable (FALSE) state? Y/N.

REGULATOR DELAY

Is the time that the charge regulator stays active for after reaching the hysteresis voltage.

NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE

Should be set to 6 or 12 volts depending on the battery installed in the TeleFlow J . Changing this value from 12 to 6 volts will cause the charge voltage value to change from 14.4 to 7.2

volts and the Temp. Coefficient to change from 20 to 10 mv/deg.

CHARGE VOLTAGE

Is the battery voltage level which when exceeded causes the charge regulator to turn on

Auxiliary Power (or DTR when a modem is present) to dissipate excess energy from the solar panel. The charge voltage is specified for an ambient temperature of 77 F. This value will change as the value of the NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE changes.

TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT

Is the change in CHARGE VOLTAGE with ambient temperature. The value (negative) is expressed in mv/deg (F) and will be 20 mv/deg (default) for a 12 volt battery and 10 mv/deg

(default) for a 6 volt battery. These defaults will be set automatically when the NOMINAL

BATTERY VOLTAGE is set.

F-44 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

Note: These values affect the "Threshold Voltage," i.e., the battery voltage level at which the charge regulator becomes active (connects a load to dissipate excess energy produced by the solar panel). An increase in the "Threshold Voltage" occurs with a decrease in temperature, and vice-versa. The Threshold Voltage (V according to the following equation: V

THRESHOLD

THRESHOLD

) is calculated by the TeleFlow firmware

= V

77

- (V

TC

. (T

BOARD

- 77) where:

V

V

V

THRESHOLD

77

TC

is the temperature compensated threshold voltage.

is the threshold voltage at 77 --- F (25 --- C) = 14.4V (12V Battery) or 7.2V (6V Battery).

is the temperature coefficient = 20mV (12V Battery) or 10mV (6V Battery). The temperature coefficient is always negative (when temperature increases, the threshold voltage descreases). The temperature coefficient is entered as a positive value; so it is subtracted in the formula.

T board

is the TeleFlow CPU board temperature in degrees F. 77 is subtracted from this number to normalize the equation to 0 degrees F.

CHARGE REGULATOR SETUP

WARNING!! The following parameters are related to the type of battery supplied with the unit. Modification of these parameters

should only be performed by personnel knowledgeable of the

battery system installed.

CHARGE REGULATOR

REGULATOR DELAY

Enabl

30 Min

NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE 12 Volts

CHARGE VOLTAGE 14.4 Volts

TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT 20 mv/deg

Figure F-40 Charge Regulator Setup Menu

If the calculated threshold voltage is greater than the ceiling voltage, the ceiling voltage is substituted. The ceiling voltage helps guard against overvoltage which might occur at cold temperaturs. Every second, the battery voltage is compared to the threshold voltage. If the battery voltage exceeds the threshold voltage, the regulator becomes active. Under normal conditions, the threshold voltage is reached only when the battery is at or near full charge.

The regulator goes from active to inactive when any of the following conditions occur: a) The delay period elapses after the battery voltage has dropped below the hysteresis voltage.

b) The battery voltage drops below the floor voltage.

c) The user disables the charge regulator.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-45

Table F-1 Charge Regulator Set-Up Assignment

Term

Regulator enabled

Threshold Voltage (@ 77 F)

Hysteresis voltage

Delay period

Temperature coefficient

Floor voltage

Ceiling voltage

6V

Yes

7.2V

Threshold - (0.5V)

30 Min.

10mV/ F

6.5V

8.5V

12V

Yes

14.4V

User

User, 6/12 Switch

Threshold - (1V) Fixed

30 Min.

20mV/ F

13.0V

16V

User

Changed By

User, 6/12V Switch

Fixed

Fixed

F.8.9.5 List Configuration

This menu allows a user to edit the content of the signal lists that are in the TeleFlow, adding or deleting signals as needed. The lists available for editing are the LCD Display list #50,

General Purpose lists #51, #52 and #53, and the Event Exclusion list #60 (Firmware level 1.3

or later). An edited list can be saved in a file in the PC and recalled. When a list is saved in a file the list number is removed and the file then contains a general purpose table of signal names. This allows a user to edit a list once, save it in a file, then recall the file and write the contents to the same list in a different TeleFlow. Because the file has no special list number it can be written to any of the editable lists in the TeleFlow.

When a list is displayed on this menu, there are numbered poke points on the left and name fields on the right. To INSERT a signal, move the cursor to any poke point and press the Enter key or the Ins key to insert a blank field and move the other names down, then type in the name and press the Enter key. TMS will reject an invalid signal name. To DELETE a signal, move the cursor to the name field, press the PgDn key to clear the field, then press the Enter key; all signals will move up one position. To MODIFY a signal name, move the cursor to the name field and press the PgDn key, type in the new name and press the Enter key.

List 50 in the TeleFlow is the LCD Display list, i.e., the signals in this list are those that scroll by in the display when it is activated. Lists 51 through 53 are general purpose lists that can be used as custom data lists to be read via the Network Port. List 60 is the Event Exclusion list, i.e., signals in this list will NOT cause an entry in the Event Log when their values are changed.

Candidates for this list are signals that are updated frequently from the Network Port such that the Event Log would be quickly filled with only their changes.

F.8.9.6 Archive Editing

This menu allows a user to edit the content and size of the three Archive files in the TeleFlow by editing their respective Archive File Definitions. When editing is completed, all three Archive file definitions can be saved to a PC file. A PC file can be written directly to the TeleFlow. This allows a user to edit Archive file definitions once, save them in a file, then write the file contents to a different TeleFlow.

F-46 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

Note: When an edited Archive file is written to the TeleFlow, or if a PC file is written to the

TeleFlow, all existing Archive files (containing the historical record to that time) are distroyed. Do not make changes without saving the existing Archive data!

Note: TMS is delivered with default templates (.UHL files) used for the conversion of collected

Archive files to ASCII files. When Archives are edited the user must create new templates using the UOI software and must be sure that all installations and PC's are using the revised templates.

Overview

A TeleFlow (or Telecorr) has three Archive files - Daily, Hourly, and Trending (15 minute). These archives cannot be removed but their content can be changed using the On-line Archive editing function. To do archive editing, use the Teleflow Menu System (TMS), select the SPECIAL

FUNCTIONS menu, then select the ARCHIVE EDIT function.

Archives contain a sequence of records, each being stored in the archive at the end of the archive’s time interval (Daily, Hourly, 15 min). Records can contain up to 20 data fields with a data field containing one of the following:

ACCOL Analog signal - 4 byte

ACCOL Logical signal - 1 byte

Local Sequence number - 2 byte

Global Sequence number - 2 byte

Julian time - 4 byte

Julian time - 5 byte

The Archive editor only allows selection of ACCOL Analog or Logical signals for data fields.

Data fields containing ACCOL Analog signals can have the following characteristics:

Average of signal for the time interval flow time

Straight time average over the interval

Average square root of signal for the interval flow time

Square of the average square root

Instantaneous value of signal at the start? end? of the interval

Minimum value recorded during the interval

Maximum value recorded during the interval

Accumulation over the interval with automatic reset at the end of the interval

Integral of signal over flow time in units of hours

Teleflow archives are Historical archives and as such they always contain a minimum of three data items; Julian time, Local sequence number and Global sequence number.

Editing Archives In The Product

Archives are edited by changing their definition. The main ARCHIVE EDIT (ARCED) menu allows a choice of either File or Product input; File input is used when an Archive’s definition has been saved on disk, Product input is used when the definition is being changed in the

Teleflow. When Product is selected all the archives in the product will be listed on the screen.

To edit a single archive move the cursor to the EDIT FILE poke point and press ENTER; type the archive number in response to the prompt and the display will then show all the Field definitions for a record in that archive. Use the F5 (INSERT), F6(DELETE), or F7(CHANGE) keys to modify

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-47

the Field definitions of the record. The number of records in the archive can be changed using the poke point on the top line of the menu.

All editing to this point has been done on a copy of the archive in the PC. Select WRITE

DEFINITION, and the new archive will be written to the product.

Repeat the above for all archives that are to be changed.

When archive editing is complete all the Archive definitions in the product can be saved in a PC file for later reference. To save the definitions move to the main ARCED menu and select WRITE

TO FILE. Type in a unique file base name in response to the prompt; all the archive definitions in the product will be read (whether they were edited or not) and saved in the file under the name given with an extension of .def.

Editing Archive Definitions In Files

One or more files containing Archive definitions may reside on the PC. These definitions can be displayed on the edit menus when File input is selected. Files can only be reviewed - file content cannot be edited. When FILE INPUT is selected the local directory is searched for files with the extension .def, and the file names are listed on the screen so that one can be selected.

Writing Files To A Product

Archive definitions saved in a file can be written to a product from the ARCED menu by selecting

WRITE FILE TO PRODUCT. The local directory is searched for files with the extension .def, and those file names are displayed so that one can be selected. When a file is selected all the archive definitions in the file are written to the product. This function allows archives to be edited and checked on one product and then saved to a file which can then be written to other products when necessary.

Archive Memory Usage

The Archive Editor can be used to change both the size of a record (number of data fields) and the number of records in an archive. When an archive that exceeds the available RAM is written back to the Teleflow the firmware will examine it and adjust it to fit in the available memory by decreasing the number of records. The record count is can be checked on the Archive editor

Main menu after the archive has been written to the Teleflow.

The number of records should be maintained at a reasonable number for the archive involved i.e., a record in the Daily Archive is for a 24 hour interval and a typical record count is 35 which is a little more than 1 month of entries. Sometimes 70 is used to obtain in excess of two months total when a site is visited infrequently.

The interval for the Hourly Archive is 1 hour, and for 35 days the required record count is typically 35 * 24 = 840 records, 1680 records for 70 days.

For the 15 minute Trending Archive, the count is typically 4 * 24 * 35 = 3360 records, 6720 for

70 days.

Effect On TMS Archive Conversion To ASCII

The Teleflow Menu System (TMS) is delivered with a Teleflow.UHL file containing templates that provide formatting information to the UCS conversion function when collected archive files

F-48 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

are converted to ASCII text. This Teleflow.UHL file was created by Bristol to match the archive file in the Teleflow when it was manufactured and as such it expects data to be in specific locations in the file. When archives are edited and their size and/or content changes a new UHL must be created for the new archive so that conversion will be done correctly. New UHL files are generated using the Bristol UHS Linker.

When the template definition is changed in a UHS file users must remember that the first three data fields in a collected archive contain Julian date, Local sequence number and Global sequence number. The Teleflow UHS file does not use the sequence numbers so the first data item column statement references ‘column’ 4 of the file. To convert the sequences numbers for display column statements must be added that reference columns 2 and 3.

Effect Of Different Archive Sizes On TMS Usage

When Teleflow Archive file sizes are changed and new UHS files are created the user has in effect accepted both a bookkeeping and a file management responsibility.

The bookkeeping part involves making sure that all Teleflows that are purchased from Bristol receive the revised Archive sizes before being installed in the field. Users must also be aware that Teleflows returned to Bristol from the field for repair may have been restored to factory defaults during the repair process and may need to have new Archive sizes set.

The file management part involves making sure that all TMS users have the correct UHL file to use for conversion to ASCII and that ‘custom’ files have a unique name other than ‘Teleflow’.

When custom UHS files are created they should not retain the ‘Teleflow’ file base name as this has potential for causing confusion should a set of unrevised files with the same name be used mistakenly. It is much better to rename the Teleflow.UMS, UCS, and UHS files and then use them by starting TMS using the ‘specific file’ command switch; this requires typing TMS fFNAME instead of just TMS.

For example, assume that a custom UHS file has been created and the UHS, UCS, and UMS files have been renamed TFFX.UHS, .UCS and UMS respectively. All three have been linked using the UMS, UCS, and UHS Linkers to produce TFFX.UML, UCL and UHL files. The command line used to start TMS will now be TMS -fTFFX; this tells TMS to look for files named TFFX instead of Teleflow.

F.8.10 Security Maintenance

The menu of Figure F-41 (Signal Passcode Management Menu) lists all the security codes which were read from the TeleFlow and provides poke point functions to:

* Transfer security codes from this display to the TeleFlow.

* Transfer security codes from this display to a PC file SECAMS.DAT.

* Read a PC security file SECAMS.DAT into this display.

* Read the security codes from the TeleFlow and display them.

The TeleFlow is shipped with a default security code of name=SYSTEM, password=666666, access=6. A security code consists of a name/password/access-level combination. New security codes are entered on this display.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-49

Entering Security Codes

Up to 16 security codes can be stored in the TeleFlow. The codes are typed into fields of this display as required. By selecting the "Write Node" poke point and pressing the [INS] key, the entire contents of the display will be transferred to the TeleFlow. To modify a user entry, move the cursor to a blank line under the USER NAME column, type in the user name, and press

[INS]. Then, move the cursor over to the PASSCODE column, type in the desired password, and press [INS]. Move the cursor to the ACCESS column and enter the appropriate access level.

Repeat this procedure for each code entry.

Access Levels

Six levels are provided. Level 6 access is typically reserved for engineers or technicians who require full access to all TeleFlow functions and parameters including special functions and security maintenance. Level 5 access provides for read/write configuration constants, collect logs, read gas flow information, perform transmitter calibration, read alarm status infor-mation, read serial port information, and set date and time. Level 4 is intended for those who are required to adjust (read/write) configuration data, plot trend data, view alarm data, collect logs and perform transmitter calibration functions. Level 3 is reserved for those requiring read-only access to view configuration data, plot trend data, view alarm data, and collect logs. Level 2 users are allowed read-only access to view configuration data and plot trend data. The access level used at sign-on time determines the size of the ENTRY MENU after sign-on is completed.

Security Code Storage

All security codes are stored in the TeleFlow, not the PC, so each TeleFlow can have a unique set of personnel who are permitted access. Use the Write Node point to write the codes from the display to the TeleFlow.

In cases where a number of TeleFlow units will store the same name/password/access combinations, the created table can be saved in a PC file and recalled at the next site for storage in the TeleFlow, thus eliminating the need to retype. For example, one 'master' table can be created and saved on the PC at one site, and then called up at each individual TeleFlow site, modified as needed and then stored in the TeleFlow. Use the Write File point to write the security codes to a PC file.

Security Code Maintenance

Security codes are read from the TeleFlow at sign-on time and then displayed. To retrieve codes from a PC file use the Read File poke point; the codes will be read from the PC file into the display. Codes can be read from the TeleFlow to the display using the Read Node poke point.

Figure F-41 provides the following poke points:

READ NODE

Use this to read the security codes from the EGMC and display them.

READ FILE

Read the SECAMS.DAT file and display the security codes.

F-50 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

WRITE NODE

Write the present display contents to the EGMC to store them.

WRITE FILE

Write the present display contents to a SECAMS.DAT file in the PC.

SIGNAL PASSCODE MANAGEMENT

Read File Write Node Read Node

USER NAME PASSCODE ACCESS USER NAME

Write File

PASSCODE ACCESS

1 SYSTEM____ 666666

2 __________ ______

3 __________ ______

4 __________ ______

5 __________ ______

6 __________ ______

7 __________ ______

8 __________ ______

6

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

9 __________ ______

10 __________ ______

11 __________ ______

12 __________ ______

13 __________ ______

14 __________ ______

15 __________ ______

16 __________ ______

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

Figure F-41 Passcode Management Menu

F.8.11 Maintenance Operations

(Security Level 4)

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS MENU

Transmitter Calibration

Perform Plate Change

Sign-off and Exit

Figure F-42 Maintenance Operations Menu

The Maintenance Operations Menu (Figure F-42) is accessible to users at security level 4. This menu provides two poke point; Transmitter Calibration (see Section F.8.4) and Perform Plate

Change. When the Perform Plate Change poke point has been selected, the Orifice Plate Change

Menu (Figure F-43) will appear.

F.9 OFF LINE FUNCTIONS

The Off-line Functions menu is accessed if the Teleflow Menu System is started in Off-line mode.

The Off-line functions are limited conversion, display and/or printing reports associated with the

Archive, Audit/Event and Configuration Log data. There is no security associated with the Offline functions. The Off-Line Functions Menu can be accessed by entering TMS OFF at the TMS prompt.

CI-3530-10B/20B Using TMS / F-51

ORIFICE PLATE CHANGE

The DP, SP, and T values have been Frozen to their current values.

These values will be Unfrozen upon exiting from this menu.

When the Orifice Plate has been changed, enter the new value for the

Orifice Plate Diameter below and then exit this menu.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Orifice Plate Diameter: --7.00 Inches

Figure F-43 Orifice Plate Change Menu

OFF-LINE FUNCTIONS MENU

( Enter log tag name ( View/Change Drive/Directory

CONVERT DISPLAY PRINT

Combo Log

(

(Daily, Hourly, Audit, Config)

( (

Daily Log

(

Periodic Log

(

Alarm/Event Log

(

Configuration Log

(

(

(

(

(

Access Trend Data Plotting

(

Exit

(

(

(

(

Figure F-44 Off-Line Functions Menu

F-52 / Using TMS CI-3530-10B/20B

Addendum - Using the Windows™ UOI /TMS/SmartKit Shell

This addendum applies to the following manuals:

• UOI Configuration Manual (document# D5074)

• UOI Operator Manual (document# D5075)

• Selected TeleFlow/TeleCorrector manuals (CI-3530-10x, CI-3530-20x, CI-3530-50x)

• SmartKit Manual (document# CI-3508-99x)

What is the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell?

The Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell is an Open BSI utility which allows textbased menus (including UOI, TMS and SmartKit menus) to be used in a window. This window supports the use of the mouse to navigate through the menus rather than the standard keyboard-based interface of UOI, TMS and SmartKit.

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

1 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

IMPORTANT

This addendum only describes how to use the shell to alter the appearance of your menus, and navigate between them. This document is a supplement to (not a replacement for) the manuals accompanying the UOI, TMS, and SmartKit software:

• For detailed information on how to create UOI menus using the UOI tools, see the

UOI Configuration Manual (document# D5074). Also see the UOI Operator Manual

(document# D5075).

• For information on how to use TMS and its associated menus, see the TeleFlow hardware manuals for those units which may be used with TMS menus (CI-3530-

10x, CI-3530-20x, CI-3530-50x).

• For information on how to use the SmartKit software, see the Smartkit Manual

(document# CI-3508-99-x).

Software Requirements / Installation

• Windows™ NT 4.0 or Windows™ 95/98

• Open BSI Utilities 3.21 or newer

The Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell (WIN UOI) is installed from a single diskette.

Before You Begin

Before attempting to run the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell you must have a set of menus already defined. The menus can be either:

• a full set of menus already compiled and linked into a UML file. These could be menus you created and compiled and linked yourself using the standard UOI tools, or it could be a set of menus which were included with a Bristol Babcock product, such as the TeleFlow Menu System (TMS).

• simple menus you created yourself using an ASCII text editor, and saved in a UOI

Menu Source file (*.UMS). These menus must follow the syntax rules defined in the

UOI Configuration Manual (document# D5074). The UMS file can be compiled and linked within Windows™ UOI to generate a UML file.

• Standard pre-defined menus which are sent directly from the hardware device, such as SmartKit menus.

You must have already started NetView and established Open BSI communications with your network of controllers (RTUs). Alternatively, you could use LocalView for

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

2 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Open BSI communication with a single RTU. For information on configuring Open BSI communications see the Open BSI Utilities Manual (document# D5081).

To start Open BSI communications from the command line, the following command sequence may be entered:

drive\openbsi_install_path\BSAUTO -INSTALL drive\accol_dir\NDFname where drive is the drive letter, followed by a ’:’ openbsi_install_path is the Open BSI installation path on this PC accol_dir

NDFname is the path of the ACCOL directory on this PC is the complete Network Definition File name.

For example:

C:\>C:\openbsi\BSAUTO -INSTALL C:\ACCOL\CURRENT.NDF

Application Notes For Communication with a 3508 TeleTrans Transmitter Using the 1200 BAUD FSK Modem

In order to use the WIN UOI\TMS\Smartkit shell to communicate with the 3508

TeleTrans Transmitter using the 1200 BAUD FSK modem, you must do the following, first:

1.

Edit the file BSBSAP.INI (This file is located in the WINNT directory for NT users, or the WINDOWS directory on Windows™ 98 workstations.) In the file, set the DTR parameter in the [COMM] section of the file to 'DTR=1'.

2.

In NetView, call up the Line Properties dialog box for the communication line being used, and make sure that you have 1 "Back Pad" character, and that the "Modem" option is checked.

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

3 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

Starting the Shell

Double-click on the program WINUOI.EXE in Windows™ Explorer.

A screen, similar to that shown below, will appear:

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

4 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Choosing Which Application to Run in the Shell

Only one application program (UOI, TMS, or SmartKit) can run in the shell at any one time.

When you first start the shell, the Start Application dialog box will appear to allow you to select which application you want to run.

If you want to look at UOI menus, click on

“UOI Application”.

If you want to use the TeleFlow™ Menu

System (TMS), click on “TMS Application”.

If you want to run the SmartKit program for use with the 3508-series transmitter, click on

“SmartKit Application”.

When you have selected the desired application, click on the [Start] button. The selected application will be loaded within the shell, and the application’s name will be displayed in the title bar.

If you want to specify that the current application should always be loaded when starting the shell, thereby bypassing the Start Application dialog box, check the

“Application Name” check box in the Application Settings dialog box, and click on

[Save As Default Settings]. The current application will be loaded the next time you start the shell, allowing you to skip the Start Application dialog box.

Starting WINUOI from the DOS Command Line

WINUOI can also be started from the DOS command line. The syntax for this command is:

WINUOI –a application_name –n nodename where:

-a application specifies the WINUOI application to be started.

Choices for application are: ‘UOI’, ‘TMS’ or ‘SMARTKIT’.

NOTE: The –a and application must be separated by a space.

-n node specifies the target node name where node is the controller

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

5 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

name, as specified in NETTOP or NetView. NOTE: The –n and node must be separated by a space.

Example: C:\>WINUOI –a TMS –n RPC3

Shutting Down the Current Application / Choosing A New Application to Run

Sometimes, it may be convenient to shut down the current application, and call up a different one. (For example, you may decide you want to exit out of TMS, and call up SmartKit.) If you decide you want to stop the current application, and load a new one into the shell, you can click on the ‘New Application’ icon, shown at left, or click on the following menu sequence: Application

Å

New

You will be prompted to confirm that you want to shut down the current application. Click on the [Yes] button to shut it down; this will call up the Start

Application dialog box to allow you select a new application to run.

Alternatively, you can click on the [No] button to return to the current application.

Selecting the Node with Which You Want to Communicate

Once your selected application starts, the Select New Node dialog box will prompt you to select a particular node (RTU) from which data will be collected. (This dialog box is also accessible by clicking on the icon, at left.)

The selection box contains a list of all RTUs defined in your active Network Definition

Files. Choose the name of the RTU you would like to access, and click on the [OK] push button. Then use the security sign-on option of whichever application you chose, and sign on using the standard Open BSI Sign On dialog box.

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

6 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Adjusting the Appearance of the Menus

The Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell allows you to make various adjustments in the appearance of menus.

You can:

• Change the color of the menu background, the color of the text on the menu, and the color of other menu elements.

• Toggle between displaying poke points, or Windows™-style buttons for menu items.

• Change the appearance of a cursor from a line to a highlight block in menus which use poke points.

Setting Colors For Menu Elements

From the “View” item of the menu bar, you can call up the Color dialog box to alter the color of various elements of menus.

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

7 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

The table, below, shows the menu commands for accessing the Color dialog box depending upon the menu element for which you want to define colors.

To set the color of the item below:

Text on menus

Background of the menu

Lines used to define a trend plot grid (TMS only)

Fills used within a trend plot grid (TMS only)

Highlighted text in an editable field

Background underneath highlighted text in an editable field

Message text in the status fields at the bottom of the window

The background underneath message text at the bottom of the window

The cursor

Click according to the sequence below, then define the colors in the Color dialog box:

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Text

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Background

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Draw

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Draw Fill

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Highlight Text

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Highlight Background

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Message Text

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Message Back

View

Å

Change Color

Å

Cursor

Once the Color dialog box is visible, you can click on one of the ‘Basic Colors’ defined in the palette in the top of the dialog box. If you want to use a color which is not displayed in the ‘Basic Colors’ palette, you can click on the [Define Custom Color >>] button, and specify a custom color.

When you have chosen the desired color, click on the

[OK] button, and the desired menu element will be changed to the new color for the current session of the shell. For details on saving color defaults for use in all future sessions, see ‘Saving Color Configuration

Settings’ for details.

If you are unhappy with the color changes made, and want to restore the previously saved default colors, click on the ‘Read Default Settings’ icon.

To save the changes made as the new default colors, click on the ‘Save As Default

Settings’ icon.

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

8 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Saving Color Configuration Settings

If you have made changes to the color of menu elements, you can choose to save them so that they may be used in subsequent sessions.

Call up the Application Settings dialog box by clicking on the icon shown above, or use the following menu sequence: Configuration

Å

Application Settings

Select the types of color changes you want to save (background, text, etc.) then click on the [Save As Default Settings] button to save the settings.

The next time the shell is started, you can load the default colors by calling up this dialog box and clicking on [Read Default Settings] or you can click on the ‘Read

Default Settings’ icon. Furthermore, if you selected “Application Name”, the next time the shell is started, the Start Application dialog box will be skipped, and whatever application was last used (UOI, TMS, or SmartKit) will be loaded into the shell automatically.

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

9 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

Toggling Between Displaying Poke points or Buttons

The shell allows you to display selectable menu items either as poke points, or buttons.

If poke points are displayed, and you want to use buttons, instead, click on:

View

Å

Show Buttons

If buttons are displayed, and you want to use poke points, instead, click on:

View

Å

Show Poke Points

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

10 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Choosing the appearance of the poke point cursor

In a menu using poke points, the cursor can appear either as a line, or as a block.

If the cursor on the poke point is displayed as a line, and you want it displayed as a block, instead, click on:

View

Å

Show Block Cursor

If the cursor on the poke point is displayed as a block, and you want it displayed as a line, instead, click on:

View

Å

Show Line Cursor

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

11 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

Navigating between Menus

The DOS-based versions of UOI, TMS, and SmartKit allowed navigation between menus using keyboard commands [F3] for Next Display, [F4] for Back Display, [F6] for Back Page of the menu, and [F8] for Next Page of the menu.

These keyboard commands are also supported within the shell, however, it is also possible to click on menu commands available through the menu bar, or to click on icons to accomplish the same functions. The table, below, summarizes the navigation methods.

To perform the operation below:

Activate a menu after positioning the cursor on the icon or poke point for that menu

Click on the icon shown

below, or

@ Poke point or button (label of button varies)

Use the key shown

below, or

[Enter]

Click the following sequence of menu items:

Menu

Å

Go Into Selected

Menu

Go to the next menu

(Next Display)

Go to the previous menu

(Back Display)

[F3]

[F4]

Menu

Menu

Å

Å

Next Display

Back Display

Go to the previous page within a menu

(Back Page)

[F6] Menu

Å

Back Page

Go to the next page within a menu

(Next Page)

[F8] Menu

Å

Next Page

In addition to the options shown in the table, some menu commands are also available by right-clicking the mouse to bring up a pop-up menu.

Refreshing the Screen

If you want to refresh the screen, click as follows: View

Å

Refresh Screen

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

12 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Modifying UMS, UCS, ULS, UHS Files (UOI users ONLY)

Simple changes to the UOI source files (.UMS, .UHS, .ULS, .UCS) can be made with a text editor. All such changes must follow the syntax rules defined in the UOI

Configuration Manual (document# D5074). Once the file(s) have been modified, the files may be compiled and linked (see below).

Changing the Default UML Directory (UOI, TMS users ONLY)

To specify the location where UML files (sets of menus) will be stored, click on the icon, shown at left, or click on: Configuration

Å

Set UML Dir

NOTE: Changing the default UML directory will require the current application to be stopped and re-started.

Either of these methods will call up the Specify new UML Directory dialog box. Click on the [Browse] button to locate the desired folder, or if you know what its path is, just type it into the field. Select the “Save as default path” check box, and click on [Set

Path]. A warning will appear reminding you that the current application will be stopped and re-started. If you click on [Yes], the application will be stopped, and restarted with the newly specified UML directory active.

Compiling and Linking a UMS File to Generate a UML File (UOI users ONLY)

If you have modified a UMS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new

UML file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left, or by clicking on

Configuration

Å

Generate UML File. The standard Windows™ Open file dialog box will appear. Select the UMS file from which you want to generate a UML file, then click on [OK]. A new UML file will be created in the specified UML directory.

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

13 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

Compiling and Linking a UHS File to Generate a UHL File (UOI users ONLY)

If you have modified a UHS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new

UHL file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left. The standard Windows™

Open file dialog box will appear. Select the UHS file from which you want to generate a

UHL file, then click on [OK]. A new UHL file will be created in the specified directory.

Compiling and Linking a UCS File to Generate a UCL File (UOI users ONLY)

If you have modified a UCS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new UCL file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left. The standard Windows™ Open file dialog box will appear. Select the UCS file from which you want to generate a UCL file, then click on [OK]. A new UCL file will be created in the specified directory.

Compiling and Linking a ULS File to Generate a ULL File (UOI users ONLY)

If you have modified a ULS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new ULL file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left. The standard Windows™ Open file dialog box will appear. Select the ULS file from which you want to generate a ULL file, then click on [OK]. A new ULL file will be created in the specified directory.

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

14 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Changing Signal Values

If you have signed on at a specific security level, and a signal is NOT manually inhibited, you can change its value from an editable field. This is done by simply pressing the [Page Up] key to clear the field, and then typing in a new value and pressing [Enter].

Signal values can also be changed from the Detailed Signal Information page. See

‘Getting Detailed Information on a Particular Signal’.

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

15 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

Getting Detailed Information on a Particular Signal

If you have signed on at a sufficient security level, you can obtain more detailed information about a particular signal displayed in an editable field. To do this, position the cursor on the editable field, and do one of the following:

Either,

• Click as follows: Signal

Å

Detail Signal Information or

• Right click on the editable field and choose “Detail Signal Information” from the pop-up menu or

• Click on the icon shown above

Any of these methods will call up the Signal Detail Information page for the signal.

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

16 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

The Signal Detail page shows various characteristics of the signal (units text, current value, read and write priorities, etc.)

It also allows you to:

• Change the signal value by clicking on the [Current State Value] button or poke point, and entering a new value when prompted.

• Change the inhibit/enable status bits and the questionable data bit.

Changing Signal Inhibit/Enable Status Bits

If you have signed on at a sufficient security level, you can toggle the manual inhibit/enable, control inhibit/enable, and or alarm inhibit/enable status bits for a signal, if it is displayed in an editable field.

To do so, click on the signal value, then click on the inhibit/enable icon which corresponds to the action you want to perform. A message box will appear asking you to confirm the change. Clicking on [Yes] will execute the change.

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

17 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

The table, below, shows the icons, keyboard shortcuts, and menu bar sequences for changing inhibit/enable bits. Menu selections for this purpose are also available by

right-clicking the mouse while positioned in the editable field; this activates a pop-up menu.

To Perform this Action Click on the Icon shown

below, or

Toggle the manual inhibit / enable status bit

Toggle the control inhibit / enable status bit

Toggle the alarm inhibit / enable status bit

Use the key(s) shown

below, or

[F5]

Click according to the following Menu Sequence:

[F7]

Signal

Å

Toggle Manual

State

Signal

Å

Toggle Control

State

[Alt]+[a] Signal

Å

Toggle Alarm State

Canceling the Current Request for Data

If your application is in the process of collecting data from an RTU, and you want to cancel that request, you can click on the icon shown at left.

Saving the Text of the Current Menu in a Microsoft® Word File

To save the text of the current menu in a Microsoft® Word file, click on the icon, shown at left, or click as follows: Application

Å

Save Current Menu

You will be asked to provide a file name in the standard Windows™ Save As dialog box.

Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept.. 2004

18 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

Printing A Menu

If desired, the textual portion of the current menu can be printed. NOTE: Graphics cannot be printed.

Setting Up the Printer

If your printer is not configured, you can access the standard Printer Setup dialog box by clicking on: Application

Å

Print Setup

Previewing the Printed Page Prior to Printing

To preview the appearance of the printed page, before actually printing it, click on

Application

Å

Print Preview. You can use the [Zoom In] and [Zoom Out] buttons, to view the printed page at different magnifications. If the menu is a multi-page menu, you can use the [Next Page] and [Prev Page] buttons to move between the pages. If you are satisfied with the appearance of the page, you can call up the standard Print dialog box, by clicking on the [Print] button. If you are not satisfied, click on [Close] to exit the Print Preview.

Printing the Page

You can call up the standard Print dialog box by clicking on the icon, at left, or by clicking on Application

Å

Print, or by clicking on the [Print] button on the

Print Preview page.

Once the standard Print dialog box is visible, click on [OK] and the page will be sent to the configured printer.

Shutting Down the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell

To shut down the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell (which also terminates the currently running application), click as follows: Application

Å

Exit

Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99

CI-3530-xxx

19 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell

Rev: Sept. 2004

BLANK PAGE

EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS

PORT RS-232 BOARD

Part No. 392970-01-5

(For Models 3530-XXX)

For The Following BBI Instruction Manuals:

CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B, CI-3530-25B,

CI-3530-35B, CI-3530-40B, CI-3530-45B & CI-3530-50B

Product Information Package

Bristol Babcock

PIP-EXP232TF – December, 2003

NOTICE

Copyright Notice

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Request for Additional Instructions

Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.

TeleFlow TM , TeleRTU TM and TeleRecorder TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copy-righted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.

Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of

Bristol Babcock.

IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!

Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.

These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol Babcock for further information.

EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING

The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc.

If additional information is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol

Babcock.

RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING

When returning any equipment to Bristol Babcock for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol Babcock are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol Babcock and save Bristol Babcock harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol Babcock may incur or suffer due to such party’s failure to so act.

ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design

Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April

16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).

The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE

This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read BBI supplemental document S14006 for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.

Bristol Babcock 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Telephone (860) 945-2200

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

A.

B.

WARRANTY

Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.

Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.

Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.

All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol’s consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.

THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION

WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY

REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY

BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE

NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE

FACE HEREOF.

No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.

REMEDIES

Buyer’s sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol’s Watertown office, unless Bristol’s Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person’s transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.

Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.

How to return material for Repair or Exchange

Before a product can be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA

(Return Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Babcock Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.

You can easily obtain a RA number by:

A. FAX

Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A BBI Repair

Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

B. E-MAIL

Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Babcock Web site

(www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]

.

A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.

C. Mail

Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to

Bristol Babcock Inc.

Repair Dept.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

D. Phone

Calling the BBI Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A BBI Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.

A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.

&VMWXSP&EFGSGO-RG6ITEMV%YXLSVM^EXMSR*SVQ

(Providing this information will permit BBI to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)

Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_ Line No.____________

Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.

•

Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy

•

Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form

•

Return to Customer

Part I

Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:

•

There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (

√

in “returned” B,C, or D of part III below)

Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns

Address No.

Bill to :

(office use only) Address No.

Ship to:

(office use only)

Purchase Order:

Phone: Fax:

Contact Name:____________________________________

E-Mail:

Part II Please complete Parts II & III for each unit returned

Model No./Part No.

Description

Range/Calibration

Reason for return : Failure Upgrade

S/N

Verify Operation Other

1.

Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,

Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)

(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)

2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________

3.

What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?

Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available

A.

If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to BBI’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?

B.

If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:

C.

If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product:

D.

If BBI is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?

returned replaced scrapped?

returned replaced *see below?

* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: _______________________________ phone

If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone

Special Requests:

Ship prepaid to: Bristol Babcock Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875

Form GBU 13.01

Rev. A

Bristol Babcock

Training

GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL

BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM

● Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line

● Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.

● Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.

● Know your system.

As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Babcock offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol Babcock products and realize the full potential of your system.

For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at

(860) 945-2269. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-

6200.

BLANK PAGE

A Few Words About Bristol Babcock

For over 100 years, Bristol 7 has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey

SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.

On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Babcock instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.

Getting Additional Information

In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:

Contacting Bristol Babcock Directly

Bristol Babcock's world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,

Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.

Our main phone numbers are:

(860) 945-2200

(860) 945-2213 (FAX)

Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.

Telephone Support - Technical Questions

During regular business hours, Bristol Babcock's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.

For technical questions about TeleFlow Ô products call (860) 945-8604.

For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2244 or (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]

For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, Open BSI Utilities , as well as

Bristol's Enterprise Server 7 / Enterprise Workstation 7 products, call (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.

You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]

The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/

For assistance in interfacing Bristol Babcock hardware to radios, contact Bristol Babcock’s

Communication Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-

9464 .

Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.

Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.

Please call the main Bristol Babcock number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.

Visit our Site on the World Wide Web

For general information about Bristol Babcock and its products, please visit our site on the

World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com

Training Courses

Bristol Babcock’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2269 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.

PIP-EXP232TF

EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS PORT

RS-232 BOARD

PT. Number 392970-01-5

Product Information Package

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1

1.1.1

1.1.2

1.2

1.3

1.3.1

SECTION TITLE PAGE #

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 1

Function .............................................................................................................................. 1

Features............................................................................................................................... 2

COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION................................................................................... 2

INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY................................................................................ 2

Restrictions ......................................................................................................................... 2

2.1

2.1.1

2.1.1.1

2.1.1.2

2.1.1.3

2.2

Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE

EXPCOM232 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION................................. 3

Installation/Removal of the EXPCOM232 Board .............................................................. 3

Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B ............................ 3

Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B ........................................................ 10

Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B ..................................................................... 11

RS-232 WIRING............................................................................................................... 12

Section 3 - SPECIFICATIONS

3.1

3.2

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 15

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 15

SUPPLEMENTS

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations ..............................................Appendix A

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations ..............................................Appendix B

PIP-EXP232TF Page 0-1 Table Of Contents

Section 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 DESCRIPTION

1.1.1 Function

The Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232) provides a single RS-

232 asynchronous serial communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model 3530-XXX unit equipped with an EXPCOM232 Board can establish RS-232 communications with an external device. An EXPCOM232 Board plugs into the Expansion

Connector of the TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board and is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXPCOM232 Board.

EXPCOM232 Boards measure 4.0” by 3.75” and utilizes a 7-position Industrial 3.5mm pitch plugable connector to interface with an external RS-232 device. 16V bi-directional

Transient Absorption Zener Diodes are placed across all RS-232 outputs.

Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXPCOM232 Board. TXD,

RXD, RTS, CTS, DTR, CD and GND (RS-232) signals are available at TB1 of the

EXPCOM232 Board. CD (Carrier Detect) (supplied by a DCE attempting to communicate with a model 3530-XXX), will awaken the 3530-XXX CPU Board. If no activity is required, the EXPCOM232 Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-232 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX.

PIP-EXP232TF

Figure 1 - Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board

Page 1 EXPCOM232 Option

1.1.2 Features

· Low Power

+5V @ 20mA (Max) regulated power is supplied by the host/parent 3530-XXX via the

40-pin Expansion Interface Connector P1.

· ESD & Transient Susceptibility

The RS-232 I/O circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE

C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.

· EMI Compatibility

EXPCOM232 Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow ä electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.

· Mounting

The EXPCOM232 Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.0” (10.160cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.

· RS-232 Serial Port

EXPCOM232 Boards provide an additional RS-232 serial port that is programmable for rates up to 19.2Kbps. 3530-XXX units equipped with the EXPCOM232 Board can communicate with a local RS-232 device even though a radio or modem may be installed on the CPU Board’s network port.

1.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION

EXPCOM232 Boards do not contain LEDs, switches or configuration jumpers. Two connectors are provided; 40-pin connector P1 mates with the host 3530-XX-X (connector J4 -

TeleFlow CPU or J18 - TeleRTU CPU) and accommodates the TTL interface between the two entities, while 7-pin connector TB1 mates with the RS-232 device that is being interfaced to the 3530-XXX. Additionally, the 3.5mm pitch plugable connector TB1 is removable from its mating EXPCOM232 Board socket.

1.3 INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY

An EXPCOM232 Board can be installed into any of the following 3530-XXX models:

3530-10B - TeleFlow

3530-15B - TeleRTU

3530-35B - TeleRTU Module

3530-40B - TeleFlow ECR

3530-20B - TeleFlow Plus 3530-45B - TeleRecorder

3530-25B - TeleRTU Plus 3530-50B - TeleFlow Corrector

1.3.1 Restrictions

The 3530-XXX in question must be equipped with ACCOL application software. 3530-XXX units support installation of only one optional piggyback mounted Expansion Board (I/O,

Comm. or TIB).

EXPCOM232 Option Page 2 PIP-EXP232TF

Section 2

INSTALLATION & SERVICE

2.1 EXPCOM232 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION

2.1.1 Installation/Removal of the EXPCOM232 Board

In addition to hardware normally contained within the 3530-XXX in question, units with an installed EXPCOM232 Option will contain the following major parts.

1.

Expanded Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232)

2.

Three #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, - 15B, -40B, -45B & -50B will also contain Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)

3.

Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B)

WARNING

Never attempt to service a TeleFlow, TeleRTU,

TeleRecorder or TeleFlow Corrector while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment. Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, nonhazardous area.

WARNING

Never attempt to install or remove any components

(PCBs, Field Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running. Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered

I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.

CAUTION

Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.

2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B

To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B or -

50B, follow steps 1 through 14 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, see step

15. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.

1.

To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

PIP-EXP232TF Page 3 EXPCOM232 Option

Note:

The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).

2.

Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.

3.

Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.

To remove an optional modem :

Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio

Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.

To remove an optional radio :

Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio

Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.

4.

Remove the Battery(s) (if present).

To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :

Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket

(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery

Mounting Bracket.

To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :

Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.

While holding the Main

Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B, 15B, -45B or -50B.

5.

Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU Bd.

connectors by unplugging their associated Term. Plugs on the front edge of the CPU.

6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2

(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.

7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 2 & 3) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs

(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting

Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

8.

Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-

10B, 40B or -50B) or J18 (for 3530-15B & -45B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.

EXPCOM232 Option Page 4 PIP-EXP232TF

Figure 2 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1

9.

Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”

Standoffs at locations ‘A’ and ‘B’ (see Figures 2 & 3).

10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at locations ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 4, 5, 6 & 7).

11. Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.

PIP-EXP232TF Page 5 EXPCOM232 Option

12.

Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).

13.

Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.

Figure 3 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1

14.

Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

15. To remove an optional EXPCOM232 Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the RS-

232 cable during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that

EXPCOM232 Option Page 6 PIP-EXP232TF

secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the EXPCOM232

Board from the CPU Board in question.

Figure 4 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with EXPCOM232 Installed)

Installation Drawing #2

PIP-EXP232TF Page 7 EXPCOM232 Option

Figure 5 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with EXPCOM232 Installed)

Installation Drawing #2

EXPCOM232 Option Page 8 PIP-EXP232TF

Figure 6 - 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)

Figure 7 - 3530-15B & 3530-45B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)

PIP-EXP232TF Page 9 EXPCOM232 Option

2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B

To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps

1 through 11 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.

1.

Open the Instrument Front Cover

2.

Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for

TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow – J2 for TeleRTU).

Figure 8 - 3530-20B CPU (with EXPCOM232 Installed)

3.

Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.

4.

Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the

Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board

(and optional EXPCOM232 Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU

CPU), the Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup

Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1 (associated with the Multivariable Transducer).

5.

Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting

Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

6.

Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-

20B) or J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until

Connector P1 is fully seated.

7.

Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”

SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 8 & 9.

EXPCOM232 Option Page 10 PIP-EXP232TF

Figure 9 - 3530-25B CPU (with EXPCOM232 Installed)

8.

Route the RS-232 cable through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.

9.

Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).

10.

Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.

11. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B

To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 8 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.

1.

Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.

2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.

3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module

(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).

4.

Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting

Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

5.

Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the

EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.

PIP-EXP232TF Page 11 EXPCOM232 Option

6.

Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”

SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 10.

7.

Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).

8.

Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.

Figure 10 - 3530-35B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)

2.2 RS-232 WIRING

Table 2-1 and Figure 11 must be referenced to configure the RS-232 cable. Pin 2 of TB1 =

DCD (Data Carrier Detect - DCD). DCD can be used to awaken the 3530-XXX in question from power conservation (sleep) mode. This signal is not supplied by DTE equipment.

EXPCOM232 Option Page 12 PIP-EXP232TF

PIP-EXP232TF

Figure 11 - EXPCOM232 Wiring Diagrams

Page 13 EXPCOM232 Option

Either an RS-232 level control signal (high) can be supplied to TB1-2, or TB1-2 may be connected to the EXC signal on the CPU Board. It must be noted that as long as TB1-2

(DCD) remains HIGH, the 3530-XXX in question will remain awake. Therefore, if TB1-2 is connected to an EXC signal on the resident CPU Board, power conservation will be defeated, thus reducing the battery back-up time.

RS-232 cables are typically short (20’ or less in length). When significant distances are a factor (i.e., between an EXPCOM232 Board and the remote Data Terminal Device (DTE) to which it is desired to communicate), the RS-232 Port (TB1) cable can be connected to the

RS-232 Port of a modem or that of a BBI Isolated RS-485 Board (see Table 2-1).

Table 2-1

EXPCOM232 Board (DTE) & DCE/DTE - RS-232 Port Pin Assignments

EXPCOM232

RS-232 – TB1

DTE

2 - DCD (In)

6 - RXD (In)

7 - TXD (Out)

3 - DTR (Out)

1 - GND

-

5 - RTS (Out)

4 - CTS (In)

-

EXPCOM232

RS-232 TB1 or

3530 Network

Port J13/J8

DTE

-

7 - TXD (Out)

6 - RXD (In)

-

1 - GND

-

4 - CTS (In)

5 - RTS (Out)

-

Modem

9-Pin – J4

DCE

1 - DCD (Out)

2 - RXD (Out)

3 - TXD (In)

4 - DTR (In)

5 - GND

6 - DSR (Out)

7 - RTS (In)

8 - CTS (Out)

9 - N/A

PC

(RS-232)

3310/30/35

3305

3332

Notes 1 & 2

BBI

Isolated RS-485

Board Option

J1

DTE

-

DTE

-

DTE

-

3 - TXD (Out) 2 - TXD (Out) 7 - TXD (Out)

2 - RXD (In)

-

4 - RXD (In)

-

6 - RXD (In)

-

5 - GND

-

8 - CTS (In)

7 - RTS (Out)

-

9 - GND

-

6 - CTS (In)

5 - RTS (Out)

-

1 - GND

-

4 - CTS (In)

5 - RTS (Out)

-

Note 1: Ports BIP1 & BIP2

BIP1 and BIP2 are RS-562 Ports (RS-232 compatible.

Note 2: 3310 Ports A & C (MFIB Board)

A & C are RS-423 Ports (RS-232 compatible).

3330 Ports A, B, C, D, G, H, I & J (Enhanced Comm. Boards)

ECB’s 392587-01-7, 392587-02-5, 392587-03-3 & 392903-01-6

A, B, C, D, G, H, I & J are RS-562 Ports (RS-232 compatible).

3335 Ports A, B, C, D, I & J (Enhanced Comm. Boards)

ECB’s 392589-01-0 & 392589-02-8

A, B, C, D, I & J are RS-232 Ports

3335 Ports A, B, C & D (Comm. Engine Boards)

CEB’s 392043-01-7 & 392058-01-4

A, B, C & D are RS-423 Ports (RS-232 compatible)

The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.

Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.

EXPCOM232 Option Page 14 PIP-EXP232TF

Section 3

SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Baud Rate (Max.):

Power Requirements:

Transient Protection:

RS-232 Outputs:

RS-232 Inputs:

RS-232 Ground:

RS-232 Interface Connector:

19.2K Asynchronous

+5Vdc @ 20mA Max. (Regulated)

16V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across all

RS-232 outputs

TXD (TB1-7)

DTR (TB1-3)

RTS (TB1-5)

DCD (TB1-2)

RXD (TB1-6)

CTS (TB1-4)

GND (TB1-1)

7-Pin Industrial 3.5mm Pitch Plugable Connector

3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Temperature:

Storage Temperature:

Humidity:

ESD Susceptibility:

EMI Compatibility:

Transient Susceptibility:

-40 ° to +60 ° (C) [-40 ° to 140 ° (F)]

-40 ° to +85 ° (C) [-40 ° to 185 ° (F)]

15% to 90% RH (Non-Condensing)

Meets the requirement of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand

Capability up to 10KV.

Designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the

TeleFlow electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and

Susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated

Electronics.

Designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE

C37.90.1-1989 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand

Capability.

PIP-EXP232TF Page 15 EXPCOM232 Option

Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations

1. The BBI Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is listed by Underwriters

Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups

A, B, C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive BBI Expansion Communications Port RS-232

Board. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion Communications Port RS-232

Board User Manual (PIP-EXP232TF) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.

2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical

Code for installation in Canada.

3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.

4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.

5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.

07/17/2000 Appendix A of PIP-EXP232TF - EXPCOM232 Board Page 1 of 1

Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

1.

A version of the Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is available that is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division

1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board. Refer to the

Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board User’s Manual (PIP-EXP232TF) for general information. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion Communications

Port RS-232 Board User’s Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.

2.

Unless the Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is used in conjunction with an IStran Communications Interface Assembly (see CI-3530-Istran) it may not be used in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location.

3.

When a TeleFlow equipped with an Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is used in a Class I, Division 1 location, it must be used in conjunction with a BBI IStran

Communications Interface and installed per instruction manual CI-3530-IStran and

PIP-EXP232TF.

4.

The IStran and Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board can be located in a nonhazardous or Division 2 rated area, while the TeleFlow can reside in a Division 1, 2 or nonhazardous area.

A suitable enclosure must be provided for the IStran. When the IStran is mounted in a

Division 2 area, the nonhazardous interface connections shall be made in accordance with Article 501-4(b) of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70.

CAUTION

When connecting the IStran and Expansion Communications

Port RS-232 Board to a TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division

1 area, wire all circuits using wiring methods specified in article 504 of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70. Contact your IStran supplier for assistance.

When installing an Expansion Communications Port RS-232

Board in a TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division 2 area, ensure that the area is nonhazardous before connecting or disconnecting the nonhazardous interface.

5.

Figures B1 through B4 show variations of approved connections to the Expansion

Communications Port RS-232 Board via a BBI IStran Communications Interface

Assembly.

12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 1 of 3

Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B1 - Intrinsically Safe System with Radio and EXPCOM232 Board

(with Single Power Source)

Figure B2 - Intrinsically Safe System with Modem and EXPCOM232 Board

(with Single Power Source)

12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 2 of 3

Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

Figure B3 - Intrinsically Safe System with Modem and EXPCOM232 Board

(with Independent Power Sources)

Figure B4 - Intrinsically Safe System with Radio and EXPCOM232 Board

(with Independent Power Sources)

12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 3 of 3

READER RESPONSE FORM

Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.

DOCUMENT NUMBER: PIP-EXP232TF

TITLE: EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS PORT RS-232 BOARD (for Models 3530-XXX)

Product Information Package

ISSUE DATE: DEC., 2003

COMMENT/COMPLAINT:

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Mail this page to:

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315

Bristol Babcock

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2200

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213

Website: www.bristolbabcock.com

U.S.A. Locations:

Northern Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2381

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525

[email protected]

Gulf Coast Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

2000 Governor's Circle

Suite F

Houston, TX 77092-8731

Phone: +1 (713) 685-6200

Fax: +1 (713) 681-7331

[email protected]

Western Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1609 South Grove Avenue

Suites 106 & 107

Ontario, CA 91761

Phone: +1 (909) 923-8488

Fax: +1 (909) 923-8988

[email protected]

Southeast Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

317 S. North Lake Blvd.

Suite 1016

Altamonte Springs, FL 32701

Phone: +1 (407) 740-7084

Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106

[email protected]

Helicoid Instruments

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2218

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213 [email protected]

Central Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

777 South Central

Expressway

Suite 1-C

Richardson, TX 75080

Phone: +1 (972) 238-8197

Fax: +1 (972) 238-8198 [email protected]

International Affiliates:

Canada

Bristol Babcock, Canada

234 Attwell Drive

Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3

Canada

PH: 416-675-3820

FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]

Mexico

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso

Col. Morales Polanco

11540 Mexico, D.F.

Mexico

PH: (52-55)-52-81-81-12

FAX: (52-55)-52-81-81-09

[email protected]

Rocky Mountain Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A

Farmington, NM 87401

Phone: +1 (505) 320-5046

Fax: +1 (505) 327-3273

[email protected]

Communications

Technology Group

Bristol Babcock Inc.

317 S. North Lake Blvd.

Suite 1016

Altamonte Springs, FL 32701

Phone: +1 (407) 629-9464

Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106 [email protected]

United Kingdom

Bristol Babcock Ltd.

Blackpole Road

Worcester, WR3 8YB

United Kingdom

PH: +44 (0) 1905 856950

FAX: +44 (0) 1905 856969 [email protected]

Asia Pacific

Bristol Babcock, Inc.

PO Box 1987

Bunbury, Western Australia

6231

PH: +61 (0) 8 9791 3654

FAX: +61 (0) 8 9791 3173 [email protected]

Victoria, Australia

PH: +61 (0) 3 9384 2171

FAX: +61 (0) 3 8660 2501

Calgary Office

Bristol Babcock, Canada

3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.

Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6

Canada

PH: 403-265-4808

FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]

Villahermosa Office

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Plomo No.2

Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad

Industrial

Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010

Mexico

PH: 52-993-353-3142

FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]

Middle East

Bristol Babcock Ltd.

Blackpole Road

Worcester, WR3 8YB

United Kingdom

PH: +44 (0) 1905 856950

FAX: +44 (0) 1905 856969 [email protected]

RC Rev: 13-Jun-03

EXPANSION RS-485 and/or

ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD

Series No. 392971-XX-X

(For Models 3530-XXX)

For The Following BBI Instruction Manuals:

CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B, CI-3530-25B,

CI-3530-35B, CI-3530-40B & CI-3530-50B

Product Information Package

Bristol Babcock

PIP-EXP485/AO - January 2003

NOTICE

Copyright Notice

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Request for Additional Instructions

Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.

TeleFlow TM and TeleRTU TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.

Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of

Bristol Babcock.

IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!

Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.

These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol Babcock for further information.

EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING

The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc.

If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol

Babcock.

RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING

When returning any equipment to Bristol Babcock for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol Babcock are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol Babcock and save Bristol

Babcock harmless from any liability or damage, which Bristol Babcock may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.

ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design

Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April

16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).

The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE

This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read BBI document S14006 for proper care and handling of ESDsensitive components.

Bristol Babcock 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Telephone (860) 945-2200

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

A.

B.

WARRANTY

Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.

Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.

Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.

All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.

THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION

WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY

REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY

BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE

NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE

FACE HEREOF.

No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.

REMEDIES

Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.

Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.

How to return material for Repair or Exchange

Before a product can be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA

(Return Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Babcock Repair Dept.to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.

You can easily obtain a RA number by:

A. FAX

Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A BBI Repair

Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

B. E-MAIL

Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Babcock Web site

(www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]

.

A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.

C. Mail

Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to

Bristol Babcock Inc.

Repair Dept.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

D. Phone

Calling the BBI Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A BBI Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.

A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.

Bristol Babcock Inc. Repair Authorization Form

(Providing this information will permit BBI to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)

Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_ Line No.____________

Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.

· Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy

· Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form

· Return to Customer

Part I

Please be aware of the

·

Non warranty standard charge:

There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable ( or D of part III below)

Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns

Ö in “returned” B,C,

Address No.

Bill to :

(office use only) Address No.

Ship to:

(office use only)

Purchase Order:

Phone: Fax:

Contact Name: ____________________________________

E-Mail:

Part II Please complete Parts II & III for each unit returned

Model No./Part No.

Description

Range/Calibration

Reason for return : Failure Upgrade

S/N

Verify Operation Other

1.

Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,

Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)

(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)

2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________

3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?

Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available

A.

If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to BBI’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?

B.

If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:

C.

If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product:

D.

If BBI is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?

returned replaced scrapped?

returned replaced *see below?

* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: _______________________________ phone

If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone

Special Requests:

Ship prepaid to: Bristol Babcock Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875

Form GBU 13.01

Rev. A

Bristol Babcock

Training

GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL

BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM

● Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line

● Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.

● Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.

● Know your system.

As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Babcock offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at four locations: Houston, Birmingham, Orlando and our Watertown,

CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol Babcock products and realize the full potential of your system.

For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at

(860) 945-2269. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-

6200.

A Few Words About Bristol Babcock

For over 100 years, Bristol 7 has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey

SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.

On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Babcock instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.

Getting Additional Information

In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:

Contacting Bristol Babcock Directly

Bristol Babcock's world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,

Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.

Our main phone numbers are:

(860) 945-2200

(860) 945-2213 (FAX)

Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.

Telephone Support - Technical Questions

During regular business hours, Bristol Babcock's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.

For technical questions about TeleFlow Ô products call (860) 945-8604.

For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2244 or (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-2501 or e-mail: [email protected]

For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, Open BSI Utilities , as well as

Bristol's Enterprise Server 7 / Enterprise Workstation 7 products, call (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.

You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]

The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/

For assistance in interfacing Bristol Babcock hardware to radios, contact Bristol Babcock’s

Communication Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-

9464 .

Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.

Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative. A list of

Please call the main Bristol Babcock number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.

Visit our Site on the World Wide Web

For general information about Bristol Babcock and its products, please visit our site on the

World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com

Training Courses

Bristol Babcock’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2269 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.

PIP-EXP485/AO

EXPANSION RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS and/or ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD

PT. Number 392971-XX-X

Product Information Package

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1

1.1.1

1.1.2

1.2

1.3

1.3.1

SECTION TITLE PAGE #

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 1

Function .............................................................................................................................. 1

Features............................................................................................................................... 2

COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION................................................................................... 3

INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY................................................................................ 3

Restrictions ......................................................................................................................... 3

2.1

2.1.1

2.1.1.1

2.1.1.2

2.1.1.3

2.2

Section 2 – INSTALLATION & SERVICE

EXP485/AO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION ................................... 4

Installation/Removal of the EXP485/AO Board ................................................................ 4

Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B ...................................... 4

Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B ........................................................ 11

Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B ..................................................................... 13

RS-485 and AO WIRING ................................................................................................. 14

3.1

3.2

3.3

Section 3 - SPECIFICATIONS

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 16

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 16

ENTITY PARAMETERS (INTRINSICALLY SAFE EXPAO Bd.) ............................... 17

SUPPLEMENTS

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations ..............................................Appendix A

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations ..............................................Appendix B

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 0-1 Table Of Contents

Section 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 DESCRIPTION

1.1.1 Function

The Expansion RS-485 Comm. Port with Analog Output Board (EXP485/AO) provides a single RS-485 communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model

3530-XXX unit equipped with a fully populated EXP485/AO Board can establish RS-485 asynchronous communications with other 3530-XXX devices and/or can interface to an

Analog Output circuit. The EXP485/AO Board plugs into the Expansion Connector of the

TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board, is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws or standoffs depending on the model. The CPU Board Expansion

Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXP485/AO Board.

EXP485/AO Boards measure 4.25” by 3.75” and utilizes a 9-position Industrial 3.5mm pitch plugable connector to interface (RS-485) to a series of remote 3530-XXX devices and or a single 1-5Vdc or 4-20mA AO device.

Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXP485/AO Board.

Interface signals are available at TB1 of the EXP485/AO. When the SLEEP+ & SLEEPsignals (supplied by the Master 3530-XXX) are Low and High respectively, the remote

3530-XXX CPU Boards will be awakened. If no activity is required, the EXP485/AO Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-485 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX and the SLEEP+ and SLEEP- signals will be set High and Low respectively.

Figure 1 - EXP485/AO Board (with RS-485 & Configurable AO)

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 1 EXP485/AO Option

Figure 2 - EXPAO Board (with 1-5Vdc AO and without RS-485)

1.1.2 Features

· Low Power

+5Vdc @ 20mA (Max) regulated power and 5.8Vdc to 16Vdc @ 50mA (Max) unregulated power are supplied by the host/parent 3530-XXX via the 40-pin

Expansion Interface Connector P1.

· ESD & Transient Susceptibility

The RS-485 I/O circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE

C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.

· EMI Compatibility

EXP485/AO Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow ä electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.

· Mounting

The EXP485/AO Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.25” (10.795cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.

· RS-485 Comm. Port

EXP485/AO Boards provide an RS-485 communications port that is programmable for asynchronous rates up to 19.2Kbps. 3530-XXX units equipped with the

EXP485/AO Board can communicate with a network of 3530-XXX units (equipped

EXP485/AO Option Page 2 PIP-EXP485/AO

with EXP485/AO Boards), even though a radio or modem may be installed on the

CPU Board’s network port.

1.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION

EXP485/AO Boards do not contain LEDs or switches. Fully populated EXP485/AO Boards

(P/N 392971-01-0) are provided with seven (7) configuration jumpers (see Figures 1 & 11).

Depopulated EXPAO Boards (P/N 392971-02-0) are factory set for 1-5Vdc AO operation and don’t have configuration jumpers (see Figure 2). Two connectors are provided; 40-pin connector P1 mates with the host 3530-XX-X (connector J4 - TeleFlow CPU or J18 - TeleRTU

CPU) and accommodates the TTL interface between the two entities, while 9-pin connector

TB1 mates with the RS-485 device that is being interfaced to the 3530-XXX and/or an analog output device. Additionally, the 3.5mm pitch plugable connector TB1 is removable from its mating EXP485/AO Board socket.

1.3 INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY

An EXP485/AO Board can be installed into any of the following 3530-XXX models:

3530-10B - TeleFlow

3530-15B - TeleRTU

3530-35B - TeleRTU Module

3530-40B - TeleFlow ECR

3530-20B - TeleFlow Plus 3530-50B - TeleFlow Corrector

3530-25B - TeleRTU Plus

1.3.1 Restrictions

The 3530-XXX in question must be equipped with ACCOL application software. The

TeleFlow Plus (3530-20B), TeleRTU Plus (3530-25B) and the TeleRTU Module (3530-35B) support installation of either a Low Power I/O Expansion Board (LPI/OEB), an

EXPCOM232 Board, or the EXP485/AO Board discussed herein, i.e., YOU CAN ONLY

INSTALL ONE (1) OF THESE ITEMS .

EXP485/AO Board (P/N 392971-01-0) is fully populated and supports RS-485 network communications and interface to either a 1-5Vdc or a 4-20mA analog output device.

P/N 392971-02-0 is a depopulated version of the EXP485/AO Board and only supports interface to a 1-5Vdc analog output device. Connector TB1 has two usable pins (08 = AO and 09 = AOGND). This version is designed for use in a Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D nonincendive environment or a Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D intrinsically safe environment.

Intrinsically safe EXPAO Boards can be installed in 3530-XXX units with 6V Lead Acid or

7.2V Lithium battery systems.

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 3 EXP485/AO Option

Section 2

INSTALLATION & SERVICE

2.1 EXP485/AO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION

2.1.1 Installation/Removal of the EXP485/AO Board

In addition to hardware normally contained within the 3530-XXX in question, units with an installed EXP485/AO Option will contain the following major parts.

1.

Expanded Comm. Port RS-485/AO Board (EXP485/AO)

2.

Three (3) #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B will also contain Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)

3.

Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B)

WARNING

Never attempt to service a TeleFlow, TeleFlow ECR, TeleRTU or

TeleFlow Corrector while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment. Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, nonhazardous area.

WARNING

Never attempt to install or remove any components (PCBs, Field

Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running.

Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.

CAUTION

Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.

2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B

To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-10B, -15B, -40B or -50B, follow steps 1 through 14 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, see step 15. Note: The

Instrument Front Cover must be open.

1.

To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

EXP485/AO Option Page 4 PIP-EXP485/AO

Note:

The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).

2.

Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.

3.

Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.

To remove an optional modem :

Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio

Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.

To remove an optional radio :

Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio

Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.

4.

Remove the Battery(s) (if present).

To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :

Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket

(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery

Mounting Bracket.

To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :

Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.

While holding the Main

Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B, 15B, -45B or -50B.

5.

Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU

Board connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs on the front edge of the CPU.

6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2

(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.

7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 3 & 4) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs

(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting

Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

8.

Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-

10B or -50B) or J18 (for 3530-15B). Push the EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU

Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 5 EXP485/AO Option

Figure 3 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1

9.

Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”

Standoffs at locations ‘A’ and ‘B’ (see Figures 3 & 4).

10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at location ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 5, 6, 7 & 8).

11.

Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.

EXP485/AO Option Page 6 PIP-EXP485/AO

12.

Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).

13.

Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.

Figure 4 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1

14.

Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

15. To remove an optional EXP485/AO Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the RS-485 cable during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that secure

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 7 EXP485/AO Option

the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the EXP485/AO Board from the CPU Board in question.

Figure 5 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with EXP485/AO Installed)

Installation Drawing #2

EXP485/AO Option Page 8 PIP-EXP485/AO

Figure 6 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with EXP485/AO Installed)

Installation Drawing #2

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 9 EXP485/AO Option

Figure 7 - 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B (with EXP485/AO Installed)

EXP485/AO Option

Figure 8 - 3530-15B (with EXP485/AO Installed)

Page 10 PIP-EXP485/AO

2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B

To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps 1 through 11 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.

1.

Open the Instrument Front Cover

2.

Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for

TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow - J2 for TeleRTU).

PIP-EXP485/AO

Figure 9 - 3530-20B CPU (with EXP485/AO Installed)

Page 11 EXP485/AO Option

3.

Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.

4.

Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the

Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board

(and optional EXP485/AO Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU

CPU), the Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup

Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1 (associated with the Multivariable Transducer).

Figure 10 - 3530-25B CPU (with EXP485/AO Installed)

5.

Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting

Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 3 & 4) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

EXP485/AO Option Page 12 PIP-EXP485/AO

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

6.

Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-

20B) or J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU Board until

Connector P1 is fully seated.

7.

Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”

SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 9 & 10.

8.

Route the RS-485 and AO cables through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.

9.

Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).

10.

Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.

11. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B

To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 8 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.

1.

Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.

2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.

3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module

(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).

4.

Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting

Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

5.

Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the

EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.

6.

Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”

SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 11.

7.

Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 13 EXP485/AO Option

8.

Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.

Figure 11 - 3530-35B (with EXP485/AO Installed)

2.2 RS-485 and AO WIRING

Figure 12 must be referenced to configure the RS-485 cable. It is recommended that a low capacitance 24-gauge communications grade 2-twisted pair cable such as Belden 9842 be used for RS-485 networking.

EXP485/AO Option Page 14 PIP-EXP485/AO

Figure 12 - EXP485/AO Wiring Diagrams

The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.

Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 15 EXP485/AO Option

Section 3

SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Baud Rate (Max.):

Power Requirements:

Transient Protection:

RS-485 Inputs/Outputs:

Analog Output Pins:

Interface Connector:

19.2K Asynchronous

+5Vdc @ 20mA Max. (Regulated)

+5.8Vdc to +16Vdc @ 50mA Max. (Unregulated)

5V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across all

RS-485 communication points

12V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across the

AO points (when configured for 1-5Vdc operation)

16V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across the

AO points (when configured for 4-20mA operation)

TXD/RDX+ (TB1-3)

TXD/RXD- (TB1-4)

SLEEP+ (TB1-5)

SLEEP(TB1-6)

AO (TB1-8) - 1-5Vdc @ 5mA Max. ONLY on

392971-02-0

(TB1-8) - 1-5Vdc @ 5mA Max. or 4-20mA on

392971-01-0

AOGND (TB1-9) - Analog Output Ground/Return

9-Pin Industrial 3.5mm Pitch Plugable Connector

3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Temperature:

Storage Temperature:

Humidity:

Vibration:

RFI Susceptibility:

EMI Compatibility:

-40 ° to +60 ° (C) [-40 ° to 140 ° (F)]

-40 ° to +85 ° (C) [-40 ° to 185 ° (F)]

15% to 90% RH (Non-Condensing)

10 to 500 Hz at 1g on any axis per SAMA PMC-31-1 without damage or impairment.

Meets the requirement of IEC 1000-4-6 level 2 (3V/M) from 150kHz to 80MHz.

Designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the

TeleFlow electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and

Susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated

Electronics.

EXP485/AO Option Page 16 PIP-EXP485/AO

Surge Susceptibility:

EMI Radiated:

Designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE

C37.90.1-1989 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.

Designed to meet the requirements of IEC 1004-4-3 for radiated emissions.

3.3 ENTITY PARAMETERS (INTRISICALLY SAFE EXPAO Bd.)

F1: .125A

R66:

D20/D21:

Voc:

Vmax:

Isc:

Imax:

Ca:

Ci:

La:

Li:

200 Ohms ±5%, .5W

6.2V ±5%

6.51V

15V

34.3mA

150mA

400µF

0µF

80mH

0mH

PIP-EXP485/AO Page 17 EXP485/AO Option

Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations

1. The BBI Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output (EXP485/AO) Board is listed by

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I,

Division 2, Groups C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive BBI Expansion RS-485 and/or

Analog Output Board. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion RS-485 and/or

Analog Output Board User Manual (PIP-EXP485/AO) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.

2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical

Code for installation in Canada.

3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.

4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.

5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.

12/14/2001 Appendix A of PIP-EXP485/AO - EXP485/AO Board Page 1 of 1

Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board for 3530-XXX

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations

1.

A version of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output (EXP485/AO) Board is available that is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in

Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board.

Refer to the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board User’s Manual (PIP-

EXP485/AO) for general information. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion

RS-485 and or Analog Output User’s Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.

2.

Only the depopulated version of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board

(EXP485/AO) (P/N 392971-02-0) may be used in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location.

3.

TeleFlow models 3530-10B, 3530-40B and 3530-50B approved for use in Class I,

Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations and equipped with the EXP485/AO

Board option may reside in a Division 1, 2 or nonhazardous area. 3530-XXX units not approved for use in a Class I, Division 1 environment may contain an EXP485/AO Board but can only reside in a Class I, Division 2 or nonhazardous area.

CAUTION

When connecting the Expansion Analog Output Board to a

TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division 1 area, wire all circuits using wiring methods specified in article 501-4(A) of the

National Electrical Code NFPA 70.

When installing an Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output

Board (EXP485/AO) into a TeleFlow that is mounted in a

Division 2 area, ensure that the area is nonhazardous before connecting or disconnecting the nonhazardous interface.

4.

Intrinsically safe TeleFlows equipped with an intrinsically safe EXPAO Board (P/N

392971-02-0) do not include any internal communications options.

01/11/02 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP485/AO Page 1 of 1

BLANK PAGE

READER RESPONSE FORM

Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.

DOCUMENT NUMBER: PIP-EXP485/AO

TITLE: EXPANSION RS-485 and/or ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD (for Models 3530-XXX)

Product Information Package

ISSUE DATE: JAN., 2003

COMMENT/COMPLAINT:

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Mail this page to:

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315

Bristol Babcock

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: (860) 945-2200

Fax: (860) 945-2213

Website: www.bristolbabcock.com

U.S.A. Locations:

Northern Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: (860) 945-2381

Fax: (860) 945-2525

[email protected]

Southwest Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

2000 Governor's Circle

Suite F

Houston, TX 77092-8731

Phone: (713) 685-6200

Fax: (713) 681-7331

[email protected]

Western Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1609 South Grove Avenue

Suites 106 & 107

Ontario, CA 91761

Phone: (909) 923-8488

Fax: (909) 923-8988

[email protected]

Southeast Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

317 S. North Lake Blvd.

Suite 1016

Altamonte Springs, FL 32701

Phone: (407) 740-7084

Fax: (407) 629-2106

[email protected]

Helicoid Instruments

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: (860) 945-2218

Fax: (860) 945-2213 [email protected]

Dallas District Office

Bristol Babcock Inc.

777 South Central

Expressway

Suite 1-C

Richardson, TX 75080

Phone: (972) 238-8197

Fax: (972) 238-8198 [email protected]

International Affiliates :

Canada

Bristol Babcock, Canada

234 Attwell Drive

Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3

Canada

PH: 416-675-3820

FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]

Mexico

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Ejercito Nacional No. 718, 4

Piso

Colonia Polanco

Mexico, D.F. 11560

Mexico

PH: 52-555-254-5281

FAX: 52-555-254-3408

[email protected]

Sales Office New Mexico

Bristol Babcock Inc.

906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A

Farmington, NM 87401

Phone: (505) 320-5046

Fax: (505) 327-3273

[email protected]

Communications

Technology Group

Bristol Babcock Inc.

317 S. North Lake Blvd.

Suite 1016

Altamonte Springs, FL 32701

Phone: (407) 629-9464

Fax: (407) 629-2106 [email protected]

United Kingdom

Bristol Babcock Ltd.

Vale Industrial Estate

Stourport Road

Kidderminster

Worcestershire DY11 7QU

United Kingdom

PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001

FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]

Australia

Bristol Babcock, Inc.

22 Hastie St.

PO Box 1987

Banbury, Western Australia

6230

PH: 61 (0)8 9791 3654

FAX: 61 (0)8 9791 3173 [email protected]

Calgary Office

Bristol Babcock, Canada

3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.

Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6

Canada

PH: 403-265-4808

FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]

Villahermosa Office

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Plomo No.2

Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad

Industrial

Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010

Mexico

PH: 52-993-353-3142

FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]

Middle East

Bristol Babcock Ltd.

Vale Industrial Estate

Stourport Road

Kidderminster

Worcestershire DY11 7QU

United Kingdom

PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001

FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]

Product Information Package

PIP-EXPTIBTF

Mar., 2007 TeleFlow Series 3530-10B/15B/20B/25B/35B/50B

Expansion Transmitter Interface

Board Part No. 392960-01-0

For The Following Bristol Instruction Manuals:

CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B,

CI-3530-25B, CI-3530-35B & CI-3530-50B

www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!

Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.

These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol for further information.

EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING

The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons.

It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, failsafe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc. If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol .

RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING

When returning any equipment to Bristol for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol and save Bristol harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.

ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design

Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April

16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).

The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE

This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read supplemental document S14006 at the back of this manual for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.

Bristol 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Telephone (860) 945-2200

WARRANTY

A. Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.

B. Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.

C. Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol, are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.

D. All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.

E. THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION

WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY

REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY

BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE

NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE

FACE HEREOF.

F. No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.

REMEDIES

A. Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.

B. Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation, from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its em-ployees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.

How to return material for Repair or Exchange

Before a product can be returned to Bristol for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA (Return

Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.

You can easily obtain a RA number by:

A. FAX

Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A Bristol Repair

Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

B. E-MAIL

Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Web site (www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]

. A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.

C. Mail

Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to

Bristol Inc.

Repair

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.

D. Phone

Calling the Bristol Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A Bristol Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.

A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.

Bristol

Repair Authorization Form

(off-line completion)

(Providing this information will permit Bristol to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)

Date___________________ RA #___________________SH

Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.

•

Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy

•

Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form

•

Return to Customer

Line No.____________

Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:

•

There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (

√

in “returned”

B,C, or D of part III below)

Part I Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns

Address No.

Bill to :

Purchase Order:

Phone:

(office use only) Address No.

Ship to:

Fax:

(office use only)

Contact Name: ____________________________________

E-Mail:

Model No./Part No. Description

Range/Calibration S/N

Reason for return : Failure Upgrade Verify Operation Other

1.

Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,

Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)

(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)

2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________

3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software & version?

Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available

A.

If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to Bristol’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?

B.

If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:

C.

If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product: repaired returned replaced scrapped? returned replaced scrapped?

D.

If Bristol is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: returned replaced *see below?

* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: ______________________________ phone_____________________

If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone_____________________

Special Requests: ____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Ship prepaid to: Bristol Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-2220 Form GBU 13.01 Rev. C 04/27/06

Bristol

Training

GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL

BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM

• Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line

• Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.

• Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.

• Know your system.

As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Inc. offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol products and realize the full potential of your system.

For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at

(860) 945-2343. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-

6200.

A Few Words About Bristol Inc.

For over 100 years, Bristol ® has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey

SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.

On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Inc. instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.

Getting Additional Information

In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:

Help Files / Release Notes

Many Bristol software products incorporate help screens. In addition, the software typically includes a ‘read me’ release notes file detailing new features in the product, as well as other information which was available too late for inclusion in the manual.

Contacting Bristol Inc. Directly

Bristol's world headquarters is located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,

Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.

Our main phone numbers are:

(860) 945-2200

(860) 945-2213 (FAX)

Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.

Telephone Support - Technical Questions

During regular business hours, Bristol's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.

For technical questions about TeleFlow products call (860) 945-8604.

For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2394 or (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]

For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, OpenBSI Utilities , UOI and all other software except for Control Wave and OpenEnterprise products, call (860) 945-2286.

For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.

You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]

The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/

For assistance in interfacing Bristol hardware to radios, contact Bristol’s Communication

Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-9464 .

You can e-mail the Communication Technology Group at: [email protected]

Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.

Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover of this manual) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.

Please call the main Bristol Inc. number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.

Visit our Site on the World Wide Web

For general information about Bristol Inc. and its products, please visit our site on the

World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com

Training Courses

Bristol’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2343 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.

PIP-EXPTIBTF

EXPANSION TRANSMITTER INTERFACE

BOARD

PT. Number 392960-01-0

Product Information Package

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

1.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 1

Operation ........................................................................................ 1

1.2 Features................................................................................................................ 2

1.3 JUMPER

Section 2 – INSTALLATION & SERVICE

REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION OF THE ETIB................... 3

Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Board ............ 3

2.1

2.1.1

2.1.1.1

2.1.1.2

Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B.................................. 3

Installation/Removal for Models 353-20B & -25B............................................ 10

2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Model 3530-35B........................................................ 12

2.2 FIELD

2.2.1.1

2.2.1.2

2.2.1.3

WIRING ................................................................................................. 13

2.2.1 Terminal

Terminal Connections for Model 3808 Transmitters....................................... 14

Terminal Connections for a single Model 3508 Transmitter........................... 14

Trminal Connections for two Model 3508 Transmitters.................................. 15

Section 3 - SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 GENERAL

SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 17

SPECIFICATION ........................................................................... 17

3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL

SUPPLEMENTS

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations...........................Appendix A

PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 0-1 Table Of Contents

BLANK PAGE

Section 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION

INTRODUCTION

Expansion Transmitter Interface Boards (ETIBs) allow up to two (2) Bristol, Series 3508 or

Series 3808 Transmitters to communicate with an ACCOL loaded host TeleFlow or

TeleFlow Plus Electronic Gas Measurement Computer (EGMC) (3530-10B/20B), a

TeleRTU, TeleRTU Plus or TeleRTU Module (3530-15B/25B/35B) or a TeleFlow Corrector

(3530-50B). The TeleFlow EGMC/RTU/Corrector polls and stores data from each transmitter and communicates with the network.

The ETIB Board interfaced to a TeleFlow/TeleRTU CPU Board via the CPU Board’s

Expansion Connector. Power from and communication with the host CPU Board is supplied through the Expansion Connector. ETIB Boards contain one jumper (JP1) for configuration.

1.1.1 Transmitter Operation

3508 Series

Each Model 3508 Transmitter must be assigned a unique address via the SMARTKIT program as described in Section 4.2 PROGRAM LOADING AND STARTUP of the appropriate 3508 Transmitter manual. Additionally, all Model 3508 Transmitters wired to the TI Board must be operated in the minimum current mode (3.8 mA). This mode is selected via the SMARTKIT program as described in Section 4.7 TRANSMITTER

OPERATING MODES of the appropriate 3508 Transmitter manual, i.e., CI-3508-10C, CI-

3508-30C or CI-3508-99C.

PIP-EXPTIBTF

Figure 1 - Transmitter Interface Board P/N 392960-01-0

Page 1 Expansion TIB Option

3808 MVT Series

Each Model 3808 MVT Transmitter must be assigned a unique address via the WebBSI

Sign On/Off Menu (see Section 3 of Customer Instruction Manual CI-3808). Additionally, only analog versions of the 3808 MVT can be interfaced to a Transmitter Interface Board.

1.1.2 Features

• ESD & Transient Susceptibility

Field connected circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE

C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.

• EMI Compatibility

ETIB Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the

TeleFlow ™ electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.

• Mounting

The ETIB Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.0” (10.160cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.

1.2 JUMPER JP1

Jumper JP1 is used to configure the ETIB for operation with one or two 3508/3808 Transmitters. If only one 3508/3808 Transmitter is to be connected to the ETIB, Jumper JP1 must be installed across JP1-1 and JP1-2. Additionally, when only one 3508/3808

Transmitter is to be connected to the ETIB, it must be connected to connector TB1. When two 3508/3808 Transmitters are connected to the ETIB, Jumper JP1 must be removed and stored in either JP1-1 or JP1-2.

Expansion TIB Option Page 2 PIP-EXPTIBTF

Section 2

INSTALLATION & SERVICE

2.1 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION OF THE ETIB

2.1.1 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Bd.

An installed ETIB option will contain the following parts:

1. Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) (with removable Terminal Blocks)

2. Three #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B will also contain

Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)

3. Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B)

WARNING

Never attempt to service a TeleFlow or TeleRTU while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment.

Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, non-hazardous area.

WARNING

Never attempt to install or remove any components

(PCBs, Field Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running. Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered

I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.

CAUTION

Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.

2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B

To install the optional ETIB option into a model 3530-10B, -15B or -50B, follow steps 1 through 13 below. To remove the optional ETIB Board, see step 14. Note: The Instrument

Front Cover must be open.

1.

To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.

PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 3 Expansion TIB Option

Note:

The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).

2.

Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.

3.

Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.

To remove an optional modem :

Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio

Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.

To remove an optional radio :

Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio

Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.

4.

Remove the Battery(s) (if present).

To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :

Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket

(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery

Mounting Bracket.

To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :

Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.

While holding the Main

Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B or 3530-15B.

5.

Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU

Board connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs (front edge of CPU).

6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2

(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.

7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 2 & 3) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs

(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting

Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

8.

Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-10B) or

J18 (for 3530-15B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until

Connector P1 is fully seated.

Expansion TIB Option Page 4 PIP-EXPTIBTF

Figure 2 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1

9.

Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”

Standoffs at Locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ (see Figures 2 & 3).

10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at locations ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 4, 5, 6 & 7).

11. Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.

PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 5 Expansion TIB Option

12.

Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1). Wiring should be routed through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.

Figure 3 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1

13.

Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

14. To remove an optional ETIB Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the Field Wiring

Terminals during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that

Expansion TIB Option Page 6 PIP-EXPTIBTF

secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the ETIB Board from the CPU

Board in question.

PIP-EXPTIBTF

Figure 4 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with ETIB Installed)

Installation Drawing #2

Page 7 Expansion TIB Option

Figure 5 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with ETIB Installed)

Expansion TIB Option

Installation Drawing #2

Page 8 PIP-EXPTIBTF

Figure 6 - 3530-10B & 3530-50B (with ETIB Installed)

PIP-EXPTIBTF

Figure 7 - 3530-15B (with ETIB Installed)

Page 9 Expansion TIB Option

2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B

To install the optional ETIB Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps 1 through 10 below. To remove the optional ETIB Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.

1.

Open the Instrument Front Cover

2.

Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for

TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow - J2 for TeleRTU).

Expansion TIB Option

Figure 8 - 3530-20B CPU (with ETIB Installed)

Page 10 PIP-EXPTIBTF

3.

Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.

4.

Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the

Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board

(and optional ETIB Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU CPU), the

Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1

(associated with the Multivariable Transducer).

Figure 9 - 3530-25B CPU (with ETIB Installed)

5.

Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting

Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 11 Expansion TIB Option

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

6.

Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-20B) or

J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the ETIB Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.

7.

Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4” SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 8 & 9.

8.

Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1). Wiring should be routed through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.

9. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.

2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B

To install the optional ETIB Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 7 below.

To remove the optional ETIB Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.

1.

Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.

2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.

3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module

(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).

4. Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting

Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.

Note:

This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.

5. Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the ETIB

Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.

6.

Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4” SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 10.

7.

Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1).

Expansion TIB Option Page 12 PIP-EXPTIBTF

Figure 10 - 3530-35B (with ETIB Installed)

2.2 FIELD WIRING

The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.

Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.

PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 13 Expansion TIB Option

2.2.1 Terminal Connections

2.2.1.1 Terminal Connections for Model 3808 Transmitters

ETIB Boards contain two terminal blocks that are used to provide field wiring connections to up to two Model 3808 Transmitters. TB1 & TB2 are two-position Terminal Blocks which connect to the signal/power inputs of the Transmitters.

JP1 Note:

If only one Transmitter is connected to the ETIB,

Jumper JP1 must be INSTALLED across JP1-1 & JP1-2.

When two Transmitters are connected to the ETIB,

Jumper JP1 must be REMOVED. Store the Jumper on

Jumper Post JP1-1 or JP1-2.

Note:

When only one Transmitter is connected to the ETIB, it

MUST BE connected to TB1.

Figure 11 - Internally Powered Model 3808 Transmitters - Field Wiring Diagram

ETIB Boards may be connected to up to two internally powered Model 3808 Transmitters.

Connection to internally powered Model 3808 Transmitters (powered from ETIB’s on-board

+12V Supply/Regulator) is illustrated in Figure 11.

2.2.1.2 Terminal Connections for a single Model 3508 Transmitter

The two-position Terminal Block TB1 is utilized to provide field wiring connections to an internally powered Model 3508 Transmitter.

Expansion TIB Option Page 14 PIP-EXPTIBTF

JP1 Note:

Jumper JP1 must be INSTALLED across JP1-1 & JP1-2.

Figure 12 - Internally Powered Model 3508 Transmitter - Field Wiring Diagram

Connection to an internally powered Model 3508 Transmitter (powered from the ETIB’s onboard Supply/Regulator) is illustrated in Figure 12.

2.2.1.3 Terminal Connections for two Model 3508 Transmitters

ETIB Boards contain two terminal blocks that are used to provide field wiring connections for up to two Model 3508 Transmitters. TB1 & TB2 are two-position Terminal Blocks which connect to the signal/power inputs of the Transmitters. When using two Model 3508

Transmitters, an external 21 Volt (dc) power supply must be utilized (see Figure 13).

PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 15 Expansion TIB Option

JP1 Note:

Jumper JP1 must be REMOVED. Store the Jumper on

Jumper Post JP1-1 or JP1-2.

TeleFlow CPU Connector J5-5

TeleRTU CPU Connector J6-2

GND

External 21V

Power Supply

Figure 13 - Externally Powered Model 3508 Transmitters - Field Wiring Diagram

Expansion TIB Option Page 16 PIP-EXPTIBTF

Section 3

SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Communication Interface:

3508/3808 Interface:

ESD Susceptibility:

EMI Compatibility:

RS-232 ( ± 3V minimum)

FSK Modem - Bell 202 Compatible

(1200 Hz/2200 Hz modulation)

Baud rate is 1200

Field connected circuits are designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV.

Designed to coexist within a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow (3530-10/20B) or the TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B) electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.

Transient Susceptibility: Field connected circuits are designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/-

IEEEC37.90-1998 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.

3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Temperature:

Storage Temperature:

Relative Humidity:

Vibration:

-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)

-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°C)

15% - 90% Non-condensing

1G for 10Hz to 500Hz per SAMA PMC-31-1

(without damage or impairment)

PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 17 Expansion TIB Option

BLANK PAGE

Expansion Transmitter Interface Board

Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations

1. The Bristol Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) is listed by Underwriters

Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups

A, B, C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive Britol ETIB Board. In the event of a conflict between the ETIB Board User Manual (PIP-EXPTIBTF) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.

2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical

Code for installation in Canada.

3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.

4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.

5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.

03/14/2007 Appendix A of PIP-EXPTIBTF - ETIB Board Page 1 of 1

BLANK PAGE

BLANK PAGE

Product Information Package

Expansion Transmitter Interface Board Part No. 392960-01-0

PIP-EXPTIBTF

Mar., 2007

Emerson Process Management

Bristol, Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2262

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Electric Canada, Ltd.

Bristol Canada

6338 Viscount Rd.

Mississauga, Ont. L4V 1H3

Canada

Phone: 905-362-0880

Fax: 905-362-0882 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Process Management

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso

Col. Morales Polanco

11540 Mexico, D.F.

Mexico

Phone: (52-55)-52-81-81-12

Fax: (52-55)-52-81-81-09 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Process Management

Bristol Babcock, Ltd.

Blackpole Road

Worcester, WR3 8YB

United Kingdom

Phone: +44 1905 856950

Fax: +44 1905 856969 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Process Management

Bristol, Inc.

22 Portofino Crescent,

Grand Canals Bunbury, Western Australia 6230

Mail to: PO Box 1987 (zip 6231)

Phone: +61 (8) 9725-2355

Fax: +61 (8) 8 9725-2955 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

If you have comments or questions regarding this manual, please direct them to your local Bristol sales representative, or direct them to one of the addresses listed at left.

Bristol, Inc. does not guarantee the accuracy, sufficiency or suitability of the software delivered herewith. The Customer shall inspect and test such software and other materials to his/her satisfaction before using them with important data.

There are no warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, concerning the software and other materials delivered herewith.

TeleFlow

™

is a trademark of Bristol, Inc. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.

Copyright (c) 2007, Bristol, Inc., 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of

Bristol, Inc.

Supplement Guide - S1400A

Issue: 04/03

TeleFlow

TM

SITE CONSIDERATIONS

For

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION,

GROUNDING

&

WIRING

A Guide for the Protection of

Site Equipment & Personnel

In the Installation of

Series 3530-XX-X Instrumentation

Bristol Babcock

NOTICE

Copyright Notice

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Request for Additional Instructions

Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.

TeleFlow TM and TeleRTU TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.

Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of

Bristol Babcock.

Supplement Guide S1400A

SITE CONSIDERATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION, GROUNDING & WIRING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.1

4.1.1

4.1.2

4.1.3

4.1.4

4.1.5

4.2

3.1

3.1.1

3.2

3.3

3.3.1

3.3.1.1

3.3.1.2

3.3.1.3

3.3.2

3.3.2.1

3.3.3

3.4

3.4.1

3.4.2

SECTION TITLE

1.1

1.2

2.1

2.1.1

2.2

2.2.1

2.2.2

2.3

PAGE #

Section 1 - INTRODUCTION

GENERAL INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................1-1

MAJOR TOPICS.............................................................................................................1-1

Section 2 - PROTECTION

PROTECTING INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS...................................................................2-1

Quality Is Conformance To Requirements....................................................................2-1

PROTECTING EQUIPMENT & PERSONNEL ...........................................................2-1

Considerations For The Protection of Personnel.......................................................... 2-2

Considerations For The Protection of Equipment........................................................2-2

OTHER SITE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS...............................................................2-3

Section 3 - GROUNDING & ISOLATION

POWER & GROUND SYSTEMS...................................................................................3-1

Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8. ............................................................................. 3-1

IMPORTANCE OF GOOD GROUNDS.........................................................................3-2

EARTH GROUND CONNECTIONS.............................................................................3-2

Establishing a Good Earth Ground. ..............................................................................3-2

Soil Conditions................................................................................................................3-3

Soil Types ........................................................................................................................3-3

Dry, Sandy or Rocky Soil................................................................................................3-5

Ground Wire Considerations. ........................................................................................3-6

Modem Ground Wiring Diagrams .................................................................................3-7

Other Grounding Considerations. ...............................................................................3-20

ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FROM THE PIPELINE .................................................3-21

Meter Runs Without Cathodic Protection...................................................................3-21

Meter Runs With Cathodic Protection ........................................................................3-22

Section 4 - LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS

STROKES & STRIKES ..................................................................................................4-1

Chance of Being Struck by Lightning. ..........................................................................4-1

Antenna Caution ............................................................................................................4-3

Ground Propagation .......................................................................................................4-5

Tying it all Together.......................................................................................................4-5

Impulse Protection Summary ........................................................................................4-5

USE OF LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS................................4-6

Supplement S1400A Page 0-1 Table Of Contents

Supplement Guide S1400A

SITE CONSIDERATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION, GROUNDING & WIRING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.1

5.2

5.2.1

5.2.2

5.2.3

5.2.4

5.2.5

5.2.6

5.2.7

5.2.8

5.2.9

5.2.10

SECTION TITLE PAGE #

Section 5 - WIRING TECHNIQUES

OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................5-1

INSTRUMENT WIRING. ..............................................................................................5-1

Common Returns............................................................................................................5-1

Use of Twisted Shielded Pair Wiring (with Overall Insulation)..................................5-2

Grounding of Cable Shields. ..........................................................................................5-3

Use of Known Good Earth Grounds ..............................................................................5-3

Earth Ground Wires .......................................................................................................5-3

Working Neatly & Professionally ..................................................................................5-3

High Power Conductors and Signal Wiring ..................................................................5-4

Use of Proper Wire Size ................................................................................................. 5-4

Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors .......................................................................5-4

Secure Wiring Connections............................................................................................5-5

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

1. IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - ANSI/IEEE Std

142-1982

2. IEEE Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize Electrical Noise inputs to Controllers from External Sources - IEE Std 518-1982

3.

Lightning Strike Protect; Roy B. Carpenter, Jr. & Mark N. Drabkin, Ph.D.; Lightning Eliminators &

Consultant, Inc., 6687 Arapahoe Road, Boulder Colorado

4.

Lightning Protection Manual for Rural Electric Systems, NRECA Research Project 82-5, Washington DC,

1983

5.

Grounding for the Control of EMI; Hugh W. Denny; Don White Consultants, Inc., 1983, 1 st Edition

6.

Fundamentals of EGM - Electrical Installations; Michael D. Price; NorAm Gas Transmission, 525 Milam

Street, Shreveport, Louisiana 71151

7.

TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8 Installation Instructions - PIP-3530MGKI; Bristol Babcock,

Watertown, CT 06795

Supplement S1400A Page 0-2 Table Of Contents

Section 1 - Overview

1.1 INTRODUCTION

This document provides information pertaining to the installation of TeleFlow systems; more specifically, information covering reasons, theory and techniques for protecting your personnel and equipment from electrical damage. Your instrument system affects the quality of service provided by your company and many aspects of its operational safety.

Loss of instruments means lost production and profits as well as increased expenses.

Information contained in this document is for educational purposes. Bristol Babcock makes no warranties or guarantees on the effectiveness or the safety of techniques described herein.

Where the safety of installations and personnel is concerned, refer to the National Electrical

Code Rules and rules of local regulatory agencies.

1.2

MAJOR TOPICS

Topics are covered in seven sections designed to pinpoint major areas of concern for the protection of site equipment and personnel. The following overview is provided for each of the major sections.

· Section 2 - Protection

This section provides the reasons for protecting instrument systems. An overview of the definition of quality and what we are trying to accomplish in the protection of site installations and how to satisfy the defined requirements is presented. Additionally, this section provides considerations for the protection of personnel and equipment.

· Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Construction of the TeleFlow with respect to grounds, isolation and electrical considerations is discussed. Information pertaining to what constitutes a good earth ground, how to test and establish such grounds, as well as when and how to connect equipment to earth grounds is provided

· Section 4 - Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors

Some interesting information dealing with Lightning strikes and strokes is presented in technical and statistical form along with a discussion of how to determine the likelyhood of a lightning strike.

Protecting equipment and personnel during the installation of radios and antenna is discussed in a review of the dangers to equipment and personnel when working with antennas. Reasons for the use of lightning arresters and surge protectors are presented along with overviews of how each device protects site equipment.

· Section 5 - Wiring Techniques

Installation of Power and “Measurement & Control” wiring is discussed. Information on obscure problems, circulating ground and power loops, bad relays, etc. is presented.

Good wire preparation and connection techniques along with problems to avoid are discussed. This sections list the ten rules of instrument wiring.”

Section 1 - Overview Page 1-1 S1400A

Section 2 - Protection

2.1 PROTECTING INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS

Electrical instrumentation is susceptible to damage from a variety of natural and man made phenomena. In addition to wind, rain and fire, the most common types of system and equipment damaging phenomena are lightning, power faults, communication surges & noise and other electrical interference’s caused by devices such as radios, welders, switching gear, automobiles, etc. Additionally there are problems induced by geophysical electrical potential & noise plus things that are often beyond our wildest imagination.

2.1.1 Quality Is Conformance To Requirements

A quality instrumentation system is one that works reliably, safely and as purported by the equipment manufacturer (and in some cases by the system integrator) as a result of good equipment design and well defined and followed installation practices. If we except the general definition of quality to be, “quality is conformance to requirements,” we must also except the premise that a condition of “quality” can’t exist where requirements for such an end have not been evolved. In other words, you can’t have quality unless you have requirements that have been followed. By understanding the requirements for a safe, sound and reliable instrumentation system, and by following good installation practices (as associated with the personnel and equipment in question), the operational integrity of the equipment and system will be enhanced.

Understanding what is required to properly install BBI equipment in various environments, safely, and in accordance with good grounding, isolating and equipment protection practices goes a long way toward maintaining a system which is healthy to the owner and customer alike. Properly installed equipment is easier to maintain and operate, and is more efficient and as such more profitable to our customers. Following good installation practices will minimize injury, equipment failure and the customer frustrations that accompany failing and poorly operating equipment (of even the finest design). Additionally, personnel involved in the installation of a piece of equipment add to or subtract from the reliability of a system by a degree which is commensurate with their technical prowess, i.e., their understanding of the equipment, site conditions and the requirements for a quality installation.

2.2

PROTECTING EQUIPMENT & PERSONNEL

TeleFlow installations must be performed in accordance with National Electrical Code

Rules, electrical rules set by local regulatory agencies, and depending on the customer environment (gas, water, etc), other national, state and local agencies such as the American

Water Works Association (AWWA). Additionally, installation at various customer sites may be performed in conjunction with a “safety manager” or utility personnel with HAZMAT

(hazardous material) training on materials present (or potentially present) as required by

OSHA, the customer, etc.

Section 2 - Protection Page 2-1 S1400A

2.2.1

Considerations For The Protection of Personnel

Always evaluate the site environment as if your life depended on it. Make sure that you understand the physical nature of the location where you will be working. Table 2-1 provides a general guideline for evaluating an installation site.

Table 2-1 - Installation Site Safety Evaluation Guide

#

1 Indoor or outdoor – Dress Appropriately

Guide

2 If outdoor, what kind of environment, terrain, etc. Watch out for local varmint (bees, spiders, snakes, etc.)

3 If indoor or outdoor – determine if there are any pieces of dangerous equipment or any processes which might be a risk to your safety

4 If in a tunnel, bunker, etc. watch out for a build up of toxic or flammable gases. Make sure the air is good. Watch out for local varmint (bees, spiders, snakes, etc.)

5 Hazardous or Non-Hazardous Environment – Wear appropriate safety equipment and perform all necessary safety measures.

6 Before installing any equipment or power or ground wiring, make sure that there are no lethal (life threatening) voltages between the site where the instrument will be installed and other equipment, pipes, cabinets, etc. or to earth itself.

7 Never assume that adjacent or peripheral equipment has been properly installed and grounded. Determine if this equipment and a TeleFlow can be touched simultaneously without hazard to personnel and/or equipment?

8 Before embarking to remote locations where there are few or no human inhabitants ask a few simple questions like, should I bring water, food, hygienic materials, first aid kit, etc?

Be Prepared!

9 Observe the work habits of those around you – for your own safety!

Some of the items that a service person should consider before ever going on site can be ascertained by simply asking questions of the appropriate individual. Obviously other safety considerations can only be established at the installation site.

2.2.2

Considerations For The Protection of Equipment

Always evaluate the site installation/service environment and equipment. Understand the various physical interfaces you will be dealing with such as TeleFlow mounting and supporting, transducer mechanical and electrical connections, TeleFlow analog and digital circuits, power circuits, communication circuits and various electrical grounds. Table 2-2 provides a general guideline for evaluating the equipment protection requirements of an installation site.

Table 2-2 – Equipment Protection Site Safety Evaluation Guide

# Guide

1 Environment - Class I, Division 2 - Nonincendive

Environment - Class I, Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe

Other – Safe or unrated area

2 Earth Ground - Established by mechanical/electrical or

(both) or not at all.

3 Is the area prone to lightning strikes?

4 Are there surge suppressors installed or to be installed?

5 Are there overhead or underground power or communication cables in the immediate area?

Reference Section

See Appendix A of CI-3530-XX-X

See Appendix B of CI-3530-XX-X

See Section 3

See Section 4

See Section 4

See Section 2.3

S1400A Page 2-2 Section 2 - Protection

Table 2-2 –Equipment Protection Site Safety Evaluation Guide (Continued)

# Guide

6 Is there an antenna in the immediate area?

7 If pipe mounted, is a cathodic charge present on the pipe? Should the

TeleFlow be isolated?

8 How close is other equipment? Can someone safely touch this equipment and a TeleFlow simultaneously?

9 Determine equipment ground requirements. How will the TeleFlow and its related wiring be grounded? Consider Earth Ground, Circuit

Ground, Conduit Ground, Site Grounds, Manifold grounded or not?

10 Are there any obviously faulty or questionable power or ground circuits?

Reference Section

See Section 4.1.2

See Section 3.4

See Section 2.3

See Section 3

See Section 2.3

2.3

OTHER SITE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Overhead or underground power or communication cables must be identified prior to installing a new unit. Accidentally cutting, shorting or simply just contacting power, ground, communication or process control I/O wiring can have potentially devastating effects on site equipment, the process system and or personnel.

Don’t assume that it is safe to touch adjacent equipment, machinery, pipes, cabinets or even the earth itself. Adjacent equipment may not have been properly wired or grounded, may be defective or may have one or more loose system grounds. Measure between the case of a questionable piece of equipment and its earth ground for voltage. If a voltage is present, something is wrong.

AC powered equipment with a conductive case should have the case grounded. If you don’t see a chassis ground wire, don’t assume that it is safe to touch this equipment. If you notice that equipment has been grounded to pipes, conduit, structural steel, etc., you should be leery. Note: AWWA’s policy on grounding of electric circuits on water pipes states,

“The American Water Works Association (AWWA) opposes the grounding of electrical systems to pipe systems conveying water to the customer’s premises….”

Be sure that the voltage between any two points in the instrument system is less than the stand-off voltage. Exceeding the stand-off voltage will cause damage to the instrument and will cause the instrument to fail.

Section 2 - Protection Page 2-3 S1400A

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

3.1 POWER & GROUND SYSTEMS

TeleFlow GFCs, TeleFlow ECRs, TeleFlow Correctors, TeleRTUs and TeleRecorders are similar in that they all have basically two system grounds, i.e., Chassis Gnd and

CPU/Circuit Ground. Chassis Ground is galvanically isolated from CPU/Circuit Ground by

500V (ac/dc). A jumper on the CPU Board would (if installed) place these two ground systems at the same potential and thus eliminate the 500V galvanic isolation. Installation of this jumper is not recommended. CPU/Circuit Ground consists of Power, Analog, Digital, and Comm. Grounds (all common).

Teleflows are DC (+6V or +12V) systems. AC power supplies are not provided with

TeleFlows. The TeleFlow’s Electronics are galvanically isolated from the case and should not be affected by cathodic protection or other EMF on the pipeline. Grounding to the pipeline, i.e., completing a connection between the 3530-XXX Ground Lug and the mounting media (valve, manifold, pipeline, etc.) is not recommended even if the media in question is earth grounded. When grounding a TeleFlow, always connect directly to a known good Earth Ground.

NOTE

Never connect the CPU Board’s Ground Lug to Earth Ground. The

CPU Board’s CPU/Circuit Ground must always be isolated from the case. The TeleFlow/TeleRTU/TeleRecorder case is to be connected to

Earth Ground.

NOTE

Some 3530-20Bs and 3530-25Bs have been factory shipped with the

Cabinet Ground Cable connected to the CPU Board’s Ground Ring.

Remove this ground connection from the CPU Board. This cable should be removed (or electrically isolated) if a modem is not present. If a modem is present, the Cabinet Ground Cable should be connected to the modem.

3.1.1 Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8

Some TeleFlows (3530-10B), TeleRTUs (3530-15B), TeleRecorders (3530-45B) and TeleFlow

Correctors (3530-50B) have been shipped without a system Ground Lug. These units must be modified before they can be properly connected to earth ground. Product Information

Package PIP-3530-MGKI provides the information required to properly install the TeleFlow

Modem Grounding Kit (621495-01-8). This kit may also be used to support a TeleRTU

Module (3530-35B).

The TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit consists of the following items: i Hex Nut - #10-32 i Cabinet Ground Cable i Self-Locking Nut - #10-32 UNF i Flat Washer - #10 i Ground Lug

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-1 S1400A

i Pan Head Screw - #10-32 x 3/4”) i Pan Head Screw - - #4-40 x 3/8” i Self-Locking Nut - #4-40 UNC i Hex Nut - #4-40

3.2 IMPORTANCE OF GOOD GROUNDS

Model 3530-XXXs are utilized in instrument and control systems that must operate continually and within their stated accuracy over long periods of time with minimum attention. Since many system sites are unmanned and located in remote areas, failures resulting from an improperly grounded system can become costly in terms of lost time and disrupted processes. A properly grounded system will help prevent electrical shock hazards resulting from contact with live metal surfaces, provide additional protection of equipment from lightning strikes and power surges, minimize the effects of electrical noise and power transients, and reduce signal errors caused by ground wiring loops. Conversely, an improperly grounded system may exhibit a host of problems that appear to have no relationship to grounding. It is essential that the reader (service technician) have a good understanding of this subject to prevent needless troubleshooting procedures.

WARNING

This device must be installed in accordance with the National

Electrical Code (NEC) ANSI/NEPA-70. Installation in hazardous locations must also comply with Article 500 of the code. For information on the usage of Model 3530-XXX units in Class I, Division

2, Groups C & D Hazardous and Nonhazardous locations, see appendix A of the applicable CI-3530-XXX manual. For information on the usage of Models 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B in Class I,

Division 1, Groups C & D Hazardous locations, see appendix B of CI-

3530-10B, CI-3530-40B or CI-3530-50B.

3.3

EARTH GROUND CONNECTIONS

To properly ground a TeleFlow (3530-10B/20B/40B), TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B),

TeleRecorder (3530-45B/55B) or TeleFlow Corrector (3530-50B), connect the Earth Ground wire between the Ground Lug on the bottom of the case and a known good Earth Ground.

Observe recommendations provided in topics Establishing a Good Earth Ground and

Ground Wire Considerations. Note: In the case of the TeleRecorder (3530-55B), connection to a known good Earth Ground is only required when a BBI 9600 PSTN modem is installed.

3.3.1 Establishing a Good Earth Ground

A common misconception of a ground is that it consists of nothing more than a metal pipe driven into the soil. While such a ground may function for some applications, it will often not be suitable for a complex system of sophisticated electronic equipment. Conditions such as soil type, composition and moisture will all have a bearing on ground reliability.

A basic ground consists of a 3/4-inch diameter rod with a minimum 8-foot length driven into conductive earth to a depth of about 7-feet as shown in Figure 3-1. Number 3 or 4 AWG solid copper wire should be used for the ground wire. The end of the wire should be clean,

S1400A Page 3-2 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

free of any coating and fastened to the rod with a clamp. This ground connection should be covered or coated to protect it from the weather and the environment.

Figure 3-1 - Basic Ground Rod Installation

3.3.1.1 Soil Conditions

Before installing a ground rod, the soil type and moisture content should be analyzed.

Ideally, the soil should be moist and moderately packed throughout to the depth of the ground rod. However, some soils will exhibit less than ideal conditions and will require extra attention.

Soil types can be placed into two general categories with respect to establishing and maintaining a good earth ground, i.e., ‘Good Soil’ and ‘Poor Soil.’

To be a good conductor, soil must contain some moisture and free ions (from salts in the soil). In very rainy areas, the salts may be washed out of the soil. In very sandy or arid area the soil may be to dry and/or salt free to a good conductor. If salt is lacking add rock salt

(NaCl); if the soil is dry add calcium chloride (CaCl

2

).

3.3.1.2 Soil Types: Good

Damp Loam

Salty Soil or Sand

Farm Land

Poor

Back Fill

Dry Soil

Sand Washed by a Lot of Rain

Dry Sand (Desert)

Rocky Soil

Ground Beds must always be tested for conductivity prior to being placed into service. A brief description of ground bed testing in ‘Good Soil’ and ‘Poor Soil’ is provided herein.

Details on this test are described in the National Electrical Code Handbook. Once a reliable

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-3 S1400A

ground has been established, it should be tested on a regular basis to preserve system integrity.

Figure 3-2 - Basic Ground Bed Soil Test Setup

Figure 3-3 - Basic Ground Bed Soil Test Setup with Additional Ground Rods

Figure 3-2 shows the test setup for ‘Good Soil’ conditions. If the Megger* reads less than 5 ohms, the ground is good. The lower the resistance, the better the earth ground. If the

S1400A Page 3-4 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Megger reads more than 10 ohms, the ground is considered ‘poor.’ If a poor ground is indicated, one or more additional ground rods connected 10 feet from the main ground rod should be driven into the soil and interconnected via bare AWG 0000 copper wire and 1” x

¼-20 cable clamps as illustrated in Figure 3-3). * Note: Megger is a Trademark of the

Biddle Instrument Co. (now owned by AVO International). Other devices that may be used to test ground resistance are “Viboground”; Associated Research,

Inc., “Groundmeter”; Industrial Instruments, Inc., and “Ground-ohmer”; Herman

H. Sticht Co., Inc.

If the Megger still reads more than 10 ohms, mix a generous amount of cooking salt, ice cream salt or rock salt with water and then pour about 2.5 to 5 gallons of this solution around each rod (including the test rods). Wait 15 minutes and re-test the soil. If the test fails, the soil is poor and a ‘Poor Soil Ground Bed’ will have to be constructed.

Figure 3-4 shows a typical Poor Soil Ground Bed Electrode. A Poor Soil Ground Bed will typically consists of four or more 10-foot long electrodes stacked vertically and separated by earth. Figure 3-5 shows the construction of a Poor Soil Ground Bed. For some poor soil sites, the ground bed will be constructed of many layers of ‘Capacitive Couplings’ as illustrated. In extremely poor soil sites one or more 3’ by 3’ copper plates (12 gauge or 1/16” thick) will have to be buried in place of the electrodes.

Figure 3-4 - Ground Electrode Construction for Poor Soil Conditions

3.3.1.3 Dry, Sandy or Rocky Soil

Very dry soil will not provide enough free ions for good conductance and a single ground rod will not be effective. A buried counterpoise or copper screen is recommended for these situations. It will be necessary to keep the soil moist through regular applications of water.

Sandy soil, either wet or dry, may have had its soluble salts leached out by rain water, thereby reducing conductivity of the ground. High currents from lightning strikes could also melt sand and cause glass to form around the ground rod, rendering it ineffective. A buried counterpoise or copper screen is preferred for these installations along with regular applications of salt water.

Rocky soil can pose many grounding problems. A counterpoise or copper plate will probably be required. Constructing a trench at the grounding site and mixing the fill with a hygroscopic salt such as calcium chloride may help for a time. Soaking the trench with water on a regular basis will maintain conductivity.

Any TeleFlow, TeleRTU, TeleRecorder or TeleFlow Corrector, may be connected to Earth

Ground via its Ground Lug; however, units equipped with a BBI 9600 bps PSTN modem must be connected to Earth Ground. Units with phone modems require the use of a

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-5 S1400A

lightning arrestor. The lightning arrestor must be situated at the point where the communication line enters the building.

Figure 3-5 - Poor Soil Ground Bed Construction Diagram

3.3.2 Ground Wire Considerations i Ground wire size should be AWG 4. It is recommended that stranded copper wire is used for this application and that the length should be as short as possible.

i This ground wire should be clamped or brazed to the Ground Bed Conductor (that is typically a stranded copper AWG 0000 cable installed vertically or horizontally).

i The wire ends should be tinned with solder prior to insertion into the TeleFlow

Ground Lug.

i The ground wire should be run such that any routing bend in the cable has a minimum radius of 12-inches below ground and 8-inches above ground.

S1400A Page 3-6 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

3.3.2.1 Modem Ground Wiring Diagrams

Figure 3-6A/B - TeleFlow Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-10B, -15B, 45B & -50B

Figure 3-7A/B - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-20B & -25B

Figure 3-8A/B - TeleFlow Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-20B

Figure 3-9A/B - TeleRTU Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-25B

Figure 3-10A/B - TeleFlow/Corrector/TeleRTU Modem Ground Wiring (Side View)

Figure 3-11A/B - TeleRecorder (3530-45B) Modem Ground Wiring (Front View)

Figure 3-12

Figure 3-13

- TeleRecorder (3530-55B) Modem Ground Wiring (Front View)

- Earth Grounding Of TeleFlow Modem & Case

Figure 3-6A - TeleFlow Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-7 S1400A

S1400A

Figure 3-6B - TeleFlow Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring

Page 3-8 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Figure 3-7A - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem (396039-02-2)

Ground Wiring

(Side View)

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-9 S1400A

S1400A

Figure 3-7B - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem (400000-01-6)

Ground Wiring

(Side View)

Page 3-10 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Figure 3-8A - TeleFlow Plus Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring

(Front View)

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-11 S1400A

S1400A

Figure 3-8B - TeleFlow Plus Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring

(Front View)

Page 3-12 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Figure 3-9A - TeleRTU Plus Modem (396039-02-2)

Ground Wiring

(Front View)

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-13 S1400A

S1400A

Figure 3-9B - TeleRTU Plus Modem (400000-01-6)

Ground Wiring

(Front View)

Page 3-14 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Figure 3-10A - 3530-10B/15B/50B Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring (Side View)

Figure 3-10B - 3530-10B/15B/50B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring (Side View)

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-15 S1400A

Figure 3-11A - 3530-45B Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring (Front View)

S1400A Page 3-16 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Figure 3-11B - 3530-45B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring

(Front View)

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-17 S1400A

Figure 3-12 - 3530-55B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring

(Front View)

Figure 3-13 shows a model 3530-10B (TeleFlow) installation. An AWG 4 solid copper ground wire has been connected to the Ground Lug on the bottom of the enclosure and to

Earth Ground. The units Earth Ground Cable should be clamped to an exposed Ground Rod or to an AWG 0000 stranded copper Ground Cable that in turn should be connected to either an Earth Ground Rod or Earth Ground Bed. Both ends of the units Earth Ground

Cable must be free of any coating such as paint or insulated covering as well as any oxidation. The connecting point of the Ground Rod or AWG 0000 Ground Cable must also be free of any coating and free of oxidation. Once the ground connection has been established (at either the Ground Rod or Ground Cable) it should be covered or coated to protect it from the environment.

S1400A Page 3-18 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Note:

3530-40B not shown but similar to 3530-10B/15B/50B without modem.

3530-55B not shown (see Figure 3-12). Connect AWG 4 Earth Ground

Cable to Ground Lug when a BBI 9600 bps PSTN Modem is installed.

Figure 3-13 - Earth Grounding Of TeleFlow Modem & Case

Note that the recommended grounding convention for a model 3530-XXX is to install the specified AWG 4 Earth Ground Cable between the Ground Lug (on the bottom of the unit in

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-19 S1400A

question) and a known good Earth Ground. Some models may be equipped with an optional radio. Units equipped with the radio option (not shown) may have an optional polyphaser

(lightning arrester) installed. Regardless of the 3530-XXX configuration, an Earth Ground

Cable should always be installed between the units Ground Lug and a known good Earth

Ground.

3.3.3 Other Grounding Considerations

For applications employing equipment that communicates over telephone lines, a lightning arrester Must Be provided. For indoor equipment the lightning arrester must be installed at the point where the communication line enters the building as shown in Figure 3-14. The ground terminal of this arrester must connect to a ground rod and/or a buried ground bed.

For units that are installed outdoors, it is recommended that the lightning arrester be installed to an Earth Ground (Bed) that is not common to the one used by the associated

3530-XXX.

Figure 3-14 - Grounding of Phone Line

Gas lines also require special grounding considerations. If a gas meter run includes a thermocouple or RTD sensor installed in a thermowell, the well (not the sensor) must be connected to a gas discharge-type lightning arrestor as shown in Figure 3-15. A copper braid, brazed to the thermal well, is dressed into a smooth curve and connected to the

S1400A Page 3-20 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

arrestor as shown. The curve is necessary to minimize arcing caused by lightning strikes or high static surges. The path from the lightning arrestor to the ground bed should also be smooth and free from sharp bends for the same reason.

Figure 3-15 - Grounding of Thermometer Well in Gas Line

Remove this ground connection from the CPU Board. This cable should be removed (or electrically isolated) if a modem is not present. If a modem is present, the Cabinet Ground Cable should be connected to the modem.

3.4 ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FROM THE PIPELINE

3.4.1 Meter Runs Without Cathodic Protection

TeleFlows (3530-10B, 3530-20B & 3530-40B) may be mounted directly on the pipeline or remotely on a vertical stand-alone two-inch stand-pipe (see Figure 3-16). The Earth Ground

Cable is to run between the TeleFlow’s Ground Lug and Earth Ground (Rod or Bed) even though the TeleFlow'’s Multivariable Transducer may be grounded to the pipeline.

TeleFlow Correctors (3530-50B) are typically mounted directly to a Turbine Meter. The

Earth Ground Cable is to run between the TeleFlow Corrector’s Ground Lug and Earth

Ground (Rod or Bed). If any pressure transmitters or pulse transducers are remotely mounted, connect their chassis grounds to the pipeline or earth ground.

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-21 S1400A

Figure 3-16 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Remote Installation without Cathodic Protection

3.4.2 Meter Runs With Cathodic Protection

Dielectric isolators are available from Bristol Babcock and are always recommended as an added measure in isolating the TeleFlow (3530-10B or 3530-20B) from the pipeline even though the TeleFlow does provide 500V galvanic isolation from the pipeline and should not be affected by cathodic protection or other EMF on the pipeline. TeleFlows (3530-10B, 3530-

20B & 3530-40B) may be mounted directly on the pipeline (see Figure 3-17) or remotely on a vertical stand-alone two-inch stand-pipe (see Figure 3-18). It is recommended that isolation fitting always be used in remotely mounted meter systems. An isolation fittings or gasket should be installed between the following connections: i all conductive tubing that runs between the pipeline and mounting valve manifold and/or the units miltivariable pressure transducer i all conductive connections or tubing runs between the GFC and turbine meter, pulse transducer, or any input other device that is mounted on the pipeline i any Temperature Transducer, Pressure Transmitter, etc. and their mount/interface to the pipeline.

S1400A Page 3-22 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Mount the GFC (3530-10B/20B) or ECR (3530-40B) on a stand-alone vertical 2-inch pipe.

The ground conductor connects between the GFC/ECR’s Ground Lug and a known good earth ground. Connect the cases of Temperature Transducers, Pressure Transmitters, etc., to the known good earth ground. If the mounting 2-inch pipe is in continuity with the pipeline it will have to be electrically isolated from the GFC/ECR. Use a strong heat-shrink material such as RAYCHEM WCSM 68/22 EU 3140. This black tubing will easily slip over the 2-inch pipe and then after uniform heating (e.g., with a rose-bud torch) it electrically insulates and increases the strength of the pipe stand.

See BBI Specification Summary F1670SS-0a for information on PGI Direct Mount Systems and Manifolds.

Figure 3-17 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Direct Mount Installation

(with Cathodic Protection)

Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-23 S1400A

Figure 3-18 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Remote Installation

(with Cathodic Protection)

S1400A Page 3-24 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation

Section 4 - Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors

4.1 STROKES & STRIKES

Lightning takes the form of a pulse that typically has a 2 µS rise and a 10 µS to 40 µS decay to a 50% level. The IEEE standard is an 8 µS by 20 µS waveform. The peak current will average 18 KA for the first impulse and about half of that for the second and third impulses. Three strokes (impulses) is the average per lightning strike. The number of visible flashes that may be seen is not necessarily the number of electrical strokes.

A lightning strike acts like a constant current source. Once ionization occurs, the air becomes a luminous conductive plasma reaching up to 60,000° F. The resistance of a struck object is of little consequence except for the power dissipation on the object (I 2 x R). Fifty percent of all lightning strikes will have a first impulse of at least 18 KA, ten percent will exceed the 60 KA level, and only about one percent will exceed 120 KA.

4.1.1 Chance of Being Struck by Lightning

The map of Figure 4-1 shows the average annual number of thunderstorm days

(Isokeraunic level) for the various regions within the continental U.S.A. This map is not representative of the severity of the storm or the number of lightning strikes since it does not take into account more than one lightning strike in a thunderstorm day. The

Isokeraunic or Isoceraunic number provides a meteorological indication of the frequency of thunderstorm activity; the higher the Isokeraunic number the greater the lightning strike activity for a given area. These levels vary across the world from a low of 1 to a high of 300.

Within the United States the Isokeraunic level various from a low of 1 to a high of 100.

Figure 4-1 - Average Thunderstorm Days of the Year (for Continental USA)

Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-1 S1400A

Thunderstorms are cloud formations that produce lightning strikes (or strokes). Across the

United States there is an average of 30 thunderstorm days per year. Any given storm may produce from one to several strokes. Data on the subject indicates that for an average area within the United States there can be eight to eleven strokes to each square mile per year.

The risk of stroke activity is increased for various areas such central Florida where up to 38 strokes to each square mile per year are likely to occur.

To determine the probability of a given structure (tower, building, etc.) (within your location) being struck, perform the following computation:

1.

Using the map of Figure 4-1 (or a comparable meteorological map for your local), find the Isokeraunic level (I) for your area. Then using Chart 1, find “ A ” for your area.

2.

Refer to Figure 4-1 to find the latitude. Then using Chart 2, find “ B ” for your latitude

(Lat.°).

3.

Multiply “ A ” x “ B ” to get “ C ” .

4.

To calculate the number of lightning strikes per year that are likely to strike a given object (tower, mast, etc.), use the equation that follows (where “ C ” was calculated in step 3 and “ H ” is equal to the height of the object.

Strikes Per Year = ( “ C ” x H 2 ) ÷ (.57 x 10 6 )

Chart 1

I “ A ”

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

26

8

85

169

275

402

548

712

893

1069

1306

25

30

35

40

45

Chart 2

LAT.° “ B ”

.170

.200

.236

.280

.325

Note for these charts:

I = Thunderstorm Days Per Year (Isokeraunic Number)

A= Stroke activity for associated Isokeraunic Area

B= Height/Stroke coefficient for associated latitude

For Example: On Long Island, New York (Isokeraunic number 20), Chart 1 gives “A” to equal 85. The latitude is approximately 40°. Referring to Chart 2, “B” is found to be equal to

.28. “C” for this example is equal to 23.80. Using the equation for strikes per year, it is determined that a 100-foot tower has .4 chances per year of being struck by lightning.

Assuming that no other structures are nearby, the tower will more than likely be struck by lightning at least once in three years.

Note: The Isokeraunic activity numbers connoted as I, “A” and “B” in Charts 1 and 2 above are provided for the continental United States. Isokeraunic data for various countries is available from various federal or state Civil Engineering or Meterorelogical organizations. This information is typically available from manufacturers of lightning strike protection equipment (such as Lightning Arresters).

Since TeleFlow (3530-XXX) units are battery operated systems that are isolated from AC grids (as they don’t draw power from them), they are typically immune to lightning strikes to power lines or power equipment (except for inductive flashover due to close installation proximity). However, once a radio or modem has been installed into a model 3530-XXX, the

S1400A Page 4-2 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge

possibility of damage due to a lightning strike on power or telephone lines or to a radio antenna or the antenna’s tower must be considered. Model 3530-XXX’s equipped with a radio may have an optional BBI supplied lightning arrester installed. Units equipped with modems have built in Surge Protection circuitry. It is recommended that the additional lightning protection considerations listed below be followed for units installed in areas with a high possibility or history of stroke activity.

Units equipped with a modem : In series with the phone line (as far away as possible from the equipment) – for indoor installations the lightning arrester should typically be located at the point where the line enters the structure.

Units equipped with a radio : Mount antenna discharge unit (lightning arrester) as close as possible to where the lead in wire enters the structure. For an exposed (outdoor)

3530-XXX, in the proximity of the unit. See Antenna Caution below.

4.1.2 Antenna Caution

Each year hundreds of people are killed, mutilated, or receive severe permanent injuries when attempting to install or remove an antenna or antenna lead. In many cases, the victim was aware of the danger of electrocution but failed to take adequate steps to avoid the hazard. For your safety, and for proper installation maintenance, please read and follow the safety precautions that follow - they may save your life .

i When installing or servicing an antenna:

DO NOT use a metal ladder. DO NOT step onto or touch an antenna mast while power is applied to an associated radio unless the radio is a low power (low current) type.

DO NOT work on a wet or windy day, especially during a thunderstorm or when there is lightning or thunder in your area. Dress properly; shoes with rubber soles and heels, rubber gloves, long sleeve shirt or jacket.

i The safe distance from power lines should be at least twice the height of the antenna and mast combination.

i Antenna Grounding per National Electrical Code Instructions:

A.

Use AWG 10 or 8 aluminum or AWG 1 copper-clad steel or bronze wire, or larger as ground wires for both the mast and lead-in. Securely clamp the wire to the bottom of the mast.

B.

Secure lead-in wire from antenna to antenna discharge (lightning arrester) unit and the mast ground wire to the structure (building, shed, etc.) with stand-off insulators spaced from 4 feet (1.22 meters) to 6 feet (1.83 meters) apart.

C.

Mount antenna discharge unit as close as possible to where the lead-in wire enters the structure.

D.

The hole drilled through the wall for the lead-in wire should be just large enough to accommodate the cable. Before drilling this hole, make sure there are no wires or pipes, etc. in the wall.

E.

Push the cable through the hole and form a rain drip loop close to where the wire enters the exterior of the structure.

F.

Caulk around the lead-in wire (where it enters the structure) to keep out drafts.

G.

Install lightning arresters (antenna discharge units). The grounding conductor should be run in as straight a line as practicable from the antenna mast and/or the antenna discharge units to grounding electrode(s).

H.

Only connect the antenna cable to the radio after the mast has been properly grounded and the lead-in cable has been properly connected to lightning arresters which in turn have each been properly connected to a known good earth ground.

Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-3 S1400A

Figure 4-2 - Radio Antenna Field Installation Site Grounding Diagram

For all systems it is best to have all communication equipment input/output grounds tied together. In the case of TeleFlow (3530-XXX) this is accomplished via the unit’s Ground

Lug. However additional communication equipment lightning arresters and surge suppres-

S1400A Page 4-4 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge

sors should be tied to the same system ground. System ground consists of the tower leg grounds utility ground and bulkhead-equipment ground-stakes that are tied together via bare copper wire.

4.1.3 Ground Propagation

As in any medium, a dynamic pulse, like R.F., will take time to propagate. This propagation time will cause a differential step voltage to exist in time between any two ground rods that are of different radial distances from the strike. With a ground rod tied to a struck tower, the impulse will propagate its step voltage outwardly from this rod in ever-expanding circles, like a pebble thrown into a pond. If the equipment house has a separate ground rod and the power company and/or telephone company grounds are also separate, the dynamic step voltage will cause currents to flow to equalize these separate ground voltages. Then if the coax cable (associated with a radio) is the only path linking the equipment chassis with the tower ground, the surge can destroy circuitry.

4.1.4 Tying it all Together

To prevent this disaster from occurring, a grounding system must be formed which interconnects all grounds together. This will equalize and distribute the surge charge to all grounds, and at the same time, it will make for a lower surge impedance ground system.

This interconnection can be done as a grid, where each ground has a separate line to each other ground, or by using a “rat Race” ring which forms a closed loop (not necessarily a perfect circle) which surrounds the equipment house completely.

By making this interconnection, it will be necessary to use proper I/O protectors for the equipment. Of course, these should be a requirement regardless of whether this grounding technique is used. I/O protectors are used for power lines (even those these don’t feed into a

TeleFlow unit), telephone lines, and also to minimize EMI pick-up from a strike. Ideally it is best to place all I/O protectors on a common panel that has a low inductance path to the ground system. The Teleflow (3530-XXX) would then have a single ground point from its

Ground Lug to this panel. In lieu of this, the 3530-XXX in question should be tied to a ground rod that in turn is connected to the Earth/System Ground created for the site.

Your protected equipment connected to a common single ground system will now be just like a bird sitting on a high tension wire. When lightning strikes, even with a 50 ohm surge impedance ground system, the entire system consisting of equipment, ground system, building, etc., will all rise together to the one million volt peak level (for example) and will all decay back down together. So long as there is no voltage differential (taken care of by protectors and ground interconnections, there will be no current flow through the equipment and therefore no resulting equipment damage.

4.1.5 Impulse Protection Summary i Use more than one ground rod.

i Place multi-ground stakes more than their length apart.

i Tie Power, Telco, Tower, Bulkhead and equipment ground together.

i Make all ground interconnect runs that are above ground with minimum radius bends of eight inches and run them away from other conductors and use large solid wire or a solid strap.

i Watch out for dissimilar metals connections and coat accordingly.

Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-5 S1400A

i Use bare wire radials together where possible with ground stakes to reduce ground system impedance.

i Use I/O protectors (Phone line, Radio) with a low inductance path to the ground system.

i Ground the Coaxial Cable Shield (or use an impulse suppressor) at the bottom of the tower just above the tower leg ground connection.

4.2 USE OF LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS

Units equipped with radios or modems use lightning arresters and surge protectors to protect equipment from lightning strikes, power surges and from damaging currents that have been induced onto communication lines.

The first line of defense is the Lightning Arrester. These devices typically use gas discharge bulbs that can shunt high currents and voltages to earth ground when they fire. The high current, high voltage gas discharge bulb has a relatively slow response time and only fire when their gas has been ionized by high voltage.

The second line of defense is the Surge Protector, which is made of solid state devices, fires very quickly and conducts low voltages and currents to ground. Surge protectors are built into BBI 9600 bps modems.

Lightning Arresters are applied to circuits as follows: i Equipment or circuits that can be exposed to lightning strikes, falling power lines, high ground currents caused by power system faults, by operational problems on electric railways, etc.

i Equipment installed in dry, windy areas, such as the Great Plains and the

Southwaset Desert in the United States. Wind and wind blown dust can cause high voltages (static) to appear on overhead wires, fences, and metal buildings.

Note: Lightning Arresters may explode if lightning strike is very close. Mount lightning arresters where flying parts won't cause injury to equipment or personnel.

S1400A Page 4-6 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge

Section 5 - Wiring Techniques

5.1 OVERVIEW

This section provides information pertaining to good wiring practices. Installation of Power and “Measurement & Control” wiring is discussed. Information on obscure problems, circulating ground and power loops, bad relays, etc. is presented. Good wire preparation and connection techniques along with problems to avoid are discussed.

5.2 INSTRUMENT WIRING

Each of the rules listed below is briefly discussed; the emphasis herein is placed on the avoidance of problems as well as equipment safety.

Rule 1 - Never utilize common returns.

Rule 2 - Use twisted shielded pairs (with overall insulation) on all Signal/Control circuits.

Rule 3 - Ground cable shields at one end only.

Rule 4 - Use known good earth grounds (Rod, Bed, System) and test them periodically,

Rule 5 - Earth connections must utilize smoothly dressed large wire.

Rule 6 - Perform all work neatly and professionally.

Rule 7 - Route high power conductors away from signal wiring according to NEC Rules.

Rule 8 - Use appropriately sized wires as required by the load.

Rule 9 - Use lightning arresters and surge protectors.

Rule 10 - Make sure all wiring connections are secure.

5.2.1 Common Returns

Use of common returns on I/O wiring is one of the most common causes of obscure and difficult to troubleshoot control signal problems. Since all wires and connections have distributed resistance, inductance and capacitance, the chances of a achieving a balanced system when common returns are present is very remote. Balanced systems (or circuits) are only achieved when all currents and voltages developed in association with each of the common returns are equal. In a balanced system (or circuit) there are no noise or measurment errors introduced due to by “sneak circuits.”

The illustration of Figure 5-1 shows the difference between testing an I/O circuit that is discrete and has no sneak circuits and one that utilizes common returns. Common sense tells us that it is tough to mix up connections to a twisted shielded pair (with overall vinyl covering) to every end device. Do yourself a favor; to make start up easier, DON’T USE

COMMON RETURNS!

Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-1 S1400A

Figure 5-1 - Field Wired Circuits With & Without A Common Return

5.2.2 Use of Twisted Shielded Pair Wiring (with Overall Insulation)

For all field I/O wiring the use of twisted shielded pairs with overall insulation is highly recommended. This type of cable provides discrete insulation for each of the wires and an additional overall insulated covering that provides greater E.M.I. immunity and protection to the shield as well.

S1400A Page 5-2 Section 5 - Wiring Techniques

5.2.3 Grounding of Cable Shields

DO NOT connect the cable shield to more than one ground point; it should only be grounded at one end. Cable shields that are grounded at more than one point or at both ends may have a tendency to induce circulating currents or sneak circuits that raise havoc with I/O signals. This will occur when the ground systems associated with multipoint connections to a cable shield have a high resistance or impedance between them and a ground induced voltage is developed (for what ever reason, i.e., man made error or nature produced phenomena).

5.2.4 Use of Known Good Earth Grounds

TeleFlow (models 3530-XXX) should only have one connection to earth ground. This connection is provided via the Ground Lug that is situated on the bottom of the unit. Some older units will require the installation of this ground lug when a connection to earth ground becomes absolutely necessary, i.e., when a radio or modem is added to the unit.

Since model 3530-XXX’s are DC-based systems, grounding does not take into account AC power grounding considerations. Earth grounding the 3530-XXX unit (case) is absolutely necessary when the unit is equipped with a radio or modem. Additionally these units should be connected to earth ground when they are installed in areas that have frequent lightning strikes or are located near or used in conjunction with equipment that is likely to be struck by lightning or if struck by lightning may cause equipment or associated system failure. Earth Grounds must be tested and must be known to be good before connecting the

TeleFlow. Earth grounds must be periodically tested and maintained (see Section 4).

5.2.5 Earth Ground Wires

Earth connections must utilize smoothly dressed large wire. Use AWG 3 or 4 stranded copper wire with as short a length as possible. Exercise care when trimming the insulation from the wire ends. Twists the strands tightly, trim off any frizzes and tin the ends with solder. The earth ground wire should be clamped or brazed to the Ground Bed Conductor

(that is typically a standard AWG 0000 copper cable. The earth ground wire should be run such that any routing bend in the cable is a minimum 8-inch radius above ground or a minimum 12-inch radius below ground. The only earth ground connection permitted to the

TeleFlow must be made via the unit’s Ground Lug. Make sure that the connection at the

TeleFlow’s Ground Lug is secure.

5.2.6 Working Neatly & Professionally

Take pride in your work and observe all site and maintenance safety precautions. After properly trimming the stranded pair wire ends, twist them in the same direction as their manufacturer did and then tin them with solder. Install the tinned wire end into it’s connector and then secure the associated connector’s clamping screw. Remember to check these connections for tightness from time to time. If solid copper wire is used (in conjunction with the DC Power System or for Earth Ground) make sure that the conductor is not nicked when trimming off the insulation. Nicked conductors are potential disasters waiting to happen. Neatly trim shields and whenever possible, coat them to protect them and prevent shorts and water entry.

Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-3 S1400A

Remember loose connections, bad connections, intermittent connections, corroded connections, etc., are hard to find, waste time, create system problems and confusion in addition to being costly.

5.2.7 High Power Conductors and Signal Wiring

When routing wires, keep high power conductors away from signal conductors. Space wires appropriately to vent high voltage inductance. Refer to the National Electrical Code

Handbook for regulatory and technical requirements.

5.2.8 Use of Proper Wire Size

TeleFlows utilize compression-type terminals that accommodate up to AWG 14 gauge wire.

A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and securing the screw.

Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. Slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the PCB connectors.

Provide external strain relief (utilizing Tie Wrap, etc.) to prevent the loose of slack at the

TeleFlow.

Be careful to use wire that is appropriately sized for the load. Refer to equipment manufacturer’s Specs. and the National Electrical Code Handbook for information on wire size and wire resistance. After installing the field wiring, test each load to determine if the correct voltage or current is present at the load. If you know the resistance of the field wires

(Circular Mills x Length) you should be able to calculate the load voltage. Conversely, if you know the minimum load voltage and current, you should be able to derive the maximum voltage loss that is allowable due to line resistance and then the correct wire size.

Referring to Figure 5-2, a relay that is picked by 100 mA, with a loop supply voltage of 24V and a total line resistance of 20 ohms, the load voltage (voltage across the relay) should be:

V

L

= V

S

- (V

22 = 24 - 2

C

+ V

C

)

where

V

C where 2V

+ V

C

= (R

C

+ R

= (20 Ω

C

) I

) x 0.1 A

Figure 5-2 - Calculating Load Voltage due to Line Resistance

5.2.9 Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors

Use lightning arresters in association with any radio or modem equipped unit. BBI 9600 bps modems are equipped with surge protection circuitry. Lightning arresters or Antenna

S1400A Page 5-4 Section 5 - Wiring Techniques

Discharge Units should be placed on the base of the antenna and at the point where the antenna lead (typically coax) enters the site equipment building. When a modem is used, a lightning arrester should be placed at the point where the phone line enters the site equipment building. If you use a modem (manufactured by other than BBI) it is recommended that you also install a surge suppressors or lightning arrester on the phone line as close to the modem as possible. Any unit equipped with a radio or modem must be connected to a known good earth ground via the units Ground Lug.

5.2.10 Secure Wiring Connections

Make sure that all wiring connections are secure. In time wires that were once round will become flattened due to the pressure applied by screw compression type terminals and site vibrations. After a while these compression screws have a tendency to become loose. Part of a good maintenance routine should be to check and tighten all screws associated with wiring terminal connections. Avoid nicking the wire(s) when stripping insulation.

Remember, nicked conductors will lead to future problems. Also remember to provide some cabling slack and strain relief.

If installing stranded or braided wiring that has not been tinned, be sure to tightly twist the end (in the same direction as manufactured) and then trim off any frizzed wires.

Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-5 S1400A

BLANK PAGE

READER RESPONSE FORM

Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.

DOCUMENT NUMBER: S1400A

TITLE: TeleFlow TM SITE CONSIDERATIONS For EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION,

GROUNDING & WIRING

ISSUE DATE: APRIL, 2003

COMMENT/COMPLAINT:

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Mail this page to:

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315

Bristol Babcock

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2200

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213

Website: www.bristolbabcock.com

U.S.A. Locations:

Northern Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2381

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525

[email protected]

Gulf Coast Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

2000 Governor's Circle

Suite F

Houston, TX 77092-8731

Phone: +1 (713) 685-6200

Fax: +1 (713) 681-7331

[email protected]

Western Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

1609 South Grove Avenue

Suites 106 & 107

Ontario, CA 91761

Phone: +1 (909) 923-8488

Fax: +1 (909) 923-8988

[email protected]

Southeast Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

317 S. North Lake Blvd.

Suite 1016

Altamonte Springs, FL 32701

Phone: +1 (407) 740-7084

Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106

[email protected]

Helicoid Instruments

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2218

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213 [email protected]

Central Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

777 South Central

Expressway

Suite 1-C

Richardson, TX 75080

Phone: +1 (972) 238-8197

Fax: +1 (972) 238-8198 [email protected]

International Affiliates:

Canada

Bristol Babcock, Canada

234 Attwell Drive

Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3

Canada

PH: 416-675-3820

FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]

Mexico

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso

Col. Morales Polanco

11540 Mexico, D.F.

Mexico

PH: (52-55)-52-81-81-12

FAX: (52-55)-52-81-81-09

[email protected]

Rocky Mountain Region

Bristol Babcock Inc.

906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A

Farmington, NM 87401

Phone: +1 (505) 320-5046

Fax: +1 (505) 327-3273

[email protected]

Communications

Technology Group

Bristol Babcock Inc.

317 S. North Lake Blvd.

Suite 1016

Altamonte Springs, FL 32701

Phone: +1 (407) 629-9464

Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106 [email protected]

United Kingdom

Bristol Babcock Ltd.

Vale Industrial Estate

Stourport Road

Kidderminster

Worcestershire DY11 7QU

United Kingdom

PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001

FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]

Asia Pacific

Bristol Babcock, Inc.

PO Box 1987

Bunbury, Western Australia

6231

PH: +61 (0) 8 9791 3654

FAX: +61 (0) 8 9791 3173 [email protected]

Victoria, Australia

PH: +61 (0) 3 9384 2171

FAX: +61 (0) 3 8660 2501

Calgary Office

Bristol Babcock, Canada

3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.

Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6

Canada

PH: 403-265-4808

FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]

Villahermosa Office

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Plomo No.2

Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad

Industrial

Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010

Mexico

PH: 52-993-353-3142

FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]

Middle East

Bristol Babcock Ltd.

Vale Industrial Estate

Stourport Road

Kidderminster

Worcestershire DY11 7QU

United Kingdom

PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001

FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]

RC Rev: 27-Mar-03

ESDS Manual

S14006

4/15/92

CARE AND HANDLING

OF

PC BOARDS

AND

E SD-SENSITIVE

COMPONENTS

BRISTOL BABCOCK

BLANK PAGE

ESDS Manual

S14006

4/15/92

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED 1

ESD-SENSITIVE COMPONENT HANDLING PROCEDURE 2

1. Introduction 2

2. General Rules 3

3. Protecting ESD-Sensitive Components 5

4. Static-Safe Field Procedure 6

5. Cleaning and Lubricating 8

6. Completion 10

TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED

1. Tools

Anti-Static Field kit. It is recommended that an anti-static field kit be kept on any site where solid-state printed circuit boards and other ESD-sensitive components are handled. These kits are designed to remove any existing static charge and to prevent the build-up of a static charge that could damage a PC board or

ESD-sensitive components. The typical anti-static field kit consists of the following components:

1. A work surface (10mm conductive plastic sheet with a female snap fastener in one corner for ground cord attachment).

2. A 15-foot long ground cord for grounding the work surface.

3. Wrist strap (available in two sizes, large and small, for proper fit and comfort) with a female snap fastener for ground cord attachment.

4. A coiled ground cord with a practical extension length of 10 feet for attachment to the wrist strap.

Toothbrush (any standard one will do)

1

ESDS Manual

#S14006

4/15/92

2.

Materials

Inhibitor (Texwipe Gold Mist ; Chemtronics Gold Guard, or equivalent)

Cleaner (Chemtronics Electro-Wash; Freon TF, or equivalent)

Wiping cloth (Kimberly-Clark Kim Wipes, or equivalent)

1.

ESD-SENSITIVE COMPONENT HANDLING PROCEDURE

Introduction

Microelectronic devices such as PC boards, chips and other components are electrostatic-sensitive. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) of as few as 110 volts can damage or disrupt the functioning of such devices. Imagine the damage possible from the 35,000 volts (or more) that you can generate on a dry winter day by simply walking across a carpet. In fact, you can generate as much as 6,000 volts just working at a bench.

There are two kinds of damage that can be caused by the static charge. The more severe kind results in complete failure of the PC board or component. This kind of damage is relatively simple, although often expensive, to remedy by replacing the affected item(s). The second kind of damage results in a degradation or weakening which does not result in an outright failure of the component. This kind of damage is difficult to detect and often results in faulty performance, intermittent failures, and service calls.

Minimize the risk of ESD-sensitive component damage by preventing static build-up and by promptly removing any existing charge. Grounding is effective, if the carrier of the static charge is conductive such as a human body. To protect components from

nonconductive carriers of static charges such as plastic boxes, place the component in static-shielding bags.

This manual contains general rules to be followed while handling ESD-sensitive components. Use of the anti-static field kit to properly ground the human body as well as the work surface is also discussed.

2

ESDS Manual

S14006

4/15/92

Table 1

Typical Electrostatic Voltages

Electrostatic Voltages

10-20 Percent

Relative Humidity

65-90 Percent

Relative Humidity

Means of Static

Generation

Walking across carpet

Walking over vinyl floor

Worker at bench

Vinyl envelopes for work instructions

Poly bag picked up from bench

Work chair padded with poly foam

35,000

12,000

6,000

7,000

20,000

18,000

1,500

250

100

600

1,200

1,500

2.

General Rules

(1) ESD-sensitive components shall only be removed from their static-shielding bags by a person who is properly grounded.

(2) When taken out of their static-shielding bags, ESD-sensitive components shall

never be placed over, or on, a surface which has not been properly grounded.

(3) ESD-sensitive components shall be handled in such a way that the body does not come in contact with the conductor paths and board components. Handle

ESD-sensitive components in such a way that they will not suffer damage from physical abuse or from electric shock.

(4) EPROMS/PROMS shall be kept in anti-static tubes until they are ready to use and shall be removed only by a person who is properly grounded.

(5) When inserting and removing EPROMS/PROMS from PC boards, use a chip removal tool similar to the one shown in the figure following. Remember, all work should be performed on a properly grounded surface by a properly-grounded person.

3

ESDS Manual

#S14006

4/15/92

4

Typical Chip Removal Tool

(6) It is important to note when inserting EPROMS/PROMS, that the index notch on the PROM must be matched with the index notch on the socket. Before pushing the chip into the socket, make sure all the pins are aligned with the respective socket-holes. Take special care not to crush any of the pins as this could destroy the chip.

(7) Power the system down before removing or inserting comb connectors/plugs or removing and reinstalling PC boards or ESD-sensitive components from card files or mounting hardware. Follow the power-down procedure applicable to the system being serviced.

(8) Handle all defective boards or components with the same care as new components. This helps eliminate damage caused by mishandling. Do not strip used PC boards for parts. Ship defective boards promptly to Bristol Babcock in a staticshielding bag placed inside static-shielding foam and a box to avoid damage during shipment.

ESDS Manual

S14006

4/15/92

CAUTION

Don't place ESD-sensitive components and paperwork in the same bag.

The static caused by sliding the paper into the bag could develop a charge and damage the component(s).

(9) Include a note, which describes the malfunction, in a separate bag along with each component being shipped. The repair facility will service the component and promptly return it to the field.

3.

Protecting ESD-Sensitive Components

(1) As stated previously, it is recommended that an electrically-conductive anti-static field kit be kept on any site where ESD-sensitive components are handled. A recommended ESD-protective workplace arrangement is shown on page 7. The anti-static safety kit serves to protect the equipment as well as the worker. As a safety feature, a resistor (usually of the one-megohm, 1/2-watt, current-limiting type) has been installed in the molded caps of the wrist strap cord and the ground cord. This resistor limits current should a worker accidently come in contact with a power source. Do not remove the molded caps from grounded cords. If a cord is damaged, replace it immediately.

(2) Be sure to position the work surface so that it does not touch grounded conductive objects. The protective resistor is there to limit the current which can flow through the strap. When the work surface touches a grounded conductive object, a short is created which draws the current flow and defeats the purpose of the current-limiting resistor.

(3) Check resistivity of wrist strap periodically using a commercially-available system tester similar to the one shown in the figure below:

5

ESDS Manual

#S14006

4/15/92

Note: If a system checker is not available, use an ohmmeter connected to the cable ends to measure its resistance. The ohmmeter reading should be 1 megohm +/-

15%. Be sure that the calibration date of the ohmmeter has not expired. If the ohmmeter reading exceeds 1 megohm by +/- 15%, replace the ground cord with a new one.

4.

Static-safe Field Procedure

(1) On reaching the work location, unfold and lay out the work surface on a convenient surface (table or floor). Omit this step if the table or floor has a built-in ESD-safe work surface.

(2) Attach the ground cord to the work surface via the snap fasteners and attach the other end of the ground cord to a reliable ground using an alligator clip.

(3) Note which boards or components are to be inserted or replaced.

(4) Power-down the system following the recommended power-down procedure.

(5) Slip on a known-good wristband, which should fit snugly; an extremely loose fit is not desirable.

(6) Snap the ground cord to the wristband. Attach the other end of the ground cord to a reliable ground using the alligator clip.

6

ESDS Manual

S14006

4/15/92

(7) The components can now be handled following the general rules as described in the instruction manual for the component.

(8) Place the component in a static-shielding bag before the ground cord is disconnected. This assures protection from electrostatic charge in case the work surface is located beyond the reach of the extended ground cord.

A

C

✰

R

R

D

E F

R

R

EARTH GROUND

B

G

FLOOR OF BUILDING

LEGEND

A - Chair with ground (optional)

B - ESD protective floor mat (optional)

C - Wrist strap

D - ESD protective trays, etc.

E - Ionizer

F - Other electrical equipment

G - Workbench with ESD protective table top

✰

NOTE: ALL RESISTORS 1M

Ω

+/-10% 1/2W

7

ESDS Manual

#S14006

4/15/92

(9) If a component is to undergo on-site testing, it may be safely placed on the grounded work surface for that purpose.

(10) After all component work is accomplished, remove the wrist straps and ground wire and place in the pouch of the work surface for future use.

5.

Cleaning And Lubricating

The following procedure should be performed periodically for all PC boards and when a PC board is being replaced.

CAUTION

Many PC board connectors are covered with a very fine gold-plate.

Do not use any abrasive cleaning substance or object such as a pencil eraser to clean connectors.

Use only the approved cleaner/lubricants specified in the procedure following.

WARNING

Aerosol cans and products are extremely combustible.

Contact with a live circuit, or extreme heat can cause an explosion.

Turn OFF all power and find an isolated, and ventilated area to use any aerosol products specified in this procedure.

(1) Turn the main line power OFF. Blow or vacuum out the component. This should remove potential sources of dust or dirt contamination during the remainder of this procedure.

8

ESDS Manual

S14006

4/15/92

(2) Clean PC board connectors as follows: a.

Review the static-safe field procedure detailed earlier.

b.

c.

Following the ESD-sensitive component handling procedures, remove the connectors from the boards and remove the PC boards from their holders.

Use cleaner to remove excessive dust build-up from comb connectors and other connectors. This cleaner is especially useful for removing dust.

d.

Liberally spray all PC board contacts with Inhibitor. The inhibitor:

Provides a long lasting lubricant and leaves a protective film to guard against corrosion e.

f.

Improves performance and reliability

Extends the life of the contacts

Is nonconductive, and is safe for use on most plastics

Clean the comb contacts using a lint-free wiping cloth.

Lightly mist all comb contacts again with Inhibitor.

NOTE: Do not use so much Inhibitor that it drips.

g.

Repeat the above procedure for the other PC boards from the device.

(3) Cleaning PC edge connectors a.

Use cleaner to remove excessive dust build-up from connectors. This cleaner is especially useful for removing dust.

b.

c.

Liberally spray the outboard connector with Inhibitor.

Lightly brush the outboard connector with a soft, non-metallic, bristle brush such as a toothbrush.

9

ESDS Manual

#S14006

4/15/92 d.

e.

Spray the connector liberally to flush out any contaminants.

Remove any excess spray by shaking the connector or wiping with either a toothbrush, or a lint-free wiping cloth.

6.

Completion

(1) Replace any parts that were removed.

(2) Make sure that the component cover is secure.

(3) Return the system to normal operation.

(4) Check that the component operates normally.

10

TeleFlow

Material Safety Data Sheets

Material Safety Data Sheets are provided herein to comply with OSHA’s Hazard

Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200. This standard must be consulted for specific requirements.

Material Safety Data Sheets are provided in the order listed in Table Z-1 below.

TABLE Z-1 MSDS for TeleFlow Instruction Manual CI-3530-10B

Manufacturer General Description

Bristol Babcock Part Number or Media Notes

Duracell

Non-Recharge Alkaline

Manganese Dioxide

Battery

395412-01-3 (1.5V)

Power-Sonic

Corp.

395407-02-8 (12V)

395407-01-0 (6V)

396024-01-7 (6V) Intrinsically Safe

396024-02-5 (12V) Intrinsically Safe

Eagle Pitcher Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries

395407-02-8 (12V)

395407-01-0 (6V)

390618-03-9 (3.6V - On-board)

Tadiran

Electronics

Lithium/Thionyl Chloride

Battery

395413-01-0 (7.2V) Intrinsically Safe

395413-02-8 (7.2V) Intrinsically Safe

Rayovac Corp. Reusable Alkaline Battery* 395412-02-1 (1.5V) No MSDS (*)

Dow Corning

Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries

Silicone 200(R) Fluid,

100 CST

Pressure Transducer Media Fill

* Note: According to Rayovac Corporation, these batteries don’t require an

MSDS and are suitable for disposal in ordinary landfills.

01/22/98 Appendix Z - CI-3530-10B MSDS

BLANK PAGE

Gillette

Environment

Health and Safety

37 A Street

Needham, MA 02492

781.292.8151

NAME:

CAS NO:

Page 1 of 4

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

DURACELL ALKALINE BATTERIES

Not applicable Effective Date: 06/25/2004 Rev: 8

A. — IDENTIFICATION

Composition* (1% or greater)

Manganese Dioxide (1313-13-9)

Zinc (7440-66-6)

Potassium Hydroxide (35%) (1310-58-3)

Graphite, natural (7782-42-5) or synthetic

(7440-44-0)

%

35-40

10-25

5-10

1-5

Formula: Mixture

Molecular Weight:

Synonyms:

NA

Alkaline Manganese Dioxide Batteries

MN1300 (D); MN1400 (C); MN1500 (AA) MN2400

(AAA); MX1300 (D); MX1400 (C); MX1500 (AA);

MX2400 (AAA); MX2500 (AAAA); MX1604 (9V);

MN908 (Lantern 6V); MN918

( Lantern 4.5V);

MN1604 (9V); MN9100 (N), MN1203 (4.5V); 5K69

(Flatpack); 7K67 (Flatpack) (J) and batteries comprised of these cells.

B. — PHYSICAL DATA

Boiling Point

NA °

F

NA °

C

(

Specific Gravity (H

2

O=1)

NA

Evaporation

Ether

NA

% Volatiles

NA

=1)

NA

Melting Point

°

F

NA °

C

Vapor Density (air=1)

NA

Saturation in Air

(by volume @

NA

Solubility in Water

NA

°

F)

NA

Freezing Point

°

F

NA °

C

Vapor Pressure @

NA mm Hg

Autoignition Temperature

°

F

NA

°

°

F

C pH NA

Appearance/Color Copper top battery. Contents dark in color.

Flash Point and

Test Method(s)

Flammable Limits in Air

(% by volume)

NA

Lower NA % Upper NA %

C. — REACTIVITY

Stability X Stable Unstable Polymerization may occur X will not occur

Conditions to Avoid

Do not heat, crush, disassemble, short circuit or recharge.

Incompatible Materials

Not applicable

Conditions to Avoid

Hazardous Decomposition Products

Contents incompatible with strong oxidizing agents.

Thermal degradation may produce hazardous fumes of zinc and manganese; hydrogen gas; caustic vapors of potassium hydroxide and other toxic by-products.

Footnotes

NA=Not Available

Please note: Some Duracell alkaline batteries contain the Duracell Power Check™ battery energy gauge which is a small conductive strip located underneath the PVC battery label that indicates the amount of charge in the battery. It is composed of minute quantities of conductive materials. Due to the small quantity of materials and their solid form, a health or environmental risk is unlikely.

GMEL# 2002.8

Page 2 of 4

D. — HEALTH HAZARD DATA

Occupational Exposure Limits (PELs, TLVs, etc.)

8-Hour TWAs: Manganese Dioxide (as Mn) - 5 mg/m 3 (Ceiling) (OSHA); 0.2 mg/m 3 (ACGIH/Duracell)

Potassium Hydroxide - 2 mg/m 3 (Ceiling) (ACGIH)

Graphite (all kinds except fibrous)-2 mg/ m 3 (ACGIH); (synthetic)-15 mg/m 3 (total, OSHA );

5 mg/m 3 (respirable, OSHA)

These levels are not anticipated under normal consumer use conditions.

Warning Signals

Not applicable

Routes/Effects of Exposure

These chemicals and metals are contained in a sealed can. For consumer use, adequate hazard warnings are included on both the package and on the battery. Potential for exposure should not exist unless the battery leaks, is exposed to high temperatures or is mechanically, physically, or electrically abused. Contains concentrated (35%) potassium hydroxide, which is caustic. Anticipated potential leakage of potassium hydroxide is 2 to 20 ml, depending on battery size. A similar amount of zinc/zinc oxide may also leak.

1. Inhalation

2. Ingestion

3. Skin

Respiratory (and eye) irritation may occur if fumes are released due to heat or an abundance of leaking batteries.

Not anticipated due to size of batteries; choking may occur with the smaller AAA and AAAA batteries. Irritation, including caustic burns/injury, may occur following exposure to a leaking battery.

a. Contact

Irritation, including caustic burns/injury, may occur following exposure to a leaking battery.

4. Eye Contact b. Absorption

Not anticipated

Irritation, including caustic burns/injury, may occur following exposure to a leaking battery.

5. Other Not applicable

E. — ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

1. Applicable Regulations All ingredients listed in TSCA inventory.

2. DOT Hazard Class -

3. DOT Shipping Name -

Not applicable

Not applicable

Please note: These batteries are not regulated by U. S. DOT or international agencies as hazardous materials or dangerous goods when shipped. Duracell uses the article name 'Alkaline Batteries - Non-hazardous' on all domestic and international bills of lading.

Environmental Effects

These batteries pass the U. S. EPA’s Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure and therefore, may be disposed of with normal waste.

GMEL# 2002.8

Page 3 of 4

F. — EXPOSURE CONTROL METHODS

Engineering Controls

General ventilation under normal use conditions.

Eye Protection

None under normal use conditions. Wear safety glasses when handling leaking batteries.

Skin Protection

None under normal use conditions. Use neoprene, rubber or latex gloves when handling leaking batteries.

Respiratory Protection

None under normal use conditions.

Other

Keep batteries away from small children.

G. — WORK PRACTICES

Handling and Storage

Store at room temperature. Avoid mechanical or electrical abuse. DO NOT short or install incorrectly.

Batteries may explode, pyrolize or vent if disassembled, crushed, recharged or exposed to high temperatures.

Install batteries in accordance with equipment instructions. Do not mix battery systems, such as alkaline and zinc carbon, in the same equipment. Replace all batteries in equipment at the same time. Do not carry batteries loose in pocket or bag. Do not remove battery tester or battery label.

Normal Clean Up

Not applicable

Waste Disposal Methods

Individual consumers may dispose of spent (used) batteries with household trash. Duracell does not recommend that spent batteries be accumulated (quantities of five gallons or more should be disposed of in a secure landfill), in accordance with appropriate federal, state and local regulations. Do not incinerate, since batteries may explode at excessive temperatures.

GMEL# 2002.8

Page 4 of 4

H. — EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Steps to be taken if material is released to the environment or spilled in the work area

Notify safety personnel of large spills. Caustic potassium hydroxide may be released from leaking or ruptured batteries. Avoid eye or skin contact and inhalation of vapors. Increase ventilation. Clean-up personnel should wear appropriate protective gear.

Fire and Explosion Hazard

Batteries may burst and release hazardous decomposition products when exposed to a fire situation. See Sec. C.

Extinguishing Media

As appropriate for surrounding area.

Firefighting Procedures

Use self-contained breathing apparatus and full protective gear.

I. — FIRST AID AND MEDICAL EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Eyes

Not anticipated. If battery is leaking and material contacts eyes, flush with copious amounts of clear, tepid water for 30 minutes. Contact physician at once.

Skin

Not anticipated. If battery is leaking, irrigate exposed skin with copious amounts of clear, tepid water for at least 15 minutes. If irritation, injury or pain persists, consult a physician.

Inhalation

Not anticipated. If battery is leaking, contents may be irritating to respiratory passages. Remove to fresh air.

Contact physician if irritation persists.

Ingestion

Not anticipated. Rinse the mouth and surrounding area with clear, tepid water for at least 15 minutes. Consult a physician immediately for treatment and to rule out involvement of the esophagus and other tissues.

Notes to Physician

1) The primary acutely toxic ingredient is concentrated (35%) potassium hydroxide.

2) Anticipated potential leakage of potassium hydroxide is 2-20 ml, depending on battery size.

3) This MSDS does not include or address the small button cell batteries, which can be ingested.

This MSDS covers the following discontinued product numbers:

DAC100, 105,110,116-118,123-124, 130, 200,

610,810,820,918

The information contained in the Material Safety Data Sheet is based on data considered to be accurate, however, no warranty is expressed or implied regarding the accuracy of the data or the results to be obtained from the use thereof.

MSDS-5 (2/00) GMEL# 2002.8

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

Product Name: Sealed Maintenance Free Lead-Acid Batteries

DATE:

COMPONENTS

Lead (Pb, Pb0

2

, PBSO

4

)

Sulfuric Acid

Fiberglass Separator

ABS Plastic

COMPONENTS

Lead

Lead Sulfate

Lead Dioxide

Sulfuric Acid

Fiberglass Separator

ABS Plastic

COMPONENTS

Lead

Sulfuric Acid

Hydrogen

Fiberglass Separator

ABS Plastic

Skin Contact:

Eye Contact:

Ingestion:

10/1/2003

WEIGHT %

6.2

9.4

about 1.3

N/A

ISSUED BY ENGINEERING

HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS

LD50

TLV

N/A

1mg/m 3

ORAL

(500) mg/kg

(2,140) mg/kg about 70% about 20% about 5% about 5%

DENSITY

11.34

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

PHYSICAL DATA

MELTING POINTS

SOLLUBILITY

(H

2

O)

327.4º C (Boiling)

1070º C (Boiling)

None

40 mg/l(15 0 C)

290º C (Boiling) about 114º C (Boiling)

N/A

None

100%

Slight

N/A N/A None

FLAMMABILITY DATA

FLASHPOINT EXPLOSIVE LIMIT

None

None

None

None

N/A

None

4% - 72.4%

N/A

N/A

TELEPHONE NO.

LC50

INHALATION

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

ODOR

None

None

None

Acidic

Toxic

No Odor

COMMENTS

(619) 661-2030

LC50

CONTACT

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

APPEARANCE

Silver-Gray Metal

White Powder

Brown Powder

Clear Colorless Liquid

White Fibrous Glass

Solid

Sealed batteries can emit hydrogen if over charged

(float voltage > 2.40 VPC).

Toxic vapors may be released. In case of fire, wear self-contained breathing apparatus.

Temp. over 300º C (572º F) may release combustible gases. In case of fire: wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus.

FIRST AID

SULFURIC ACID PRECAUTIONS

Flush with water, see physician if contact area is large or if blisters form.

Call physician immediately and flush with water until physician arrives.

Call physician. If patient is conscious, flush mouth with water, have patient drink milk or sodium bicarbonate solution.

Continued on Page 2

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

(PAGE 2 OF 2)

C O M P O N E N T

S T A B I L I T Y

C O L Y M E R I Z A T I O N

I N C O M P A T I B I L I T Y

D E C O M P O S I T I O N P R O D U C T S

C O N D I T I O N S T O A V O I D

R E A C T I V I T Y D A T A

S u l f u r i c A cid

S t a b l e a t a l l t e m p e r a t u r es

W i l l n o t p o l y m e r i ze

R e a c t i v e m e t a l s , s t r o n g b a s e s , m o s t o r g a n i c c o m p o u n d s

S u l f u r i c d i o x i d e , t r i o x i d e , h y d r o g e n s u l f i d e , h y d r o g e n

P r o h i b i t s m o k i n g , s p a r k s , e t c .

f r o m b a t t e r y c h a r g i n g a r e a .

A v o i d m i x i n g a c i d w i t h o t h e r c h e m i c a l s

S t

W e a p s t s e t o t d i s a k e p o s a i l n c a m e t s e h o o f d : l e a k o r s p i l l :

S P I L L O R L E A K P R O C E D U R E S

I f s u l f u r i c a c i d i s s p i l l e d f r o m a b a t t e r y , n e u t c a r b o n s y s t e m .

( s o

D o d a n o a s h ) , t o a l l o w r c a l c i u m u n n e u t r a l o x i d e i z e d

( l i m e ) .

a c i d i n t o r i l i z e a c i d

F l u s h a r e a s e w a g e s w i t h b i c a r b o n a t e w y s i t h t e m .

w a t e r a n d d

( b a k i n g i s c a r d t s o o d a t h e

) , s o d i u m s e w a g e

N e u w a s t t r i l e i z e d a n d a c i d d i s p o m a y s e d b o f e f l u s h a c c o r e d d i d o n g t w o n t h e l o c a ,l s e w e r .

s t a t e ,

S p a n d e f n t e d b a t t e r i e s e r a l g u i d e m l i u s t n e s .

b e

A t r e a t e d c o p y o f a s h t h i s a z a r

M S d o u s

D S m u s t b e s u p p l i e d t o a n y s c r a p d e a l e r o r s e c o n d a r y l e a d s m e l t e r w i t h b a t t e r y .

P R O T E C T I O N

S

R

E

K

E

Y

I

S P

E

N

S

I R

E

A T

X P

O R

O S

Y

U R E S I T E P R O T E C T I ON C O M M E N TS

R u b b e r g l o v e s , A p r on

R e s p i r a t o r ( f o r l e a d)

P r o t e c t i v e e q u i p m e n t o t h e r w i s e d a m a g e d .

A m u r e s t b s p i r e a t w o o r r n i f t h s h o u l d e b b a t t e r y i s e c r a c k e d o r w o r n d u r i n g r e c l a i m o p e r a t i o n s i f t h e T L V i s e x c e e d e d .

S a f e t y g o g g l e s , F a c e S h i e ld

E L E C T R I C A L S A F E T Y

D u e t o t h e b a t t e r y ' s l o w i n t e r n a l r e s i s t a n c e a n d h i g h p o w e r d e n s i t y , h i g h l e v e l s o f s h o r t c i r c u i t c u r r e n t c a n b e d e v e l o p e d a c r o s s t h e b a t t e r y t e r m i n a l s .

D o n o t r e s t t o o l s m a i n t a i n i n g b a t t e r y s y s t e m s .

o r c a b l e s o n t h e b a t t e r y .

U s e i n s u l a t e d t o o l s o n l y .

F o l l o w a l l i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d d i a g r a m s w h e n i n s t a l l i n g o r

H E A L T H H A Z A R D D A T A

L E A D : T h e t o x i c e f f e c t s o f l e a d a r e a c c u m u l a t i v e a n d s l o w t o a p p e a r .

I t a f f e c t s t h e k i d n e y s , r e p r o d u c t i v e , a n d c e n t r a l n e r v o u s s y s t e m s .

T h e s y m p p a i n .

t o m s

E x p o o f s u r l e e a d t o o v e r l e a d e x p o f r o m s u a r e a b a t r e t e r a n e m i a , y m o s t v o m o f t e r n i t i n g o c

, c h u r e a s d a c h e d u r i n g

, l s t o m a c h e a d r e c l a i p a i n ( l e a d m o p e r a t i c o l o n s i c ) , t h r o d i z z i n e s s , u g h t h e l o s s b r e a t h o f i n g a p p o r e t i t e , a n d m u s c l e a n d i n g e s t i o n o f l e a d d u s t j o i n t o r f u m e s .

S U L a c i d

F U w i l l

R c

I C a u s

A e

C I D : S u l f u r i c

G I t r a c t b u r n s .

a c i d

A c i d i s a c a n s t r o n g b e r e l c o e a r r o s s e d i v i f e t

.

h

C o n t a c t w i t h a c i d e b a t t e r y c a s e i s d c a n a m a c g a s e d u e s e v e r e o r i f v e n t s b u r n s a r e o n t h e s t a m p e r e d k i n w i t a n d h .

i n e y e s .

I n g e s t i o n o f s u l f u r i c

F I B E R G L A S S S E P A R A T O R :

C o m f o l l w i t h t y p e H f i l t e r .

A b o v e

N T P o r O S H A .

F i b r o u r g l a s s

1 0 F / C C u p t o i s a n i r r i t a

5 0 F / C C n t u s o f t h e e U l t r u a p p e r

T w i n r e p i r a t o r y w i t h t y p e t r a c t ,

H f i l s t e r .

k i n

T h a n d i s p e r o y e s .

d u c t

F o r e x p o s u r e i s n o t c o n s i d u p e r e d t o 1 0 F / C C u c a r c i n o g e n i c s e M b y

S A

A L L D A T A M U S T B E P A S S E D T O A N Y S C R A P D E A L E R O R S M E L T E R W H E N B A T T E R Y I S R E S O L D .

Power-Sonic Corporation

9163 Siempre Viva Road, San Diego, CA 92154 Tel (619) 661-2020 Fax (619) 661-3650

Website: www.power-sonic.com E-Mail: [email protected]

Material Safety Data Sheet

May be used to comply with

OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard.

29 CFR 1910.1200 Standard must be consulted for specific requirements.

Identity (As Used on Label and List)

KEEPER II/Lithium/Thionyl Chloride Battery

Section I

Manufacturer's Name

Eagle-Picher Technologies, LLC

Address (Number, Street, City State, and Zip Code)

P.O. Box 130

14212 Bethel Road

Seneca, MO 64865

U.S. Department of Labor

Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(Non-Mandatory Form)

Form Approved

OMB No. 1218-0072

Note: Blank spaces are not permitted. If any item is not applicable, or no information is available, the space must be marked to indicate that

Emergency Telephone Number

417-776-2256 800-424-9300 (CHEMTREC)

Telephone Number for Information

417-776-2256

Date Prepared

1-Jul-98

Signature of Preparer (optional)

Section II - Hazardous Ingredients/Identity Information

Hazardous Components (Specific Chemical Identity, Common Name(s))

Lithium metal Cas #7439-93-2

Thionyl chloride (SOC1

2

) Cas #007719-09-7

OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV

N/A-reactive alkali metal

1/0 ppm 5/0 ppm

Other Limits Recommended % (optional)

Section III - Physical/Chemical Characteristics

Boiling Point

N/A

Vapor Pressure (mm Hg.)

N/A

Vapor Density (Air=1)

N/A

Specific Gravity (H

2

O=1)

Melting Point

N/A

N/A

Evaporation Rate (Butyl Acetate=1)

N/A

Solubility in Water

N/A

Appearance in Odor

N/A

Section IV - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data

Flash Point (Method Used)

N/A

Flammable Limits

Extinguishing Media

Do not use water. Use dry chemical, soda ash, sand.

Special Fire Fighting Procedures

Use self contained breathing apparatus and full protective equipment.

LEL UEL

Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards

Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 125°C (257°F), incinerate or expose contents to water.

Vent, rupture or explosion may result and cause severe burns.

(Reproduce Locally) OSHA 174, Sept. 1985

Section V - Reactivity Data

Stability Unstable

Stable XX

Conditions to Avoid:

Vent rupture or explosion will release thionyl chloride

Incompatibility (Materials to Avoid)

SOC1

2

Water, humid air, alkalies, and temperature above 140°C (284°F)

Hazardous Decomposition or Byproducts

SOC1

2

In presence of water or humid air, hydrochloric acid & sulfur oxide.

Hazardous

May Occur

Polymerization Will Not Occur

Section VI - Health Hazard Data

XX

Conditions to Avoid

Routes(s) of Entry

Eyes

Inhalation?

Health Hazards (Acute and Chronic)

Yes

Skin?

Yes

Ingestion?

Yes

SOC1

2

- Will burn and irritate eyes & skin. Upper respiratory irritant. Continuous inhalation of fumes may cause lung damage.

Carcinogenicity

N/A

NTP?

IARC Monographs?

OSHA Regulated?

Signs and Symptoms of Exposure

SOC1

2

- Eye and skin irritation, pungent odor and respiratory irritation.

Medical Conditions Generally Aggravated by Exposure

N/A

Emergency and First Aid Procedures

If free(S0C1

2

) is present, evacuate areas and provide ventilation, wash exposed area with soda ash or sodium bicarbonate solution. Seek medical attention.

Section VII - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use

Steps to Be Taken in Case Material is Released or Spilled

Avoid contact if vent rupture or explosion has occurred. Other wise protect from heat, short circuit of terminals, an accumulation of shorted batteries, which may cause dangerous elevated temperatures

Waste Disposal Method

Dispose of waste according to federal EPA, state and local regulations.

Precautions to be taken in Handling and Storing

Do not short circuit, heat above 125°C (257°F), recharge, disassemble, incinerate or expose to water.

Other Precautions

Section VIII - Control Measures

Self-contained breathing apparatus

Ventilation Local Exhaust

Mechanical (General)

N/A

Protective Gloves

Neoprene

Other Protective Clothing or Equipment

N/A

Work/Hygienic Practices

N/A

Specific

Other

Eye Protection

Recommended

B

MSDS No.- T-36-01 (Revision. -G)

Q u a l i t y F i r s t

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

SECTION 1- CHEMICAL PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Name- Tadiran Batteries Ltd., P. O. Box 1, Kiryat Ekron, Israel 70500.

US office address- 2 Seaview Blvd. Port Washington NY 11050

Emergency Telephone No. – CHEMTREC: 1-800-424-9300

Tel. for information: 1-516-621-4980

Tel. for information 972-8-944-4503

Products Name: Primary Lithium Thionyl Chloride (Li/SOCl

2

) cells and batteries, Nonrechargeable. Cells include the models of TL, TLH, and TLL, 3.6V series.

SECTION 2- COMPOSITION, INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS

Ingredient Name

Lithium Metal (Li)

CAS # % ACGIH (TLV) OHSA

(PEL)

7439-93-2 <5% Not Established None

CHIP

Classification

F: R14/15

C: R34

Thionyl Chloride (SOCl

Lithium Chloride (LiCl)

2

) 7719-09-7 <47

7447-41-8

%

1 ppm

(5 mg/M 3 )

<2% Not Established

R: 14/15, 34

S: (1/2), 8,43,45

5 mg/m 3 R: 14,20/22,29,

35.

S: (1/2),26,36/

37/39, 45

Carbon (C)

Aluminum Chloride (AlCl

3

1333-86-4 <6% 3.5 mg/m

) 7446-70-0 <5% 2 mg/m 3

3 3.5

(Al salt, soluble)

R:

S:

45

34

(1/2),7/8,28,

SECTION 3 - HAZARD IDENTIFICATION

The lithium Thionyl chloride batteries described in this MSDS are hermetically sealed units, which are not hazardous when used according to the recommendations of the manufacturer.

Under normal condition of use of the batteries, the electrode materials and the liquid electrolyte they contained are non-reactive provided the battery integrity is maintained. Risk of exposure exists only in case of mechanical, electrical or thermal abuse. Thus the batteries should not short circuit, recharge, puncture, incinerate, crush, immerse in water, force discharge, or expose to temperatures above the temperature range of the cell or battery. In these cases there is risk of fire or explosion

MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc

1/6 Revised- 22/9/2004

B

SECTION 4- FIRST AID MEASURES

Q u a l i t y F i r s t

In case of battery rupture, explosion, or major leakage, evacuate personnel from contaminated area and provide good ventilation to clear out corrosive fumes, gases or the pungent odor. Seek immediate medical attention.

Eyes First rinse with plenty of water for 15 minutes (remove contact lenses if easily possible), and then seek medical attention.

Skin Remove contaminated clothes and rinse skin with plenty of water or shower for

15 min. Refer to medical attention.

Inhalation Remove to fresh air, rest, and half-upright position, use artificial respiration if needed, and refer to medical attention.

Ingestion rinse mouth, DO NOT induce vomiting, give plenty of water to drink, and refer to medical attention.

SECTION 5- FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES

FLAMMABLE LIMIT IN AIR: NA

EXTINGUISHING MEDIA:

1. Lith- X (Class D extinguishing media) is the only effective on fires involving a few lithium batteries. If the cells are directly involved in a fire DO NOT USE: WATER,

SAND, CO

2

, HALON, and DRY POWDER OR SODA ASH EXTINGUISHERS.

2. If the fire is in adjacent area and the cells that are either packed in their original containers or unpacked, the fire can be fought based on fueling material, e.g., paper and plastic products. In these cases the use of copious amounts of cold water is effective extinguishing media. Storage area may employ sprinkler system with cold water.

AUTO-IGNITION: NA

SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES: Wear self-contained breathing apparatus to avoid breathing of irritant fumes (NIOSH approved SCBA & full protective equipment). Wear protective clothing and equipment to prevent body contact with electrolyte solution.

Fire may be fought, but only from safe fire-fighting distance. Evacuate all persons from immediate area of fire.

UNUSUAL EXPLOSION AND FIRE EXPLOSION: Battery may explode when subject to: excessive heat (above 150ºC), recharged, over-discharged (discharge below 0V), punctured and crushed. During thermal decomposition generation of chlorine (Cl

2

), hydrogen chloride (HCl), and sulfur dioxide (SO

2

) can be formed.

SECTION 6- SPILL OR LEAKAGE PROCEDURES

PROCEDURES TO CONTAIN AND CLEAN UP LEAKS OR SPILLS: The material contained within the battery would only be released under abusive conditions.

In the event of battery rapture and leakage: contain the spill while wearing proper protective clothing and ventilate the area. Than, cover with sodium carbonate

MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc

2/6 Revised- 22/9/2004

B

Q u a l i t y F i r s t

(Na

2

CO

3

) or 1:1 mixture of soda ash and slaked slime. Keep away from water, rain, and snow. Placed in approved container (after cooling if necessary) and disposed according to the local regulations.

NEUTRALIZING AGENT: Sodium carbonate (Na

2 and slaked slime.

CO

3

) or 1:1 mixture of soda ash

WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD: Product decomposed by water must be neutralized.

May be added to waste water in sufficiently diluted form.

PRECAUTIONS IN HANDLING AND STORING; Avoid short-circuiting, overcharging and heating to high temperatures. Store the batteries in dry and cool area and keep container dry and tightly closed in well-ventilated area. Store away from food and drink.

OTHER PRECAUTIONS; Never attempt to disassemble, machine, or otherwise modify batteries or injury may result.

SECTION 7- HANDLING AND STORAGE

The batteries should not be opened, destroyed or incinerate, since they may leak or rupture and release to the environment the ingredients that they normally contained in the hermetically sealed container.

HANDLING Do not short circuit terminals, or expose to temperatures above the temperature rating of the battery, over charge the battery, forced over-discharge

(voltage below 0.0V), throw to fire.

Do not crush or puncture the battery, or immerse in liquids.

STORAGE Storage preferably in cool (below 30ºC), dry and ventilated area, which is subject to little temperature change.

Do not place the battery near heating equipment, nor expose to direct sunlight for long periods. Elevated temperatures can result in shortened battery life and degrade performance.

Keep batteries in original packaging until use and do not jumble them.

Do not store batteries in high humidity environment for long periods.

OTHER the cells and the batteries are not rechargeable batteries and should not be charged.

Applying pressure and deforming the battery may lead to disassembly followed by eye skin and throat irritation.

Follow manufacturers recommendations regarding maximum recommended current and operating temperature range.

SECTION 8 - EXPOSURE CONTROLS & PERSONAL PROTECTION

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: None necessary under normal use. In case of abuse and leak of liquid or fumes, use NIOSH approved Acid Gas Filter Mask or Self-

Contained Breathing Apparatus.

VENTILATION: Not necessary under normal use. In case of abuse, use adequate mechanical ventilation (local exhaust) for battery that vent gas or fumes.

PROTECTIVE GLOVES: None under normal use. In case of spill use PVC or Nitrile gloves of 15 mils (0.015 inch) or thicker.

MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc

3/6 Revised- 22/9/2004

B

Q u a l i t y F i r s t

EYE PROTECTION: Use ANSI approved chemical worker safety goggles or face shield.

OTHER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Chemical resistance clothing is recommended along with eye wash station and safety shower should be available meeting ANSI design criteria.

WORK HYGIENIC PRACTICES: Use good chemical hygiene practice. Wash hands after use and before drinking, eating or smoking. Launder contaminated cloth before reuse.

SUPPLEMENTARY SAFETY AND HEALTH DATA: If the battery is broken or leaked the main hazard is the electrolyte. The electrolyte is mainly solution of Lithium chloride (LiCl), and aluminum chloride (AlCl

3

) in Thionyl chloride (SOCl

2

).

Fires may be fought but only from safe fire fighting distance, evacuate all persons from immediate area of fire.

Prevent heating of the battery, charging the battery, discharge to predetermined limit, do not crush, disassemble, incinerate or short circuit.

SECTION 9- PHYSICAL DATA

BOILING POINT (760 mm Hg)

VAPOR PRESSURE (mm Hg, 25ºC)

VAPOR DENSITY (air=1)

NA, unless individual components exposed

NA, unless individual components exposed

NA, unless individual components exposed

DENSITY (gr/cc)

VOLATILE BY VOLUME (%)

> 1 gr/cc

NA

EVAPORATION RATE (butyl acetate=1) NA, unless individual components exposed

PHYSICAL STATE Solid

SOLUBILITY IN WATER (% by weight) NA, unless individual components exposed

PH

APPEARANCE

ODOR

NA, unless individual components exposed

Geometric Solid Object

If leaking, gives off pungent corrosive odor

SECTION 10- STABILITY AND REACTIVITY

STABLE OR NOT STABLE Stable

INCOMPATIBILITY (MATERIAL TO AVOID) Strong mineral acids, water and alkali solutions.

HAZARDOUS

DECOMPOSITION

PRODUCTS

1. Reaction of lithium with water: Hydrogen (H

2 hydroxide (LiOH).

), Lithium

2. Thermal decomposition over 150ºC: Sulfur oxides, (SO

2

SO

3

), Sulfur chorides (SCl

2

, S

2

Cl

2

), Chlorine (Cl

2 oxide (Li

2

O).

,

), Lithium

3. Electrolyte with water: Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) and SO

2

DECOMPOSITION TEMPERATURE (ºF)

NA

HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION: May Occur____ Will Not Occur __X__

CONDITIONS TO AVOID Avoid mechanical abuse, and electrical abuse such as short-circuiting, overcharge, over-discharge,

(voltage reversal) and heating.

MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc

4/6 Revised- 22/9/2004

B

SECTION 11- TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Q u a l i t y F i r s t

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUE (TLV) AND SOURCE: NA

HEALTH HAZARD ACUTE AND CHRONIC: Inhalation, skin contact, eye contact and ingestion are not likely by exposure to sealed battery.

Inhalation, skin contact and eye contact are possible when the battery is opened.

Exposure to internal contents, the corrosive fumes will be very irritating to skin, eyes and mucous membranes. Overexposure can cause symptoms of non-fibrotic lung injury and membrane irritation.

Carcinogenicity- NTP: No

Carcinogenicity- IARC: No

Carcinogenicity- OSHA: No

Explanation of Carcinogenicity- No ingredient of a concentration of 0.1% or greater is listed as a carcinogen or suspected carcinogen.

SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF OVEREXPOSURE: Exposure to leaking electrolyte from ruptured or leaking battery can cause:

Inhalation - Burns and irritation of the respiratory system, coughing, wheezing, and shortness of breath.

Eyes - Redness, tearing, burns. The electrolyte is corrosive to all ocular tissues.

Skin - The electrolyte is corrosive and causes skin irritation and burns.

Ingestion - The electrolyte solution causes tissue damage to throat and gastro/ respiratory track.

MEDICAL CONDITION AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE: Preexisting skin, asthma and respiratory diseases are generally aggravated by exposure to liquid electrolyte vapors or liquid. For further information refer to section 4.

SECTION 12- ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION

1. When properly used and disposed the battery does not present environmental hazard.

2. The battery does not contain mercury, cadmium, or lead.

3. Do not let internal components enter marine environment. Avoid release to waterways, wastewater or ground water.

SECTION 13- DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS

1. Disposal must be in accordance with the applicable regulations in every country and state.

2. Disposal of the Lithium batteries should be performed by permitted, professional disposal firms knowledgeable in Federal, State or Local requirements of hazardous waste treatment and hazardous waste transportation.

3. Incineration should never be performed by battery users, but eventually by trained professional in authorized facility with proper gas and fume treatment.

4. Recycling of battery can be done in authorized facility, through licensed waste carrier.

MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc

5/6 Revised- 22/9/2004

B

SECTION 14- TRANSPORTATION /SHIPPING

Q u a l i t y F i r s t

Lithium batteries UN number 3090, class 9 (miscellaneous)

Lithium batteries contained in equipment, UN number 3091, class 9 (miscellaneous).

Packing instructions for 3090- ICAO 903 for air transport

IMDG 903 for sea transport

ADR/RID 903 and 903a for road /rail transport

Packing instructions for 3091- ICAO 912/918 for air transport

IMDG 903 for sea transport

ADR/RID 903 and 903a for road /rail transport

In the USA transportation is according to Code of Federal Regulations (CFR 49

Chapter 1, paragraph 173.185)

A list of Tadiran batteries and cells that are subject to transport regulations and those that are exempted can be obtained from Tadiran Batteries Ltd.

Identification and labeling in compliance with the product drawing should include the battery title, nominal voltage, lot number and warning.

SECTION 15- REGULATORY INFORMATION

1. The transport of the lithium batteries is regulated by the United Nations, “Model

Regulations on Transport of Dangerous Goods”, 13 revised edition-2003 (special provisions 188, 230, and 310).

2. Within the US the lithium batteries and cells are subject to shipping requirements under 49 CFRCh. 1, paragraph 173.185, “lithium batteries”.

3. Shipping of lithium batteries in aircrafts are regulated by the International Civil

Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the International Air Transport Association

(IATA) 2003 requirements in Special Provisions A45, A88 and A99.

4. Shipping of lithium batteries on sea are regulated the International Maritime

Dangerous Goods (IMDG) 2002 requirements in special provisions 188, 230 and 310.

5. Shipping of lithium batteries on Road and Rail, 2002 requirements in special provisions 188, 230 and 310.

6. The internal component (thionyl chloride) is hazardous under the criteria of the

Federal OHSA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1920.1200.

SECTION 16- OTHER INFORMATION/DISCLAIMER

The information and the recommendations set forth are made in good faith and believed to be accurate at the date of preparation. The present file refers to normal use of the product in question. Tadiran Batteries makes no warranty expressed or implied.

MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc

6/6 Revised- 22/9/2004

DOW CORNING CORPORATION

Material Safety Data Sheet

DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.

Page: 1 of 7

1. IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE AND OF THE COMPANY

Dow Corning Corporation

South Saginaw Road

Midland, Michigan 48686

24 Hour Emergency Telephone: (989) 496-5900

Customer Service: (989) 496-6000

Product Disposal Information:

CHEMTREC:

(989) 496-6315

(800) 424-9300

MSDS No.: 01013190

Generic Description: Silicone

Physical Form: Liquid

Color: Colorless

Odor: Characteristic odor

NFPA Profile:

Note: NFPA = National Fire Protection Association

2. OSHA HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS

Revision Date: 2002/12/09

None present. This is not a hazardous material as defined in the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard.

3. EFFECTS OF OVEREXPOSURE

Acute Effects

Eye:

Skin:

Inhalation:

Oral:

Direct contact may cause temporary redness and discomfort.

No significant irritation expected from a single short-term exposure.

No significant effects expected from a single short-term exposure.

Low ingestion hazard in normal use.

Prolonged/Repeated Exposure Effects

Skin: No known applicable information.

Inhalation: No known applicable information.

Oral: No known applicable information.

Signs and Symptoms of Overexposure

No known applicable information.

Medical Conditions Aggravated by Exposure

No known applicable information.

The above listed potential effects of overexposure are based on actual data, results of studies performed upon similar compositions, component data and/or expert review of the product. Please refer to Section 11 for the detailed toxicology information.

DOW CORNING CORPORATION

Material Safety Data Sheet

DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.

Page: 2 of 7

4. FIRST AID MEASURES

Eye:

Skin:

Inhalation:

Oral:

Comments:

Immediately flush with water.

No first aid should be needed.

No first aid should be needed.

No first aid should be needed.

Treat symptomatically.

5. FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES

Flash Point:

Autoignition

Temperature:

Flammability Limits in Air:

Extinguishing Media:

> 214 °F / > 101.1 °C (Closed Cup)

Not determined.

Not determined.

Fire Fighting Measures:

On large fires use dry chemical, foam or water spray. On small fires use carbon dioxide

(CO2), dry chemical or water spray. Water can be used to cool fire exposed containers.

Self-contained breathing apparatus and protective clothing should be worn in fighting large fires involving chemicals. Use water spray to keep fire exposed containers cool.

Determine the need to evacuate or isolate the area according to your local emergency plan.

Unusual Fire Hazards: None.

Hazardous Decomposition Products

Thermal breakdown of this product during fire or very high heat conditions may evolve the following hazardous decomposition products: Carbon oxides and traces of incompletely burned carbon compounds. Silicon dioxide.

Formaldehyde.

6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES

DOW CORNING CORPORATION

Material Safety Data Sheet

DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.

Page: 3 of 7

Containment/Clean up: Determine whether to evacuate or isolate the area according to your local emergency plan. Observe all personal protection equipment recommendations described in Sections

5 and 8. For large spills, provide diking or other appropriate containment to keep material from spreading. If diked material can be pumped, store recovered material in appropriate container. Clean up remaining materials from spill with suitable absorbant. Clean area as appropriate since some silicone materials, even in small quantities, may present a slip hazard. Final cleaning may require use of steam, solvents or detergents. Dispose of saturated absorbant or cleaning materials appropriately, since spontaneous heating may occur. Local, state and federal laws and regulations may apply to releases and disposal of this material, as well as those materials and items employed in the cleanup of releases.

You will need to determine which federal, state and local laws and regulations are applicable. Sections 13 and 15 of this MSDS provide information regarding certain federal and state requirements.

Note: See section 8 for Personal Protective Equipment for Spills. Call Dow Corning Corporation, (989) 496-5900, if additional information is required.

7. HANDLING AND STORAGE

Use with adequate ventilation. Avoid eye contact.

Use reasonable care and store away from oxidizing materials.

8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION

Component Exposure Limits

There are no components with workplace exposure limits.

Engineering Controls

Local Ventilation:

General Ventilation:

None should be needed.

Recommended.

Personal Protective Equipment for Routine Handling

Eyes:

Skin:

Use proper protection - safety glasses as a minimum.

Washing at mealtime and end of shift is adequate.

Suitable Gloves:

Inhalation:

No special protection needed.

No respiratory protection should be needed.

Suitable Respirator: None should be needed.

Personal Protective Equipment for Spills

Eyes:

Skin:

Use proper protection - safety glasses as a minimum.

Washing at mealtime and end of shift is adequate.

DOW CORNING CORPORATION

Material Safety Data Sheet

DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.

Page: 4 of 7

Inhalation/Suitable

Respirator:

Precautionary Measures: Avoid eye contact. Use reasonable care.

Comments:

No respiratory protection should be needed.

When heated to temperatures above 150 degrees C in the presence of air, product can form formaldehyde vapors. Formaldehyde is a potential cancer hazard, a known skin and respiratory sensitizer, and an irritant to the eyes, nose, throat, skin, and digestive system.

Safe handling conditions may be maintained by keeping vapor concentrations within the

OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit for formaldehyde.

Note: These precautions are for room temperature handling. Use at elevated temperature or aerosol/spray applications may require added precautions. For further information regarding aerosol inhalation toxicity, please refer to the guidance document regarding the use of silicone-based materials in aerosol applications that has been developed by the silicone industry

(www.SEHSC.com) or contact the Dow Corning customer service group.

9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

Physical Form: Liquid

Color: Colorless

Odor: Characteristic odor

Specific Gravity @ 25°C: 0.965

Viscosity: 100 cSt

Freezing/Melting Point: Not determined.

Boiling Point: > 65 °C

Vapor Pressure @ 25°C: Not determined.

Vapor Density: Not determined.

Solubility in Water: Not determined. pH: Not determined.

Volatile Content: Not determined.

Note: The above information is not intended for use in preparing product specifications. Contact Dow Corning before writing specifications.

10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY

Chemical Stability:

Hazardous

Polymerization:

Conditions to Avoid:

Materials to Avoid:

Stable.

Hazardous polymerization will not occur.

None.

Oxidizing material can cause a reaction.

11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Special Hazard Information on Components

No known applicable information.

DOW CORNING CORPORATION

Material Safety Data Sheet

DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.

Page: 5 of 7

12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Environmental Fate and Distribution

Air: This product is a high molecular weight liquid polymer which has a very low vapour pressure (<1 mm Hg). As a result it is unlikely to become an atmospheric contaminant unless generated as an aerosol.

Water:

Soil:

This product has a very low water solubility (< 100 ppb). As it has a specific gravity of < 1, if discharged to water, it will initially form a surface film. As the product is non volatile and has a high binding affinity for particulate matter, it will adsorb to particulates and sediment out.

If discharged to surface water, this product will bind to sediment. If discharged in effluent to a waste water treatment plant, the product is removed from the aqueous phase by

Degradation: binding to sewage sludge. If the sewage sludge is subsequently spread on soil, the silicone product is expected to degrade.

This product, polydimethylsiloxane, degrades in soil abiotically to form smaller molecules.

These in turn are either biodegraded in soil or volatilized into the air where they are broken down in the presence of sunlight. Under appropriate conditions, the ultimate degradation products are inorganic silica, carbon dioxide and water vapour. Due to the very low water solubility of this product, standard OECD protocols for ready and inherent biodegradability are not suitable for measuring the biodegradability of this product. The product is removed >80% during the sewage treatment process.

Environmental Effects

Toxicity to Water

Organisms:

Toxicity to Soil Organisms:

Based on analogy to similar materials this product is expected to exhibit low toxicity to aquatic organisms.

Experiments show that when sewage sludge containing polydimethylsiloxane is added to soil, it has no effect on soil micro-organisms, earthworms or subsequent crops grown in the soil.

Bioaccumulation: This product is a liquid and is a high molecular weight polymer. Due to its physical size it is unable to pass through, or be absorbed by biological membranes. This has been confirmed by testing or analogy with similar products.

Fate and Effects in Waste Water Treatment Plants

This product or similar products has been shown to be non-toxic to sewage sludge bacteria.

Ecotoxicity Classification Criteria

Hazard Parameters (LC50 or EC50)

Acute Aquatic Toxicity (mg/L)

High

<=1

Medium

>1 and <=100

Low

>100

Acute Terrestrial Toxicity <=100 >100 and <= 2000

This table is adapted from "Environmental Toxicology and Risk Assessment", ASTM STP 1179, p.34, 1993.

>2000

This table can be used to classify the ecotoxicity of this product when ecotoxicity data is listed above. Please read the other information presented in the section concerning the overall ecological safety of this material.

13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS

DOW CORNING CORPORATION

Material Safety Data Sheet

DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.

Page: 6 of 7

RCRA Hazard Class (40 CFR 261)

When a decision is made to discard this material, as received, is it classified as a hazardous waste? No

State or local laws may impose additional regulatory requirements regarding disposal.

Call Dow Corning Corporate Environmental Management, (989) 496-6315, if additional information is required.

14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION

DOT Road Shipment Information (49 CFR 172.101)

Not subject to DOT.

Ocean Shipment (IMDG)

Not subject to IMDG code.

Air Shipment (IATA)

Not subject to IATA regulations.

Call Dow Corning Transportation, (989) 496-8577, if additional information is required.

15. REGULATORY INFORMATION

Contents of this MSDS comply with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200.

TSCA Status: All chemical substances in this material are included on or exempted from listing on the TSCA

Inventory of Chemical Substances.

EPA SARA Title III Chemical Listings

Section 302 Extremely Hazardous Substances:

None.

Section 304 CERCLA Hazardous Substances:

None.

Section 312 Hazard Class:

Acute: No

Chronic: No

Fire: No

Pressure: No

Reactive: No

Section 313 Toxic Chemicals:

None present or none present in regulated quantities.

DOW CORNING CORPORATION

Material Safety Data Sheet

DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.

Page: 7 of 7

Supplemental State Compliance Information

California

Warning: This product contains the following chemical(s) listed by the State of California under the Safe Drinking

Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65) as being known to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Massachusetts

None known.

No ingredient regulated by MA Right-to-Know Law present.

New Jersey

CAS Number Wt % Component Name

Pennsylvania

CAS Number Wt % Component Name

16. OTHER INFORMATION

Prepared by: Dow Corning Corporation

These data are offered in good faith as typical values and not as product specifications. No warranty, either expressed or implied, is hereby made. The recommended industrial hygiene and safe handling procedures are believed to be generally applicable. However, each user should review these recommendations in the specific context of the intended use and determine whether they are appropriate.

(R) indicates Registered Trademark

BLANK PAGE

BLANK PAGE

TeleFlow Model 3530-10B

Customer Instruction Manual

CI-3530-10B

May, 2006

Emerson Process Management

Bristol, Inc.

1100 Buckingham Street

Watertown, CT 06795

Phone: +1 (860) 945-2262

Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Electric Canada, Ltd.

Bristol Canada

6338 Viscount Rd.

Mississauga, Ont. L4V 1H3

Canada

Phone: 905-362-0880

Fax: 905-362-0882 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Process Management

BBI, S.A. de C.V.

Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso

Col. Morales Polanco

11540 Mexico, D.F.

Mexico

Phone: (52-55)-52-81-81-12

Fax: (52-55)-52-81-81-09 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Process Management

Bristol Babcock, Ltd.

Blackpole Road

Worcester, WR3 8YB

United Kingdom

Phone: +44 1905 856950

Fax: +44 1905 856969 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

Emerson Process Management

Bristol, Inc.

22 Portofino Crescent,

Grand Canals Bunbury, Western Australia 6230

Mail to: PO Box 1987 (zip 6231)

Phone: +61 (8) 9725-2355

Fax: +61 (8) 8 9725-2955 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

If you have comments or questions regarding this manual, please direct them to your local Bristol sales representative, or direct them to one of the addresses listed at left.

Bristol, Inc. does not guarantee the accuracy, sufficiency or suitability of the software delivered herewith. The Customer shall inspect and test such software and other materials to his/her satisfaction before using them with important data.

There are no warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, concerning the software and other materials delivered herewith.

TeleFlow

™

is a trademark of Bristol, Inc. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.

Copyright (c) 2006, Bristol, Inc., 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of

Bristol Inc.